Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 420

MAZATROL

MATRIX

CLASS ROOM

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Mazak

Digital MJTUf@PMtOg Solutions

IN
ONE

MATRIX Sale points


'0?

lifiM

...

f*

$ . t4

..4

n*j|*c*
/:

display
mctions.

|e
7

'

jySgQyyj~T- vC 11

M
-

&2AWOX

s==

muJ1 lg0'3Spic5Sgv';; .;S313i


J
-'-

4;

"

-:=

. -vV>

V-

I.-'-'1'

a
olwj *. It Iflj1

>'1

- 1 1*. IT

jTBil I j

[-TTT

mi
G3i f 1 :''<

TTI j
f v;1:1:1;1:1:1:1;1.!
! * I < f * I * I * J *fll3 I-I-~I112*
a -l~f
*

|g||

-.1

:~

{ ;/l

<?

1&

mMm

NC type
:.S

machine
display

PC
CPU
m
V.'-v.

MATRIX
INTE-M-INTE-eHU

_ _

INTE-DI INTE-e

Variaxis II -INTE-eVll

15" TFT

12. 1 "TFT

(XGA)

(SVGA)

Pentium in

NC

6 4 bit RISC

CPU
PLC
capability

Dual CPU
No. of steps: 128k
process time: 16.6ns

Geode
300MHz
6 4 bit RISC
Single CPU
No. of steps :64k
process time: 160ns

Servo
AMP

MDS-DH series
cycle time :11 M S

MDS-CH series
cycle time: 55 MS

servo
motor

3000/ 4000 r.p.m


(depend on motor)

2000/3000 r.p.m

encoder
capability

16,000,000 ppr

1,000,000 ppr

PC
OS type

Windows XP

Windows 2000
(Windows 95)

1,26GHz

>1

Ergonomically Designed Control Pane


1. Large display
(15inch)

Hi1$

'1

LvJ

>

\i

2. "QWERTY" key 1

e. i

h
,*

3, Acrylic key top

for easy click

II

4. Rotary override
switches
-L
..
5. Operation
switches in
operator side
"

-~

- .1 i

1 -VI I -

dm A
CM

i1

ril

:r

function

7. Same design for all


machines
*

Y;
:f

<

6. Key layout by

8. Tactile feel switches K


- allow an operator
to detect by feel

The equipment of a USB interface as standard has facilitated data upload/download and connection to peripheral equipments
that support IJSB.

In addition, large volumes of data can be transferred at high speed between networks with the 100BASE-TX compliant
LAN and that realizes seamless communications between an office and a machine in a factory.
Interface

USB
Ethernet
|

iPC card

Connected to

Standard

USB 1.1
1 00BASE-TX/1OBASE-T
iBack / lch
!
jPC Card Standard 95/97 compliant (CardBus)
iBack / 2 slots -PC Card Standard compliant (PCMCIA_V2. 1, JEIDA_4.2 compliant)
j 2 slots Type I/U ma x 2, Type IE: 1
'Front / 3ch

EC card

Front / 1 slot

jPC Card Standard ATA compliant memory card only


: 1 slot Type I/E (Type IE cannot be used.)

'#15/#

MATRIX

i"\

RSS

r3

U.I-2S6

*33

5 j T > lij
!

-;T:

mMml

fIS

POO

;: i;

TS,

.:/

m mm
l
m m '#

MmK 4m

i-

ifir

(Back Side)

9MR:

i mm i

..r

100BASE-T 1/F
PC Card x 2

& ;B;

$&&

II

ttrr

wmr

in

***

use x 1

IC Card x 1

lf jg|

I iM|||f#i|

.** *;; :.

|J

USB x 2

Rear side of part surrounded


with the yellow frame

is??

PC Card
T

safe&

I
Si

v-;3

J*

: !;

iHH

IS
iT: r
I [pgw,h
!M
pii

C;

m-V'.1
T:
ill.

MT

01
..

s'

..

:;

*11111

ai

JR" M9ll!R|p?4

Yi

ML

1Hfl
Hr
r

mm
m
IF

IT

*,

UN

mpr*

imp

f*

- -

Decrease printed circuit boards of NO unit


Reliability up because decreasing interfeces between each boards

WP
as

mm

..

M640MP r o 1 3 boards

.a';

yp!sfJ
;

&

MP

"

; ;

i-

sSIg

i
m
1

111

.
V-

MATRIX 5 boards

Decrease start-up time in cold climates because of equipment hard disk which
is used as car navigation

item
Operation temperature
0C NC start-up time

M640
5-55 C
About 22 min utes

MATRTIX
0-55 C
About 2 minutes

In addition to the existing work simulation for checking programs, the machine simulation has been added to check the
processing programs including a machine interference using fine 3D models of such as the machine, a workpiece and a tool.

1) Tins function will prevent a machine interference or collision before actual processing.
2) Both of Mazatrol and EIA/ISO programs can perform a simulation.
* The EIA/ISO program cannot perform a work simulation of the 5-axis (4-axis) simultaneous machining.
:t:
The EIA/ISO program cannot perform a work simulation of the mold machining using the micro segment program
3) This function simulates the machine real with 3D models of the machine and equipped tools. (The machine will be
delivered with the 3D models set.)
4) A simulation can be run in the background.

Machine simulation

Work simulation
I SB
f

x''

fwifcfc

-fi

*.*:* r*.s*

a.l
I

1 i :-Wj l mu.

-I*#*.. MW

-iK.Jt

*tl

1.*,

ii

34.1.

Wmm

HMVtXXXK JM1
*-.

<C*M

* 3.
.

"
;

i 7

tr

**>.

; SV.AT .
<K#9 i mm

II

!
I

if;

If

II

SiktlSPI

is*

&3<w*aga<iicsBSi

II

W&

"'t

WBJJEfcJAJ,arrcir

S'
flip

;;

MW MMP WWBB I

**i##,*lli*

ii

r
NHM

PM1

; *K.

1W

MKSW

mmm

AO

.......
mi i

it'

n__
*

?> **/)

I'

f
wAir

tilm#wi

Bras*;:;

WMTSias;

aw#

feiffAfSii*

iwwrt1

i Base

** \

The intelligent safety shield function prevents an interference or a collision due to an operational error during the manual
operation.
1) During the manual operation, the ganged operation of the actural machine and the 3D model simulation can check the
processing status and stop the machine before an interference or a collision ocurs.

2) Checking with 3D models will prevent an interference on a part where an operator cannot see directly.
3) The integration of the actual machine and 3D models simulates the machine movement exactly.

4) The machine can be set up quickly because there is no need to worry about an interference or a collision.

Actual Machine

3D Models
mm

m
1
"X,

**-

M
.1

- Hfen

>

!i

IS

LX

'A1,

:1

&

4
I

li.;

tl fil

h
i

'i

i-,

* m

mm
M

,..il

m m

'

>

**
I;,:-'.

IU

I
I Iflll

flllllg

"

Sts

-i

111

rp

r1
fcjMJ

? <r

Tr

4-

li

r* i

[Intelligent Thermal Slueld]

Outline

The traditional thermal displacement compensation function has performed the compensation considering that the thermal
deformation of the machine was proportional to the temperature. Using this method, the thermal displacement could be
compensated with the high accuracy in the steady state. However, just after the spindle speed was changed, it could not
be compensated properly because the constants did not match between the times when the thermal displacement and the
measured temperature changed.
The thermal displacement compensation software (MazakTdc) estimates and compensates the thermal deformation of the
machine based on the spindle speed and the temperature. And it monitors the spindle speed and compensates the thermal
displacement according to the speed; therefore, it can compensate it properly even in the transient state.

10

The MAZAK voice adviser is the audio messages by MATRIX itself with the speaker embedded in CNC of MATRIX,
notifying the safety confirmation, the contents of the operation during the set up of the machine and others. It is greatly
effective in preventing a mistake due to the lack of attention during every working process.
1)14 languages (As for some old Eastern European countries, please use English or a neighboring country's language.)
The MAZAK voice adviser has 52 messages such as greetings and notifications at the machine set-up, when starting the
automatic operation, during the automatic operation or during the maintenance work.
&

Good morning. Today is <dayofweek> <rnonth> <day>"


."Tins is manual operation at 10 times the feedrate."
'"The B-axis is selected. Pay attention for any turret interference."
|"Tool length measurement for a tool has not been completed."
|"Machine has stopped because optional stop is effective."
|"Add spindle lubricant." and other messages.
M

..

Internal speaker

<****? vg*T-

1 11

ili

r?

-j

ii

iii

'w''

'MM

-i-nri *.

HI

i~~

MI

V.

k.

mmm

fBiiipimm

mm mm

fifed*mmmmmmmmmmmmm mmm
mmm

&&&****

&

I r~m mmmmmmmmmmm mmmm


\m mmmmmmmmmmmmmm mmma

8
m
MR

The Mazatrol program has made it possible to control the upper turret with the 1st spindle and the lower turret with the 2nd
spindle simultaneously.

1st and 2nd process simultaneous cutting


1

1
rlFs

y[i

Hi*]

31
31

rill

31

31
SfijHS

fjl

31
31

1B5B31

31

31

j]

t][r]

Processing which used two programs (HEAD -1,HEAD -2) like Multiplex cannot be performed in INTE MATRIX senes.

...

Simultaneous cutting at unrelated work pieces

mm

Work No.1

Work No. 10

11

12

1,

Alarm history
1) A history of 10,000 alarms can be saved. (48 alarms in case ofM640)

2) Tire data is saved in the text format. Therefore, it is useful for gathering the alarm information.
[ C:\MC_s dgWarm\Alarm. bet]
3) It is possible to register 48 alarms that are not saved in the history file, such as Alarm No. 128 "OUTSIDE
INTERLOCK AXIS," which occurs frequently.
4) The alarm number has been increased 4 digits due to the addition of new functions.

3*8

**

ms i

fXAftm

**

# It

1*W It**!.
re*- *.#t
3*8 4M MM fc*f Mrs- IfSJStvM MMJ

IKrf (M|

** * X KWiMMKin< 1*01 ISM


US* S'MMW'IK* ISMS.

a OKMKMWf
jHtoNMr:

I
,-.

i* mm

318

**

8OTW

mt* in
a** HAS KM

ass

>

***>:

<88 ttfjunftMfc *<*

**

so

I#

Am",

S3 **
*V M

If

if

&< *.

sssssS

TOW
t-SIM

IOTWI

ai

* ka

erwtase

>*.

iJM*
s* ,n
t

saw.

m'MWM'
.

it

3* i?

S t*
*

ItWMB ***. .#***


MH SU*i 1#*0* KW-* .

tAa*

"m&Ktxt

?;*

V*

'*.**

3* if rra.bi.f

mm

s*
*,

o. ss* s*

me

a*s *f<x MM
:

m **

VK

******

** SUI&U, tH&ttl,* ttmwr

2*

a m.tf ISB

*'
s*

if 1 S3 ** %tx*m
if *.' 3 t* vm*w

SUSIMS. wsmtt;* CJM*ur

W
SO

Vr U
i* la
I* sa
S* *:
i. *
JO:

fctttlS'tw

S 24

1A..W

*##* Bttf

2SS *5 tOM.

zttt

i *

w I

i'X*i

K* itw J*N

*.*

wW'Sentb.

>

SS di'lr'
| **'

sat**;-#:*!

mmOs

*+

II

ww:

tllte II

?*'

-I

i,

. Running Management Display


1) The running management data for 12 months can be displayed.
2) The use status of spindles and the alarm information can be checked each day.

Use status of spindles (speed and load)


n iw
sn **
* rmi
8 :

<>*.

wt

*wwtw

*T W

Alarm information

9kn.rtm

tx

Li *>T **

H Bsm? *#?*||tssum'

<S '

>< t>S

*3H
jsiitxa

xt

**

S;*

feJfS

BeiSa&ai

&*** s s'M? ammwm f***


m\ VMMK *emt *K***SM: .{;*

mm

'uta

3SrtSM*.*fi

T. * ><0
B9-: M

iW*

ws.nt

*: H#

*.:#*

*?

**%*

jtWKJUss*

'

Sfrft

HMtf-J X

<<)

AW*

*i in; is

{.-V

*>*

K':i Sti

*ME

H fcS

*'I- *

I*

36:

**
*/ S
H ?<t 3

MEM I
vrt*> >

AM.

* #.

S UM*

wa-

t
S >

**;

:'l

i
1 <*

KW4

kwaiK
<<:*

.V;x5scsssssxd

***

>**.

ssssKSsxJssissxsx;

* mm.
%

u<m

;si! iSSSKSSSSXK

: **<* xwrnm?

* **> 1

JL

JXXSXSSS KSSXKSSXSX:

13

14

3. DIAGNOSIS MONITOR Display

The data of TO MONITOR DISP" are always displayed in both "SHORT" and "LONG." Also, one block of
data for "MEMORY MONITOR DISP" and two blocks of data for "I/O MONITOR DISP" have been
increased.
4. FLC SIGNAL Display
The addresses of a device corresponding to each "TITLE" are displayed.

5. HARDWARE MONITOR Display


The contents of the display will be altered due to the hardware change.

6. VERSION Display

The ladder version for the virtual machining is displayed.


UNIT
ITEM
MAIN-21
MAIN-B
LG-ENG
LADDER-F

VERSION

1001W000-A*W0
1001W001-A*W0
1001W011-AXW0
100 1W5 6 8 - AO 016

LADDER- B 10 0 1W568-A0 0 IB:


LGP

7. SERVO MONITOR & SPINDLE MONITOR Displays


Tire servo data is displayed on the "SPINDLE MONITOR" display, as the spindle has become servo type.

8. Start of Application Software from Mazatrol Menu


Application softwares can be started from the Mazatrol menu by editing a text file for a menu, (e.g.:
C:\MC__s dg\CustomMenu\CustomMenu. txt)
9,

Standard Installation of Print Screen Software on NC

A file can be saved in either of the TNG" and BMP" formats.

IS Print Screen 3

:
& SAVE

Active Print Screen & SAVE

10, Operation Log & Operation Player Softwares (M740Eye.exe

& M740Player.exe)

15

In case that a low reproducible trouble occurs during a complicated operation, it can be replicated by repeating
the operation using the operation log and operation player softwares, winch have been installed on NC as a
standard specification.

16

17

18

Control Overview
Control unit
MI-P12-M2 board

FCU7-MA513-22

HN011 card
HN102 card

HN123 card

HN163 card
HN482 card

HN531card

.*

[%,

IK

MI-P12-M2 : Board PC unit


HN011
HN102
HN123
HN163
HN482

: Relay card

:PLC engine card


: Sub-CPU card
: NC base card
: Memory card
(FLROM/SRAIVI)

19

HN531

-.Axis extension I/F


and CardBus slot

20

Back Side of Matrix


(jBWi

;VT**':C

Mi

ail

ix-#

Wwmm

M
i

PUK

:
v.t?

M$M

2 Backlights

IU.MIIHW

ill

I
im
wm

jwWMNggg*-.

IS85

SB

pl*l*

M.-mm

'MM!

:-'

Efc

it

US

I
S

|#S

L..._iaaiiiSjH mm

ir

y,
'

-V

-.l

(EffiiSiK

m
1RS?
m
'4*

~w-

ms
I;;'.

-M

wimmm w

$3#

(S

T;

r'-;:

mn

-I

%..
:-i

i'i

&

rS

kjtCi'i:.-:

.g
iiMMHI

'*:r.OT

e-

Right Side of Back

K? \

mf
':5
1:

Rotary 2 settings
1 = Pic Stop

= Initialize

Battery Plug

- S

4J1S1

m.

r<;ii

c:

lw
i la

m:wsl

"TJ
!V

MBm

5 -

L:

i,

m
;

in

iS
s?

iv.

ri1

y
-

Pf

Two Leds Display


Right side is like Fusion
Left will be always 1 .

Rotary Switch 1
Always = 0.
Rotary Switch 2
Like M640.

-k

si.

V3

I PI
21

Hi
|P

2 Usb 1.1 Plugs

id

100 Megabyte
Ethernet

22

Hidden Compact Flash -Drive D-Used to backup


the hard-drive
important
files
WBSBSSBSBSSBSSSmm

Top of Unit
Top of Matrix
- 2 Backlights,
top and bottom

Vt

%
r-,

'

jpampi I
i
;

fe .

2 large fans
2 Slot Pcmcia-32 bit

;.*?

ff

si?'

n ,n

XiierlR-'
'

Mw ,V:;

Pisi

Jr-

...

'vr'

....... .

r1

II I III I

iw

ruSSS

HSPii
.

iv'v;

tail

IBBHHH JH 5*
-dm

:-.

:& * u * -

. vr

v >'

V:j

sm

.-'

SI

RYJ

1111
ImAl

KHKEM

5wr- -; v>

gPiiS'pBpI 1
i

is

j,fc(V1),.lt,il.I.i

. f* f

X?

m. SaH

y.u

-V.'-

Mfil

"vr . .
IKS:

>a
m

T+m

-:

Bottom of unit
-

...

if

IssSslli

|:

j -;:C;

"'i

raw

(.. :

H
c,

.:;

;:-

"

mtmmw

fi:;V;

,-,- ..-i'*

'.'.'r-*-''*'"'* -v'

'vj

T
/

~ 11

:/! : . j
J

.wjjtj

fasm

M'S
W7

.-W..irm.P

iiaii

r-r'

?!;

k$

iSMMKT
%i

m f? t
sr
i
l

BPP!SWs

JM*

>4

;: -

Sira

Wits
i

ilflpf

f-P

iTf

hv:

V,

$'

Tu umnTXi.i.

3 IS:
" w*

j;

~irjk

ft

vJL'

".T.- 'C !_. '

IS

JSfiSS

IS! faPl

ill

i
Fl

'

lv:-

23

Bottom Backlight

Opt 2, To
MDS-DH Drives

fj

,1:

Mbw

Opt 1 , To
MDS-DH Drives, 1st Set of 8.

II
11

11
Sis

24

MIP12M2
PC Card.

1 .2 giga-hertz
256mb memory
XP Embedded

HN260
USB Connector Card
Considered connection point for the 2 back USB 1.1 devices.
Plugs into the Pc Board MIP12M2

HN260 card

M1-C73-M128 or M1-P12-M256: Main PC PCB


'G 'j
<2

-191.5 H
- V

i&.wiiiiiiiiiMm iriii:i Ti 1 1':

fSoUol

[2*00-1

f]

m
% LP
jit
in
/

.* 'i f3*pri
i

hi
1

m
G
S:
v&sjgmm

G-_.

:i

s,

M
-/

'

I
I

1m

;u

1#

iff

......
Gijg.

=mnsi
-

[Ml

v* VsyM

25

PC RAM DIMM: 256 MB

26

HN01 1 : PC to NC extender bus


Also called Relay card as relays signals between the PC to NC.
I SIS
caa|Fi. f 1

*118111 8S1mIII1

.iJSlSmmr mm

I ftisiSfi Sif ssl

J8P9 ifPIliy

m f>i

-I

MdP

:
r

..

IBH

m HR*

$838

KS

HN163 or HN154: NC main PCB


. .' v->

' Jfeg1':

A'

MS
SSESI
tjv

Si

'

i;l
li

ns ifl

;!

<

ES

Jj

MS

Sill;

6'

o *;?

1;

'r *

ESC

as.

<HBS(91
wmfm
,;
m
<~1
.-lfiS
:.:P*-

tl

st-tx1 I

?<

gS

.<

''KKK

8#

!}'

aWfe,

a SS
At V

SSI 55S II

4*

'

CS*30

mavnH

i.

a,

iff!

sS!

27

28

HN163-HN203-HN123
m

aR

nm

i&

wii'1]

to

Hr-

Si

Kli

.i

wm

77Pr

|U

*n

ma

Ms

EKMP

mm
MB

MnmmSSinmWm: -

MS m

Hi
Li

S38

mV

i ? M
ii
SB

MB

K .

&

rs

'

'i

i!

tear*"

Pic car

sa

pftissfcas

&T

n:!i

,'v.

mm
,

E5

UTM
'AT EMEI

TIT

mm
JB
Jill ||M

es

fS;
'aes
~i

ii

in

'

:-;

Vr)'(Sy-

Ss

ffS

IfE

IS

'.II >';>:!

Ij ife

I tm,

mm

isss

S2

E
Vv<

a ss:- ;l
!!'tllilily
: J jk H s
9

|i
?!
r

*
i

fWffiW

fr

LAL-nrsr

HW

Sli#Mi

IK

ir'-'j

nyav
MsflJSl

U ii

HN 1 02 Bf'SWs__

Sale
An

m
H

hm

aN

'r

3
23

HR

a*

fi:

L2Q

Ml

'i'-

ii

7T

iU

B& 1

BBKE

V\l

Mi

'f:

Ti

rUmm

IE

ssHa

I II

mm
mm
m
mm
fej

[. V

HS

r,,

im

m
- m
ns

im

HN123
i

Sub-CPU

HN102

m
ivVI

L-

Pic Engine Card. Where the plc(s)

resides.
Stores the pic ladder and 11register information
Also, Latching parameter registers.
Capacitor backed up for 30
minutes

Si

;wA Jflr
>

Tglifs

i
I$

Jfr&k:-,iOl
K&%i'Tm
iiMaSs

Sri

*x

!j ,4$? iSSEs

JF,

n*

jH

9B

IBIf88

l<

ftpe
Pfgl
Hi

In
;*S-.

mmmm

BBSPPKM

ii
c?
tm

... ..

; ,j

ByJ

,TrlE

mwm

32tjT

*1

'W:

/irrai'

jfc

1 1>- nT7vr

29

);

Mai
>A

fcEWK?!
hV

-ii

HS

jU*

fc

apgte.i!p

p;

Pl-

5l

32

wsswa

y>.,

"

>

a*
*11

as

ir
31mn

'JUr
3
b\*p

Wi

'-'J*

S3

'SI i5- f
fc

...-

*
1

.LI

St

--*--

jO

*r

.iss

~J.'T~

CN

c/o

i-H

a
O

o3

T3

03

co
?-i

o
CN

30

u>

*T

**".**

O
4h

T3
CD

CO

bS)

G
,-G

o
G

G
5-h

>

1
m.
m i!

TOttj, 'i

IfijBS
r-rec

*>XI MvnrtffHtani

!<*#*

-~/5 S

U*'

'-

=-,'-

-Wr

>t_ >>:

T3

:<

rV

IS!%

3 -usgsyrsignaw vaftsakasteri

IB

GH

\aM
:

V?v

-.

L-

1
r
Bf

<.~i

9
_

'

fl

sV.
a

<ajAi.-zei2

-r-

pifftiWl!

&

il
m

..

jLiCli

im

li

y ma'1

R
iflfci
k-

fcMM

il

I [c:Vjj

as

**

k.j

!<

l-|

'3

n
!-

[-1

i-i ti

iin

..

W*

HN482
Main Memory Card

This is where the Sram data is stored,


Machine parameters, Tool data, etc.
Contains Main A, control s.n, and the Option
information
Capacitor backup for 30 minutes

31

32

HN482: NC main memory PCB, SRAM and FLROM

k
j
73

R3-N0.40 I

iiljBi
3
PftfftfPnMn ifiteaiiffl I
m

SUBf;

as--

This contains Main-A, Control Serial Number,


Options, and SRAM data(parameters,tool data, etc.
Changing this requires control s.n. and options.
Like Hrl 13

HN531 : PCMCIA slots (2) and 2nd servo interface (OPT2)


CardBus l/F
2 Slots CardBus, 32 bit.
-r
f"

Si

ml

&JJL2

'i j aSfey

*w iS

'

[T1

i:

s c

tempi
55

pfyl
jOK

-N

ess
MM1

ss

H
0

i3

~t

I
I
V

|.a

*sm *5
d + lL

5US
P
3IT

itJlV:
(j

Tf:

IT: .n

gpc'l!
SEIa

Mil

SH
?

.Wi-'

33

0pt2

34

HN251
Similar to HR25 1 on the M640
Includes the Compact Flash card input as well

as USB

connection.
USB connection is 1 .1 version, not 2.0.
G291 cable connects to Pc Card for USB
G160 cable connects to HN163 for compact flash.

HN251 : Front slot PC card and USB interfaces

/V K
'r-

:>

'wm,

rv&m>if

>'

V-,

'.

r*

m5 Ml

ms

w-iiM %
m
p

m1

'l

rnirnm

irar

sa

ii
r1

'

TV

a-'*-
r**\

35

36

HN271/NH272: LCD interface PCB


Sw
;/ -y

*35

'

V--""

S%-

A' ;ji'
':.

254
.?r

f/'r

s.'

S:

5'W'

\: -NS

58

r it i *,

Si

mm

T'i
ani :

:iu

Si

mmm

xm

mmm

*2*2 n

iv-y-n;

HH

sdllillh

,- j

TSSE
S>7:S;;.,a

rA

' '

MSSBSSm

&8fc

LA

fc>

:-

BRMtal0|l M

jpagps
I,
.'*>
MB

\:ig

s!

H
L'i

APFi

bfe3$>3s?#paH

L*flG_SJ

*jmmL

Lli5

I-Si

iVrijuvuiiK-u'iuliit

"

Kissif

Si

'.

S-;s''

.* -.
;i;mm
(
y-f'l
mmmm,

.
.

iS !!**
?lisl
1
*

./>/'*
\

a mJ

I |gjgggj|

'Vi/..

S3

it

_,1 A

LW

mmRs

;'SS

pm

;v

.r- .P:i

.....
._

m
?P4;

v"

HHSM0

m.

la

'

e-i;
7'
SBS

HN353
Similar to HR353 card
Except the servos now go directly to the NC by fiber
optic cable.
Supports 14 Mr-J2 drives
Supports the Remote I/O. Communicates to HR371
remote I/O cards.

37

WMm

36

: .V '

Wi
'-

j ravt..

'

IIIIB

IPB

pSg
wSfJa i

E3U*:

#
!
to:

T3

I
W-J3

pq

*-H

ft 5.

3p
wis

Mi

I'M

iin

JUi =-SB.

l-i-.v

"S

IK1
If

s
1

Iil1

HE

sssi

-a

1!
m
&

-ri

;"X

SiS

WMJ
iv

IPW
if.

33

i'

i'-A-

iJt*

[rj

1
1

"

m.
EJ

Uotl

=*

p
-J

HOi
$sS33i
111
Iglll

p;

&!

ip

BgI
3
i

,j

5*1-

iEy

HIIISEJM! S<
rail
H

it:

tmn

II
mm

u
as:
ILK

!5*

Si
@n

n-

ffl.?!

n-I?

..Sliill

tit

&2&:|
-M-

f: -f

JIM

*-

Saa

tessh

s )

'lb

ft!

11/iP;*A i
r;E

Vrffi

i
i
MI

Itf

ST

.rv

!gH r

*
> -s 4

*9

7,

ssa

'il

ct,

is

a-P;

Ift

*,

*ri 5fs, <-;#


p
=HW!|

.*

..1

iTf*

>'V/1

igSBffj

|c< j

-M
1
p*

'-i

.x-

:! w

*1
fOCESt
6l
its 8-1I -. A&H

U j

m
m

38

rjj

liVjF M;
[

L-i

-*#
HMiSS

#V*Tf

ij,.;

yp-

c3

&
Kg

"rr.

Js

ie

HSC:

;. 't

SI

:r:|
[-

St-;:-5
'

3Si[Wi

'v

Ill;

i
fel

...
....

NC covers: Top and middle

.....
... ..

r.&tm:

&&aQL
:
:*iSb

mmmm

&

Ml

H'- V

?
'

' i>

ill
SSm

!.;,l

,v

?kI

ii

'

y-j;

'iv/'FTiy

$ - M ? .

BmgMm

;*mrn

iiai

;
mmmrn
MS

SB

..

IIMI

FCA750PY-N01

mm, K

pS

-7n

i:

.j

fcy >'-.

[.v ''u--..-:-

v.

5"i 3
1

MP0e0O70360D0 l

"iii

TTTjTTTJ T;J

v.'V;

la
pifp
Blit

.//

?..vV

P
WMj

tiamsL
i?
'

39

- -

/.-

40

CXA0385: backlight power supply for 15 LCD

\-y

if

i inn

Jr'

mm

i i .:

?V,

"SfflS'

t':

,"y

x
<

IS

'Q

NC cooling fan: Notice the third wire for overheat detection


1

****: V

ii
"

'V

14

TO

\
(*

ml

l-v?

fMk

<

i'

MMF -06D240S
24VPC- 0 . 0 3 A
D 4201 G 1 RP3
Mt'LCG irCHN0P(k'C0-,LTD.
MADE I/< CHINA

mm
Bill

llss

lA
JB
(HlOa?

|Rf|j
Vi

p'r- ;
i*

xtfvA.r&f 'i * 'SJ

<v ,v

jiSii

41

42

PD27 Power Supply


Similar to PD25 Power Supply for Fusion and Mpro.
Outputs 24v after power off to maintain voltage to
hard drive for controlled shutdown.
!

::

K*.

ii
:

Machine Keyboard
Has 2 fuses
If fail, recommend to replace complete assembly.
aH

i
'

<|

mpi

Us

;4

!.4

*.'

Mi

*
-k

/3

<;S5fc
tft

1:

Tfjg

~
*

1.
.!

7 :

Ifi
If

iv

ijipi

s;

:A

St

r:

s:

85

:<-..

i;Vcyj''

r.Hf

m
I

WM&3

!!

"j

[g

43

-vr

< .

.v

: Ml.;.:: r* * . *4_
'

i/.VFwifc

SHii

......

-h>

I.W

"M?!

StASlS;

i1

I 1

T.V-'-

J-

.if*,:

yia

.1 .-;

t-W

. :

S ,LI
J

SBaiilP
mi

NpjjK
?'!

&

11;

Ml
UkNiH[i!t:yiJOT9T
F Ju_.;L b

?Si
FS
-

SIS

IsS
:
i

>

!.

<1

'

gv2

vasar
.......

-p; g

H. jj

':':

tfii9cr is
i
:
JLi
UJw> i ir-A u
I
a

'

SPf-

fl||p

A-

5= MSS*
rS ,OTV

!;K1

t-1

'.

..*

'

Wmtm
PR,.Jy tT*V~ F!.

'

,r

S''

A.

A.

sp-raacKa

;i

P#A?
:.;

JIVM

fep

'5,,

iy,-

PC-'i

si

3E

tan

:rm

rr

CJ

f'sl

SAMPLE.

m
ii
I

EE

a 13,

&

m
m
m
K ii

44

Hard Drive
Embedded Windows XP software
20 Gigabyte hard drive
No need for heater as guarantee to operate at 0 degree weather. Similar to
hard drive used in car GPS systems.
gpfc

fiwll

r*

55
,

fTmf
p irim

lsr. i

1 *

l?gl ;.

mmMm

.a
e-2J* S

::

'"'a

V-

BlKwriSSj;

IX

.i

MB

f
m

"p

[}

mu

s;

']

MBWII
Ss* sul Bw

I. jBpR|pilir

ll

ft

..waa.

ir

&*.%*>

r"

;<Si

k3 I'l
"i. i

P !8!

l*

'

FT.

An embedded system is a special-purpose system in


which the computer is completely encapsulated by the
device it controls. Unlike a general-purpose computer,
such as a personal computer, an embedded system
performs one or a few pre- defined tasks, usually with ver
specific requirements. Since the system is dedicated to
specific tasks, design engineers can optimize it,
reducing the size and cost of the product. Embedded
systems are often mass-produced, so the cost savings
may be multiplied by millions of items.
Handheld computers or PDAs are generally considered
embedded devices because of the nature of their
hardware design, even though they are more expandable
in software terms. This line of definition continues to blur
as devices expand,

Physically, embedded systems range from portable


devices such as MP3 players, to large stationary
installations like traffic lights or factory controllers.

45

46

..A

Connector layout drawing


NC back
FAN 1

S3i
"TO NT

FAN2

in

fTT3T
t

zL

ON/ OFF

CardBus

BAT

UJUV

UUUp-

USB!
USB2

I
.

uasassrs

CONNECTION

DESCRIPTION

Fan 1 & 2

Fan connections

CardBus

PCMCIA I/F x 2

ON/OFF

ON/OFF SW connection

BAT

3.3V battery

USB1 & 2

USB I/F x 2

CRT

External CRT I/F (not used)

LCD

Internal LCD I/F

LAN

Ethernet I/F

CF25

External +24V (not used)

HDD

Hard drive I/F

FDD

Floppy drive I/F

EMG

Emergency stop

CF24

Remote ON/OFF to PD27

CF01

Power off detection

DC IN

+24V from DCOIJT on KB

CRT
(MvrVT)

LCD

Z3
LAN

c
ZTT

:NV

INV
FRONT OUT

31
cog

i/i
DCiN

CFO I

cF*>

, . :

CF24

EMG

so

<y

Ena
FDD

ro

cm

1C

HDD

OF25

Backlight inverter I/F

Front slot l/F

47

48

Connector layout drawing


NC bottom
CGI 2

OPT2

CF10

CF50

\
R

71

04

EE

*5*

alii

7/f

|M*J

LJ

| = ri

ZJ.

im i-1

TO

ftT

fei

{Jq

kf

p
Mill

|o|l

EPbr

Mil

CONNECTION

0PT1

CF55

DESCRIPTION

CGI 2

Keyboard l/F Bus connection

CF 10

Base I/O main I/F

OPTI & 2

Optical servo I/F

CF50

2'"1 servo I/O I/F

CF55

Additional I/O, servo I/F

Connector layout drawing


Keyboard unit
<PD27 t<D\m)

CR22

MOUSE \

CR21

J2

CR31

ON/OFF

INV

CGI 2

<j

-7Y2

t: !

CR32

0
littfr

mm
TL

77

MPKEY

Soft menu key I/F

m
/

J4

J3

DC

MPG

SIOPC

PCON/OFF

KB I/F
+12V for backlight I/F

DCIN

+24 V from PD27


+24 V to DCIN on Main PCB

CFOI

Power off detection

RI03

Terminator connection

.13 & 4

NCKEY

RS232C I/F x 4 (2 CH ea)


Internal s/w ON/OFF

HPG I/F
+24V from I/O PS

Sub op I/O J3IN, J4+OIJT


NC KB I/F

MPKEY

ON/OFF SW connection

INV

DC

SIONC

SPEAKER

NC KB I/F for MPX machine


only

NCKEY /

.12

MPG

IMT

Additional I/O I/F

PCON/OFF

CR3 1

SIONC & PC

Additional I/O I/F

DCOUT
*

0:::v-

CR21 & 22

CG12

M3

DESCRIPTION

ON/OFF

o
A

CONNECTION

E H

CFOI

jn

DCOUT

DCIN

R[03

49

50

Rotary Switch & Segment LED


T\fT

T--

4-

'~:Z

'.npirrja

ii
:

l!

T=lir:

ZJ!i

is

f
I

I 4irnTit;

I! Ii! !l ija
;JI II?

i!
.

::

!
!

. -r::::

!i:

I*3

'M hi
M

'

viw..

(-)

LED1

LED2

i
i

SW1

;p

J6
0

!
.-SSZZCiSSiSSSXiWSSX

s'.

i;

:
J

srtssssstss-

!|

i?::
i:

3
. FT;.

;;F6o
J

[V;

-ii

7
r

Hi

Vi

.-.V.

j.-;

SW2

Rotary Switch 1
Boot

CPU

Flush ROM Boot

CF/ATA-Flush Boot

Operation begins
simultaneously with
power supply ON.

Network Boot

Position

For development of OS

(reserved for network)

51

2 port Boot

(reserved for 2 port)

spare

spare

Dont use

Dont use

Dont use

Dont use

(reserved for Flush ROM)

(reserved for Flush ROM)

(reserved for Flush ROM)

Dont use

Note

It starts while reset, and


operation of the reset
release begins.

Operation begins
simultaneously with
power supply ON.

For maintenance tool

For maintenance tool

Reserved for equipment

52

Rotary Switch 2
Position

FROM 2PORT
Serial

Bus

Console

Console

Operation

Note

, ,
, in product
c . value
Set
p

Normal

PLc STOP Operate

Start up script /from/0/1dsys

Start up script /cf/ldsys/

Start up script Nullification

Normal

7
Bus
Console

Serial

Serial
Console

Bus
Console

Console

9
A

B
07

SRAM clear

Normal

E2PR0M FROM
Not start 2nd CPU

'

For handy terminal

6
8

'

P. M

os

iA

,}

7 segment status
M640 only 1 status LED
MX has 2 status LED
LED 2 is CPU number: 0 = CPU #1,1= CPU #2.
LED 1 is CPU status: Starts at 8.-> 0 ->count up-> 9 for CPU #1 then O.X count up->9. for CPU #2. So during normal
operation you should either see 09. for 1 CPU or 19. for 2 CPU.

For 2 CPU system:

For 1 CPU system:


0
Start

8.

->

Start

End

System start up counting

8.

9.
M640

9.

End

Good

MX

Bad

LED 2

NONE

0 or 1

2 CPU system

9.

-v

LED 1

0-9

8.-9.

1 CPU system

9.

-V

Anything
except 9.
53

54

55

56

TENTATIVE!
CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURATION
2.1 System Configuration
This system are usually confabulated of following components:
: This unit has the computation processing function for numerical control.
(1) Control unit
: Characters and figures are displayed on this unit.
(2) Display unit
: This unit has the setting function.
(3) Keyboard unit
: Input and output of machine signals are done through this unit.
(4) I/O interface unit
(5) Servo/Spindle drive unit : This is a servo/spindle amplifier composed of a conductor for obtaining DC
from AC and an inverter for obtaining AC from DC.
: This drive motor moves the machine.
(6) Servo/Spindle motor
(7) Other peripheral device : Peripheral device such as external memory and programming support.
Installed by machine loot manufacturer

f Ethernet!

PC

Card/K I

USB Devises

Printer

[CardBus]

NC control unrl

FlopDy Disk Drive

[FDD IF]

PC Keyboard

QJ

fuse]
Display Unit

! M _j,

|_Prep/amina Tool

cy"
PS'? Mouse

[Optical communication]

PRS232C]

Servo Amp-Spindlo drive urol

ezno Bocal!

Man nil Pulse Generator

s sas s m

[delicate IF]

Keyboard unit

O LJUL-LJ ooo

oooo

[0101

rio IF]

70s

1'jt-noiatS'

E1E

ZJ?
I/O mtciface box usoinr, by Card-

sized 3/0
C 1*"0 interface boxes arc installed
by machine tool moruifacturc :

300

Servo motor

Machine operation panel

10 interface

/ Spindle

motor

Servo drive unit

* E

iu

7S

Servo motor

<Note>
The noise resistance of most of PCperipheral devices are lower than the CNC system.
If such a low noise resistance devices are used in the CNC system, the noise resistance of the entire NC
system decreases, and noise trouble is caused occasionally. Please follows notes in Chaper 7 when you
use PC peripheral devises.

57

TENTATIVE
4.4.8 Connection of Power Supply
The PD27 power supply is used to protect the hard disk.
By outputting +24V tor 300msec after the 200VAC is turned off, turning off of the power during writing to the
hard disk can be prevented.
(1) Power Supply System Drawing
R S1
-LANCNC
Unit

ONAD-F

Ocuil breaker

NU
fan

Off

oul

EXTXBUS D
CflO D

: AT;

CRT

MOO
Cf?5

CMC Board

FDD

nn
ON

lC0

fCU? -MAS 13

PC Board

erso D

EMG
CF55
OPT?

cm
ONJOFF

IB DC IN

US8!

CGI?

-Q CFO!

DCOUT

OPT! D

CardBus
jI .?ch

Cf?*

PO?7
ACIN

p
P

USB?

f 110

Crrcuil
breaker

rno

CG12

Let DCOUT
T-iDClN

Keyboard Uni!
FCU7-YZ08?

tnm

L-C3CF01
[DC

KPG
SK3NC
SIOPC

( VIM
|J3

(2) Unit specification


Item
Input

i7

iNV

RI03

Specification

200VAC - 480VAC (-15%. +10%)


24VDC 8A
1 70mmx 65 mm x 230mm
300ms
Back up time
(Note) The power cannot be turned ON immediately after the PD25 power has been turned OFF.
Wait approx, two seconds before turnning the power ON.
Output
Size

__

(3) Connector layout and pin assignment

...

ACIN : 200VAC input


1

2
3

ACIN

ON ore

sw

/
0

ON.-OFF

powf-n

OCOUT

_n

58

<Cable side connector type>


: 2-1 781 28-3
Connetor
: 1-1 752 1 8-5
Contact
Recommended maker : AMP

ACIN N
ACIN H

FG~

ON/OFF SW : Swich ON (
Swich OFF

24VDC output
upword)
( i downword) 24VDC output OFF

ON/OFF : Connect to the escutcheon ONOFF switch


1

2
3
4

NC
P-OFF

< Cable side connector type>


: 1-1 78288-5
Connetor
1-175218-5
Contact
Recommended maker : AMP

0V
0V

POWER : Green lamp lights during-*-24V output

DCOUT :

n_

A(X)

ACFAiL

2
3

OV

FG

B.(V) j < Cable side connector type>


j Connetor
: 3-1 78128-6
OV
: 1 -1 7521 85
Contact
FG
Recommended maker : AMP
+24V

TENTATIVE
CHAPTER 7 NOTIFICATION OF USING PC PERIPHERAL DEVICE
This chapter describes the notification of using PC peripheral devices.

7.1 Noise measures of USB and Ethernet

jr-B.

USB and Ethernet have been equipped normally.


Connection of the USB equipment
Please refer to
Connection of Ethernet" for connection
execution example.
Because use under the noise environment is not assumed as for a personal computer on the market such as
Mouse and Keyboard, operation is not guaranteed under the machine operation environment.
Please use the cable with the shield
for the noise inclination.
Additionally, the noise measures by the ferrite core like the figure below are recommended.
Ethernet cable

USB cable

USB cable

NC unit

I
i

!
i

ifcT IU

il

am

["]

Mouse

3p

Jj

Panel

Keyboard

Printer

S3Q

iih)

Ethernet cable

Wraps cable around the


ferrite core.

7.2 Recommended Devices List


Introduce the recommended devices that are met the Mitsubishi quality standard and the connectable
devices that are confirmed operation (although not met the Mitsubishi quality standard).

7.2.1 Front Access IC Cards


Supplier

Type

SCANDISK

SDP3B-48-1 01
SDP3B-96-1 01

10- DATA

SDP3B-128-101
SDP3B-192-101
SDP3B-256-1 01
SDP3B-440-101
PCFCA-16M
PCFCA-32M
PCFCA-48M
PCFCA-96M
PCFCA-1 28M
PCFCA-192M
PCFCA-256M

Specification
48MB

96MB
128MB
192MB
256MB
440MB
16MR
32MB
48MB
96MB
128MB
192MB
256MB

Class
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended

Remarks
SDP3B-"*-ono ***: Memory
size (MB) nnn: Manufacturers
control number "101" is
standard

PCFCA-M

Memory size

(MB)

59

TENTATIVE
7.2.2 CardBus PC Cards
Device

Supplier

FLASH

SANDISK

Type Name
SDP3B series

Specification

Bus Type
PCMCIA

Class

PCMCIA
PCMCIA
PCMCIA
PCMCIA
CardBus
PCMCIA
PCMCIA

Recommended
Connectable
Connectable
Connectable
Connectable
Connectable
Connectable

Recommended

Card

LAN
Card

IO-DATA
3Com
corega

BUFFALO

PCFCA series
Etherlll
Etherll PCC-T
Fether PCC-TXF
Fether CB-TXL
LPC2-T
LPC4-TX

10 BASE-T Ether
10 BASE-T Ether
10/100 BASE-T Ether
10/100 BASE-T Ether
10 BASE-T Ether
10/100 BASE-T Ether

Notices in use of CardBus type PC card


(1) Install a driver software under the condition that only the target CardBus type PC card is inserted. Some
trouble may occurs if a driver software is installed under the condition that other PC card is inserted
together.
(2) For using a CardBus type PC card, turn on the power under the condition that the target PC card is
inserted. When the PC card is inserted under the condition that the power is turned on, the PC card is
not sometimes recognized by the combination with other PC cards.

60

TENTATIVE
CHAPTER 8 DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE
8.1 Maintenance Tools
8.1.1 Measuring Instruments

The following measuring instruments are used to confirm that the voltage is being supplied correctly to the
NC unit, to confirm that the wiring to the NC unit is correct, and to carry out simple troubleshooting._
Tool
Application
Condition
Tester
To check that the wiring to the NC unit is correct before
turning the power ON. _
AC voltmeter
Measure the AC Power
To measures the AC power voltage being supplied to
voltage.
the external 24VDC power supply unit.
The tolerable error is +2%
or less.
DC voltmeter
Max. scale 30V The
To measures the DC power voltage.
External power supply 24V (control section, machine
tolerable error is 2% or
less.
input/output interface)
Battery voltage
DC output
Phase rotation
To check the connection order of the AC 3-phase input
meter
power supply.
Synchroscope
General measurement and simple troubleshooting.

_
_

(Note t)Currently, a high precision digital multi-meter is commonly used as a tester. This digital multi-meter
can be used as both an AC voltmeter and an DC voltmeter.
(Note 2)A logic analyser (200MHz or more) is required for complicated troubleshooting.

8.1.2 Tools
Screwdriver (Large, Medium, Small)
Radio pliers

8.2 Maintenance Items


Maintenance is categorized into daily maintenance items (items to be carried at set intervals) and periodic
maintenance (replacement of parts when life is reached). Some parts (HDD, FDD, etc.) will not function in a
hardware manner when the life is reached, so these should be replaced before the life is reached.
Name

Life

fnspection/Replacemeni

Escutcheon

Once/lwo months
(Accordingly when dirty)

Cleaning of floppy disk drive


(type built in operation box)

Once/two months

Replacement of floppy disk sheet


(type built in operation box)

3x106 passes/track

Replacement of floppy disk drive

12,000 access hours or 5 years of FDD motor rotation,


whichever is sooner

(lype built in operation box)

Refer to left

Replacement of hard disk drive


Replacement of LCD backlight

5 years or 20,000 hours power ON

5 years or 20,000 power ON hours (specified with power ON


lime where brightness drops lo less than 50% at 25 cC)

Replace when display dims

Replacement of batter

Cumulative data hold time 5 years

When battery drop caution


alarm occurs

Cooling Ian (control section)

50.000 hours (specified with rotation time when rotation speed


drops to less than 20% of initial speed)

Refer to left

Keyboard

IQ6 punches

Refer to left

Refer lo left

61

TENTATIVE
8.3 Maintenance of Escutcheon and keyboard
8.3.1 Cleaning of Escutcheon and keyboard
Wipe the escutcheon (display unit and plastic frame of keyboard unit) and keyboard surface with a soft dry
clean cloth. If the escutcheon is heavily dirtied, soak the cloth in a neutral detergent, and wipe the display.
Do not use an alcohol or a paint thinner, etc.
The escutcheon and the keyboard are not for waterproofing. Be careful that a liquid doesn't go into inside

of it.

8-3.2 Replacement of NC Data Key


The NC data key is the printed circuit board which the switches are mounted on it, and is included into the
keyboard unit. Replace it in accordance with the following procedure.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove all the cables connected at the back of the NC data key.
(3) Remove the tablet pointer flexible cable and keyboard cable from the PCB (HN20x card).
(4) Remove six screws, and remove the sheet metal adapter and the H R201 card from the keyboard unit.
(5) Remove fourteen screws, and remove the NC data key from the escutcheon
(6) Install a new NC keyboard with the process which is contrary to .

Remove Keyboard cable

Remove Glide Pointer cable

HN20X card

\
I:

IzsC'A

"rH*

\ <r

:i

&

*\

ssss??**** A,
O

Remove 8 screws

(:

NC data key

<o

$
r.

!"

-o

Remove 18 screws

62

TENTATIVE
8.3.3 Replacement of Menu Key
The menu key is the printed circuit board which the switches are mounted on it, and is included into the
display unit. Replace it in accordance with the following procedure.

tf'X

(1 ) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove the menu key cable from the keyboard unit. Because the menu key cable is soldered on the
menu key PCB, remove it at the keyboard unit side.
(3) Remove 8 screws, and remove the escutcheon
(4) Remove 8 screws, and remove the menu key
(5) Install a new menu key with the process which is contrary to (D (3).

<o

Remove 8 screws

I r7

fit

Remove ON/OFF switch connector

'O

m
LIH

and, remove escutcheon

vrf

Si/

ri.s

'O

Remove Keyboard card

i ft.

iPv

it

Menu key

;
ill
r

T.V n-'

/J

4
\

iB

5s.

Remove 8 screws
and, remove menu key

63

TENTATIVE
8.4 Maintenance of Floppy Disk Drive
8.4.1 Cleaning of Floppy Disk Drive (Head Cleaning )
When the floppy disk drive is used for a long time, magnetic particles or dust from the disk may adhere onto
the head surface. This can cause the reading and writing processes to be inhibited. Clean the head
periodically ( once every two months ) with the following procedure.
(1) Recommended cleaning disk
: Japan Morex

Maker
Type

: Morex cleaning floppy for double-sided 3.5-inch


: Dry

Method

(2) Cleaning method


Insert the cleaning disk into the floppy disk drive to be clearned.
(2) Start the cleaning program, and follow the instructions given on the screen.
(3) When the program is completed, eject the cleaning disk.

Handling of Floppy Disks


Observe the following items to ensure that the floppy disk can be used for a long time.

8.4.2

(1) Precautions for use


Never tough the magnetic surface with hands. Finger prints on the magnetic surface
will inhibit the reading process.
(2) Do

not touch the floppy disk with hands dirtied with oil or iron chips.

(D Do not place the floppy disk near cigarette smoke. Do not apply solvents on the
magnetic surface.

@ Always attach the index label to the correct position so that it will not come off. Do
not layer the index labels.

label before attaching it to the floppy disk. When writing on a label


already attached to the floppy disk, use a felttip pen ,etc.

(5) Fill in the index

(6) Carefully insert the floppy disk into the drive with it facing the

correct direction.

Rough handling during insertion and ejection could damage the floppy disk.

When bringing the floppy disk inside from outdoors where the temperature and
humidity difference are great from indoors, wait at least 30 minutes before starting

use.
(2) Precautions for storage

Store floppy disks that are not in use and the backup floppy disks in
(2)

Do not place the floppy disk where it will be subject to direct sunlight or near heating
appliances.

Do not place the floppy disk near magnets or items that generate strong magnetic
fields. Magnetic rings and necklaces could also damage the data on the floppy disk,
so avoid wearing these items when handling floppy disks.

@ Do not place heavy items on the floppy disk.

64

plastic cases.

TENTATIVE
8.4.3 Other Precautions for Use
(1) Floppy disk drive life
The durability of the floppy disk drive is guaranteed for five years of the FDD motor rotation or 12,000 access
hours, whichever is sooner.
However, if used in a heavily contaminated environment, the reading and writing processes could be
inhibited due to the adherence of dust or foreign matter.
Periodically clean the head to prevent this type of trouble.
<T5

(2) Recommendation for making backups


Make copies of the floppy disks containing important data to be used in case of an accident such as
damaging of the floppy disk or destruction of the data.
(3) Operating conditions
The floppy disk drive and floppy disks are extremely sensitive to changes in the temperature and humidity
and to dust, so always observe the precautions that have been described.
In respect to the temperature, if the working conditions are not satisfied (such as if the system is started at
below freezing), the data track and head positions may deviate and prevent the data from being read
properly.
In this case, wait for the internal temperature to rise.
(4) Writing to floppy disks
The temperature must be 10 to 40 C when writing to the floppy disk.
Always observe the temperature conditions when writing data.

8.4.4 Replacement of Floppy Disk Drive


Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove the F1 30 cable from the floppy disk unit.
Unit" for connection and removal of the F130 cable.

Connection of Floppy Disk

(D The floppy disk drive is covered with three sheet metals. And three sheet metals are fixed with eight
screws. Remove those sheet metals referring to the figure 8.5.
@ Install a new floppy disk drive with the process which is contrary to

(3).

NB

T
.*

f'*
A

65

TENTATIVE
8.5 Maintenance of Hard Disk
8.5.1 Handling of Hard Disk
(1) Precaution for Use
- Correct connection the cable
- Do not touch the connector section with hands or metal.
- Do not apply excessive force on the connector section.
- Do not drop or apply strong impacts on the drive.
- Do not disassemble the drive.
(2) Precaution for Storage
- Avoid strong the drive in high temperature, high humidity places.
- Do not place the drive near magnets or items the generate strong magnetic fields.

8.5.2 Other Precaution for Use


(1) Recommendation for making backup
The hard disk is a durable device, so make a backup of the hard disk to save important data.

8.5.3 Replacement of Hard Disk


Do not handle the hard disk without metal case because the hard disk has not much endurance against the
vibration and shock in comparison with other electric devises. Replace the hard disk as the Hard Disk Unit
(with the metal case and the stabilizing rubber).
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove the F140 cable which is connected between the hard disk unit and the control unit.
the HEATER cable and the THM cable from the keyboard unit.

Remove

(3) Remove two screws, and remove the hard disk unit from the keyboard unit.
(4) Install a new hard disk unit with the process which is contrary to ~@.

fgfeTTo

f|iIE!:'

ara?-

T)

HI

O'

| /j\ CAUTION /j\

Hard Disk Drive is built in this product Do not drop and do not give a strong impact to the product
because the hard disk drive is a precise device

/\ The hard disk drive has a useful life Please exchange the hard disk drive before end ot the life
/t\

66

Please make a backup of the customers files which is saved in the hard disk driveAt the
breakdown of the hard disk drive although Mitsubishi provides exchange service of the hard disk
drive, Mitsubishi does not guarantee a customets files which is saved in the hard disk drive And
Mitsubishi does not assume the responsibility concerning the damage caused by having damaged
the hard disk drive

T<

TENTATIVE
8.6 Maintenance of LCD
8.6.1 Life of LCD Backlight
CCFL (Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp) is used for the light source (backlight) of the LCD panel.
The estimated life of the backlight is 40,000 hours/25C. (Time for the brightness to drop to 50% of the initial
value).
Life time depends on temperature. When the LCD panel is used under low temperature or high temperature
continuously, the life time has a tendency to become short.

8.6.2 LCD Characteristics


(1) Luminance

Luminance decreases at a low temperature by the CCFL characteristic. And, the time until luminance
meets rated value after power-on is about 10-15 minutes.
(2) Uniformity, Luminous Dot, Dark Dot
It is not defect or malfunction though uniformity, a small luminous dot and a small dark dot may appear on
the LCD panel.

8.6.3 Replacing LCD backlights


Before replacing LCD backlight, remove the LCD panel from the escutcheon. In addition, make sure that
the machines power is OFF to replace LCD backlights.

LCD backlight type for replacement: L502174G01

Remove the cable from the backlight connector connected to the LCD backlight power supply card.
Remove the cable for menu keyboard from the keyboard unit.
(D
(D
()
(D

Remove the cable for ON/OFF switch from the keyboard unit.
Unscrew the M4 screws (8 screws) to remove the escutcheon.
Press the nail during pulling the LCD backlight out. (Figure 8.8)
Attach the LCD backlight for replacement in the reverse order of 1 ) -4).

ill
fpBft

n r\,

:jprr=mi

mi H
8I

!l

ho

'tT

s
(2)

0"

67

TENTATIVE
8.7 Maintenance of Battery
All data, such as Ihe parameter and machining program that need to be backup when the power is turned
OFF, are saved by a battery installed in the control unit. It is easy to get a battery because a familiar mmType lithium battery is being used.
Replace the battery as a standard within one week if the Battery Voltage Drop Caution Alarm is appeared.
If the battery isnt replaced, the Battery Voltage Drop Warning Alarm is appeared. Then, internal backup data
could be damaged.
Battery type name: CR17335SE-R-CH2

8.7.1 Handling of Battery


Double oxidation manganese - Lithium battery contains inflammable material such as lithium, organic
solvent.
Erroneous handling of lithium battery may result in such an accident of heat generation, explosion or fire,
possibly leading to personnel injuries or machine malfunction.
CD Do not recharge, disassemble, apply pressure, heat, directly solder or dispose in fire the battery.
Insert the battery (+)(-) correctly.
Do not create short circuit between (+) and (-}. And do not carry or store the battery with the metal
goods such as a necklace.
(3) When the battery is stored or disposed, do not stack or jumble up the batteries with other metal goods.
Then, put a insulating tape to the terminals of the batteries to prevent a short circuit.
Do not use the batteries by mixing different types or old batteries together with new ones.

8.7.2 Replacement of Battery

Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
Remove the battery cable from the control unit.
Replace the battery from the holder.
@ Install the battery with the process which is contrary to ~@.

!
H'
Remove the battery cable

IT'D

7
A

i
i
\

Ur'
c

| ACAUTION]

68

Remove Ihe ballery

'IT'

"

:-D

If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs , tool data and
parameters in the input /output device, and then replace the battery .

/K

Do not short circuit, charge overheat , incinerate or disassemble the battery .

/t\

Dispose of spent batteries according to local laws .

TENTATIVE
8.8 Maintenance of Cooling Fan
Two cooling fans are mounted in the control unit. One cools down the NCCPU, and the other cools down the
PC CPU.
These two fans are same part.
Type Name of Cooling Fan : MMF-06E24DS-RP3

8.8.1 Life of Cooling Fan


r

The life of the cooling fan depends on the grease life of the bearing. The rotation time when 20% of the
rotation speeds decrease more than an initial rotation speed is defined as the life, and the life is 50,000
hours.

8.8.2 Replacement of Cooling Fan


Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Remove the fan cable from the "FAN1" connector located around the left top of the NC unit.
(D Remove the cover with opening the lock latch.
@ Remove the cooling fan
Install a new cooling fan with the process which is contrary to ~ d).

Remove the fan cable

Remove the cover

lit

frs.

)/

VA

r
>*.

...

sk.-'i
i

-sf

M
i

@Remove the cooling fan

IV
:

i.::
5

i'

j...

r*
i

69

70

71

72

Basic Operations for Maintenance

Basic Operations for Maintenance


The minimum operations required for system maintenance are described in this chapter.

1-1

Unlocking the Password Key Lock


The functions and screens that cannot be operated by the user
and normally cannot be used.

1-1-1

are locked

with

a password key,

Releasing the Key-lock


The key-lock can be released with the following procedures. Once the key-lock is released, the
key is remained unlocked until the power is turned OFF but is automatically re-locked when the
power is turned ON again.
(1) Select the [DIAGNOS]
[VERSION] screen.
TPS 0

?w

50*

Orp*

POSITION

SET UP

PROGRAM

TOOL

INFO.

'\/\j 50Y

' SJ.JJI

VERSION

'\A; 50*
DlivCHOS

ALARM

UQ>
VERSION

C-COND.

PARAM

DIAGHOS

DATA

Orpn

2005/10/20

Id: 31: 47

Vv\A 0 . OOiii/nin

MS0*

V'vV> 0 . OOin/miii

DATA

TOOL

DISPLAY

I/O

LAYOUT

MAP

ITPS 0

2005/10/20

Id: 33: 23

ALARM

PLC

MAIHIEN

RUNNING

GRAPHIC

DATA

ACCTJMD.

HISTORY

SIGNAL

CHECK

CONTROL

MAI NT B.

ERASE

TIME

EH!!
Orp

DIAGNOS

VV\A o

OPTION

MONITOR

(2) Press the menu selection

TPS 0

2005/10/20 14:34:33

ooiii/nii*
SERVO

SPINDLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

and input the keys in the following order:

3000[ INPUT
Following the operation above, the "Hidden" screen menu will appear when the
key is pressed

Screen selection key

Menu key

menu selection

Menu selection key

73

Basic Operations for Maintenance

1-1-2

Normally (locked with password key) Prohibited Operations


1.

Setting of forced output


[Normal]: Menu on DIAGNOS screen.
?

so*
DIAGHOS

iLUJJ
VERSION

Orpj
DIAGHOS

200S/10/20 ;i4:34:38

0
[TPS
:

vW*. O . OOin/jairt
OPTION

MONITOR

SERVO

SPINDLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

MONITOR

MON DIOR

MOH1TOR

MONITOR

[Hidden]: Select DIAGNOS MONITOR menu.

HH&i

3*3
so*
DIAGNOS

TTTO
VERSION

Otpa

DIAGHOS

V V\A 0 . 00 in/ in
OPT IOH

2.

!!
SPENDLE

SERVO
i

MONITOR

TPS 0 2005/10/20 14:38:20

MONITOR | HOW ITOK

HARDWARE

LADDER

I/O

WRITE

MONITOR

MONITOR

WRITE

CANCEL

Setting of servo parameters and spindle parameters

Parameter setting menu


Servo Parameter window
Spindle Parameter window

[Normal]: Menu on VERSION screen.


"'-A.-

50*

DIAGHOS

im

Orpa

VERSION

DIAGNOS

Ell!aa

VVY- 0 . OOiu/min
OPTION

MONITOR

SERVO
MONITOR

TPS 0

! SPINDLE

HARDWARE

LADDEP.

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

2005/10/20 14:34:30 i

[Hidden]: Select SERVO MONITOR or SPINDLE MONITOR menu.

ESIloa.

393

Vv

SO*

iLjJJi

Oz'pn

VERSION

DIAGHOS

VV\A O . OOin /min

JTPS

r,

! DIAGHOS

MONITOR
i.

2005/10/20 14:38:51

OPTION

SERVO

MONITOR

SPINDLE

! MONITOR

HARDWARE

LADDER

MONITOR

MONITOR

P ARAM.

When the PARAM. setting menu is pressed, the respective parameter window will appear.

74

Basic Operations for Maintenance

3.

Setting of system parameters (SYSTEM PARAM), pitch error compensation (PITCH


ERROR) and display of key history (KEY HISTORY), memory scope (MEMORY SCOPE)
[Normal]: Menu on VERSION screen.
'w

DIAGHOS

XEH?

Orpn

VERSION

DIAGHOS

wm&\

VWV 0.00 in/miii


OPTION

MONITOR

TPS 0

SERVO

SPINDLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

2005/10/20 -14:34:38

[Hidden]: "VERSION menu appears on the right end.


a*j3

TPS 0

*\f\j SOY
DIAGHOS

:5TQ

orp

VERSION

DIAGHOS

OPTION

MONITOR

SERVO

SPINDLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

I TPS

3!>3

"VX*

DIAGHOS

4.

Orpn

VERSIOH

2005/10/20 14:39:38

TPS 0

2005/10/20 14:48:22

SO1.

2005/10/20 14:39:17

]VW 0 . 00in/.in

VWo.OOin/min

SYSTEM

PITCH

HEY

MEMORY

PARAM

ERROR

HISTORY

SCOPE

Setting of cutting parameter (CUTTING PARAM)

[Normal]: Menu on CUTTING CONDITION screen


rV\-

50 i

WORK -MAT

mji

0 lpn

C-SP

FR

VW 0. 00 in /rain
WORKMAT

PERCENT

TOOL-MAT

.
.

cur

C-COND.
TURNING

C-OND

LEARN

=Ll
[Hidden]: "CUTTING PARAM" menu appears on the right end

mm*-

3*>3

'\A/

50 Y

JZD

Orpn

VV'A 0

TPS 0

2005/10/20 14:40:13

OOiu/mlti
*3!

WORK HAT
i

FR

C-SD

I DO L- MAT

WORKMAT .

C COND.

TURNING

PERCENT

CUT CC'ND|CUTTIIJC

LEARN

PARAM

I:

J
303

r\;\.' 50*.

HD>

Is

CUTTING

CUTT TNG

CUTTING

PARAM l

PARAM

PARAM 3

Or p

V-.V 0

TPS 0

200S/1O/20 14.41:07

OOin/min

i
1

cmiD

*
!

75

Basic Operations for Maintenance

1-1-3

Exiting the MAZATROL Screen


The MAZATROL screen can be exited with the following operation.

mu
'XAJ

TES 0 : 2

50 V

POSITION

Orpa

SET UP

PROGRAM

1HFO.

TOOL

C-COND*

DcM Ax.~*re(

DI

PARAM

WXm
1
T>%

PARAH

TOOL

DISPLAY

LAYOUT

MAP

-i-liir.'i r<:9iy

DATA

JD .

505/10/20 14:42:2a

;VVV- O . t)0in/tti.tt

IPS 0 : 2

Debug Functions
Arrange windows neatly

>

When the password key is unlocked, bring the cursor to


this space and click on the right mouse button button to
display the window above.

The MAZATROL screen is exited when "Exit" is selected.

1-1 -4

Returning the Password Key Lock Releasing State


When the NC is powered on, it is always in the state of "key-loced.
Select "Debug Functions"
11 31 Mode" from the window avobe to return to the normal state
from the password key lock releasing state if you don't want to turn NC power supply on again.

uI-

DebugWindow

TPS 0

2005/JE
I UcndchkFree
Debug Menu Button
GL Functions
PLC Menu

Arrange windows neatly

JT

Exit

76

m\

!r

>

uisyiiKi

MAP

Basic Operations for Maintenance

1-2

Completely Erasing the Memory


The entire syslem memory (SRAM) area is cleared when the card, provided with memory, is
replaced or added.

1-2-1

Card with Memory Mounted


HN482 (NC memory module board)

1-2-2

y 0 7

Clearing the Memory

The procedure for erasing the SRAM is described below.


(1 ) Set "C" to NC rotary switch 2 [RotSw2].
Rotary switch 1 [RotSwl] is "0.

RotSw 1

<5
<p>

(Refer to the right images.)

1,

F 0 1
E
h

(2) Turn the NC power ON.

r.
n

The 7-segment LED will change as shown below.


The procedure is completed when "Y" appears.

XX'?

RotSw2

Changes at a high speed between these sections.

ID!

O
SRAM clear
Power ON

(3) The PC side of NC is started while clearing the memory. So when the alarm
messages are displayed while starting NC screen, click the "OK" to all messages.
(Note: The operation in MATRIX. The PC side is not started in M640.)

i
(4) After all alarm messages are cleared, shutdown the PC from the Windows start

menu.

77

Basic Operations for Maintenance

(5) After the shutdown is completed, NC power is turn to OFF


(6) Return the NC rotary switch 2 to "0" (Refer to the right image

v
cP

CP

8 1

s?
<j>

"SRAM clear" by RotSw2 "C" executes the following operation:

1. Memory test and zero clear to all SRAM area

2. Zero clear to PLC bit RAM and word RAM

78

9)

6 8

Basic Operations for Maintenance

Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM Data

1-4

Of the various data used with the MAZATROL MATRIX, some data is backed up by a battery and
saved in SRAM even if the power has been turned OFF.
Flowever, this saved data will be erased when the memory is cleared. Also, the SRAM data might
be destroyed when the card is replaced, etc.

/j\ Always backup the SRAM data before carrying out work that could cause the SRAM data to be
destroyed.

The some data (parameter etc.) in SRAM are registered in FLROM, and can be read when
required. The default parameters are always registered in the FLROM when shipped from the
Yamazaki factory.

1-4-1

Operation Method of SRAM Backing Up

FLROM

SRAM
Common, local

Common, local
variables

variables
Too! related tables

SRAM
.Some data

Parameters

Parameters

Jaw shape data

Cutting conditions.
new cutting conditions

Cutting conditions.
new cutting conditions

Maintenance
tool

Periodic inspection

|~ Extended coordinate

lllfe'

Periodic inspection

-r:'

Gantry control data

Gantry control data


\

h.

SRAM
All data

'-t

HD

C : \m a inte\s ra m bkf . dat

79

Basic Operations for Maintenance

1-4-2

Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM


SRAM data is backed up and restored using the maintenance tool.
An outline is shown below.
Start the maintenance tools, and select the BACKUP screen.
ipZ',
BACKUP FLASK ROM

SSAX

!
EJCT-I'ATA UO

C: '-x-ai n

UPDATEJ MAIHTraAMCsl

BACKUP

OPTfOK

. tfat

EKIT

With the backup function, the SRAM data in the NC can be saved in another medium
Execute the following operations using the button (T) to @.

SRAIVH>FLROM
A part of SRAM data in the NC unit (Note) is backed up in FLROM in the NC unit.

SRAM<-FLROM
A part of SRAM data backed up in FLROM (Note) is read to SRAM.
SRAMHDD

The whole SRAM data in the NC unit (2MB), as well as the PLC's BIT-RAM and
WORD-RAM area are backed up in HDD.
The Names of backup files are fixed as follows.

Content
Whole SRAM

PLCs
BIT-RAM/WORD-RAM
@

File name
C:\mainte\srambkf.dat
C:\rn ainte\plcbkff 1 . dat_
C:\mainte\plcbkfOf ,dat

Size

2MB
1MB
44KB

Remarks

F o r MATRIX Standard
For MATRIX NEXUS

SRAM<-HDD
The above files, which have been backed up in HDD, are read to the original area in the NC
unit.

(Note) A part the SRAM data items read/written between SRAMoFLROM are listed below
User parameters
Machine parameters
- R registers (R21 00 to R2527)
Cutting conditions
Cutting conditions learn
- Maintenance check
GL (gantry) parameters

80

Basic Operations for Maintenance

1-5

Backing Up the Saved Data


Of all the data stored in SRAM and HD, the data indicating the customer's machine conditions can
be backed up by data input/output on NC screen.

It is recommended to backup these data before various maintenance operations are worked.
Save these data as the customer's current machine condition data if any troubles or fault occurs.

1-5-1

Types of the Saved Data


Item

Device saved data


SRAM
HD

Machining

programs
Tool data

Tool offsets
Tool files

Jaw shape

User parameters

O
O
O
O

Machine
parameters

Cutting conditions

Workpiece offsets

Extended
coordinate
Macro variables
Periodic inspection

o
O

O
O
O

R registers of R2100 to R2527 and R10500 to R11999 are included in the machine
parameters.

Note:

Note: The tool data has the main data in HD and the index table in SRAM.

1-5-2

Media for Backing Up the Saved Data


(1)

HD

The data of the item described in 1-5-1 can be backed up to an arbitrary HDs folder of

NC.
(2) IC memory card (Using the NC front slot)
The data of the item described in 1-5-1 can be backed up by using the IC memory card
from NC front slot.
(3)

USB memory

The data of the item described in 1-5-1 can be backed up by using the USB memory from
NC front USB slot or USB slot on pendant box side (extended from USB slot on the back
of NC).

81

Basic Operations for Maintenance

1-5-3

Backing Up the Saved Data


For example, the method of backing up the saved data by the USB memory is as follows.
(1) Press the screen selection key until the menu in the figure below appears, and select

"DATA I/O" from the menu


posmou

TOOL

PROGRAM

LAYOUT

TOOL

P ARAM

C-COHD.

OIACHOS

DATA

DATA

30

DISPLAY

x/o

3Xiur

WAT

(2) Input/output the data on the screen below.

MCCRW

V=J

|V:

I =F
;

il

T.:.:

tmUm

ITIIZZIZZZp:

!
i;
%

on

lAtl

JCUO

"

\*i.

.L

rrr r

two

TOT**

CCD

CAM DMA

n*

*w

menu key "USB.


USB I/O menu is displayed.
(4) The DEVICE SELECT screen is displayed when "DEVICE SELECT" of the USB I/O
menu is pressed. The D drive is selected (highlighted) with the [ T ] key, and click [OK]
(3) Select the

(or press the [INPUT]).


MC<-OSD

NC->USD

USD

LOAD

SAVE

CONTENT

i'i

DATA

SELECT

I/O

PAKAH.

DIR.

DIR.

DELETE

SELECT

nr

IA: \)

I O : \1
(Effl

M AZAT KOI.

(Note) When two or more USB memories

assigned.

82

are

inserted, the E drive or

more might be

Basic Operations for Maintenance

(5) When the menu "DIR. SELECT" is pressed, the selected drive's folder is displayed in
SELECT DIRECTORY window. Select the folder to output data.
When a folder is newly created, input a folder name with the keys directly.
mr

tn RECTORY:

OTB TT

n*>CMM

&

4 r

i.

I'r

PRtOOBAH

un
IT

b~

[
OTUC*

[irV

DATA

c*

ZZTJ
RV

vn

UAD

AV

p. Q6 i n/min

MC >oins

llBB

LtniT*

tiltt

CSMCTtW*

rcixcs

OJ.T*

I/O

YiUtW.

DtiATfc

The selected folder name is displayed in DIRECTORY on the right side when "OK"
/
is clicked or <INPUT> is pressed.

usn <-r

RC

PROGRAM

nrr.rcroPT: ntcxti*

PROGRAM

~:r

.1.

j-

OTnER DATA

:p:

OTHER DATA

ESeSS'Ti
UUl

A/v? so>

Hf '.-USA

1.0AD

K|

Orpa

VAS O

TPE 0

20CS/10/1V 19:43:22

00 in /min

MC- >USB

usn

narvr.

SAVE

COWTEHT

SELECT

nma

x/o

'

VARAN.

nip

DELETE

DTA .

SELECT

(6) Select "NC>USB SAVE", and select the data to output.

83

Basic Operations for Maintenance

(7) Selecting the program file

Press the menu "SELECT ALL". When <INPUT> is pressed, all program files are
displayed in the program area on the upper left. If not all programs are displayed in the
program area at a time, the programs can be confirmed by moving the scrollbar up and
down.
*'

pytfarJ

;<>

*y, jirntc-roGr:

sfM
PBOCJIJ#*

-s

EEEt

--

T
WtA
TOOL,

[
[

riix

_;

ASM W

Ctroor

__

Twissso;""'?"'""'"

'y,

:;>

JP

.TMT

her.::::

...

CTPS|tal

>V'v*' #*S0 in/min

,>i> JOWlo/ll

I!' H I*

iKtonirtKcu MCOCOAM WIMBI.'X

Tttt

nv.um

roaiAt

ki,f-

ST WIT

rm

(8) Selecting other data

Move the selected area from "PROGRAM" to "OTHER DATA" by using TAB key.
(When TAB key is pressed once again, the area is moved from "OTHER DATA" to
"PROGRAM.)
Select and highlight all items by inputting "INPUT.
JUKtt-JtHCf;

*h:

'rPOGB-W

\
!

>>

!i

.
ttwfc rJL*

cun iit.
r

...

...
.......

CUJIP

rums

MAJX 3

:
!*'

t'HJ A

,n.T-;

i -SSiS?MIL"
O

UUifl

r;;.:

-;;Tssri1*3 ft

HAJ'SHV

PDr*on4

ViSi

EfliS
0,3m

TBAVGWIT -.IHVerS'..-

S
At J.

r>!3

CX*

> rc-Ti/tO/ll

tl:45.ni

'

r n

(9) When "START" menu is pressed, the copy is started.


The output situation is displayed sequentially in the selected directory column on the right
side. The copy is completed when the directory column is the same as [NC] on the left

side.

84

<r*

Basic Operations for Maintenance

1-5-4

Restoring the Saved Data


For example, the method of restoring the saved data backed up by the USB memory is as
follows.
(1) to (5) Set the USB memory's folder

name in the same way as

previous section.

::

(6) Selecting the backup data

When "USB CONTENT" -* "START" is pressed from the menu, all contents of selected
folder is displayed on the right side column.

IH

I
msKTiisr

w>

253

A*A-

HM57

'***

II

MUD

Jt

rtT

(7) Loading the selected data

When "NC< USB LOAD" -> "START" is pressed from the menu, the selected data is
loaded to NC. The output situation is displayed sequentially in the [NC] column on the left
side. The loading is completed when the directory column is the same as [FID] on the right
side.

.....

Ppr
P*

oun-

PtRtlftXBJU HftT.-'VIIF >i

;i

C potto

ft.'B
n,t

pi

|.

ti-.M. VJiWy

imv:, .Mian

. *;>

mz<*
I

IJZJ

!:

85

Basic Operations for Maintenance

1-5-5

Saving to the various media


The USB memory was selected as a medium for saving in the above example. Hard disk and IC
card (front) can be used as a medium for saving.
Select the device from "DATA I/O" menu in the previous section (2).
cnuo

lINUl)

usa

CAM DATA

DJ2K

$AVIC

>

Select USB

->

Select hard disk

>

Select IC card (front)

(D When a hard disk is selected

As for the drive and the folder, C:\MC_backup\Other is selected as default.


Select the target folder from under the above-mentioned folder by the menu "DIR SELECT".

(2) When a IC card is selected


The drive is fixed on front IC card.
Select the target folder from under the ROOT of IC card by the menu "DIR SELECT".
Other operations when the hard disk and IC card are selected apply correspondingly the USB
memory in the previous section.

86

Basic Operations for Maintenance

1-6
1-6-1

File System Configuration


File System Format
Each size of the MAZATROL MATRIX file system is decided by the number of programs and
number of tool system parameters. Up to 960 programs can be set as a multiple of 16, and up
to 4000 tools can be set

Parameter
0100

Setting value

No. of programs

32 programs

256 programs

16

512 programs

32

960 programs

60

For 0100, set the No. of programs/16 value.


Note 1: The No. of tools is set according to the machine specifications.
Note 2: Refer to section "1-8 Initializing the Data" for the actual formatting operations.

87

Basic Operations for Maintenance

1-7

Setting Data with Special Operations


The following data cannot be set easily by the user. Special operations are required.

1-7-1

Setting the Date and Time


Date and time of MAZATROL MATRIX is automatically set when the power is ON using the
Windows internal clock as the reference. Thus, the date and time are set with the Windows clock.
(1 ) Double-click on the date above the menu or time area.
r

I TPS 1 j JOOS/1O/10

)l 50,
POSITION

TOOL

PROGRAM

LAYOUT

[l7:4J:J6

[vW' 50s
TOOL

PARAH

C-COND

DATA

DIAGHOS

DATA

3D

DISPLAY

I/O

SETUP

MAP

(2) "Date and Time Properties of Windows is displayed, set the current date and time.
The set data is validated immediately.

[Yf

Dale a.jd qhnB Properties


Date & Time j Tine Zone ii Internet Tune j

Dt

mm
.... ..... .it .;
-------- f zoos

...

,,

.*

10

!1 12

13 H 15 16 17
13 19 20 2i 22 23 21
25 26 27 28 29

|
I

3:04:56PM

Current tine rone: Gf'lT Dayl*gi>t Time

88

CX

Cancel

1*

Basic Operations for Maintenance

1-7-2

Setting the Accumulated Time


Five types of accumulated times are displayed. The total time
procedure.

can be changed with the following

(1) Release the password key lock.

Refer to the section "1-1-1 Releasing the Key-lock".


(2) Select the OPTION PARAM screen, and turn 0106 bitO ON.

Note:

The total time cannot be rewritten unless 030 bit 6 is turned ON.
(The other data will be rewritten.)

"ACCUMU.
"DIAGNOSIS" ->
ACCUMULATED TIME window.

(3) Select

TIME"

(highlight),

and

50*

jS T []?

VERSIOK

V\AA O. 001n/aia

Orpa

ALARM

the

14:51:44

~*s 3

'VV

open

ALARM

PLC

MAINTEH

ROHNIKG

GRAPHIC

DATA

HISTORY

S 1GHAL

CHECK

COffTROL

MAIHTE.

ERASE

TIME

(4) Using the cursor keys, move the cursor to "TOTAL TIME
ACCUMULATED TIME

jfe

-ifitfSl
pa

JTXI

cl

aiiiSl
j

200o.dd.od:

(5) Input the time data to be set, and then press the INPUT key to complete the setting.

Ex.

To set 2000 hours:


2

(6)

INPUT

When you input data in above procedures, the 0106 bitO is automatically turned OFF.
Please select the SYSTEM PARAM screen, and confirm that 0106 bitO is OFF.

89

Basic Operations for Maintenance

1-8
1-8-1

Initializing the Data


Initializing the Data
(1) Turn the NC power ON.

....

(2) Press the screen selection key until the following menu appears. Select [DIAGNOS]
- [DATA ERASE] from this menu.
!Trs 0 too5/10/10

'W

POSiriOH

4,

PROGRAM;

TOOL f

LAYOUT
;;; ~ ;

Vl;

. C-COHD.

TOOI.

PRRflM

- I piRGHOS|. DATA

DATA

'

4%

YERSIO.H

[VVA

50*
ALARM

ALARM
HISTORY

Fvv

T |=
in

DISPLAY

SETUP

MAP

ires o :2ocs/io/i8 jveiSTS

so*

. PLC

PLC

MA32TTEH

SIGHAL

CHECK

RUHHXMG

GRAPHIC

CONTROL :

MALHTE ,

ACCUMU.
;

| ERASE

(3) Using the arrow keys and INPUT key, validate the initialization of all data on the
displayed window (highlight in blue).
ZOOt DATA

ADD WPC

TOOL P1S-E
TkxsL Qivv::f,T
(TTTT1HC

OOMtL

WORK oppytr

ALAJtH HISTORY

HACRO VAR.

MADHtHWCE

COHPtfrriOPt <-999 lNPnY>

j-.v-.WM

START TWIT

(4) Follow the message under the data selection field, input "-9999" and press the INPUT
key. The initialization is completed when the DATA ERASE window display
disappears.

90

Basic Operations for Maintenance

1-8-2

Initializing the Programs


The initialization procedure of the area where the machining program is stored is shown below.
(1) Turn the NC power ON.
(2) Press the screen selection key until the following menu appears. Select [PROGRAM]
- [PROGRAM FILE] from this menu.

ifv'j?

PI 50.

POSITION

TOOL

TOOL

PitOG RAM

LAYOUT

fvv

C-COND.:

DIAGHOS

PARAM

DATA

DISPLAY

I/O

SETUP

MAI?

(1,1)

INSERT

so%
PROGRAM

TOOL

DISPLAY

CHANGE

DIR.

PROGRAM

EDIT

PATH

2PROGRAM

PROGRAM

CHANGE

FILE

KA,

DATA

>S 0

IP

SEARCH

WORK NO.

5o%

.j .| !

IrPS 0 i 2005/10/18

jl? :48:24

PROGRAM

REHUIIBER]

PROCEAM

NAME

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PART

DIP..

PROGRAM

BRA9E

INPUT

COPY

EDIT

SHAPE

CHANGE

TRANSFER

-L

PROGRAM

i
(3) Select (highlight) [ALL ERASE] from this menu. Using the operation board keys, input
-9999" and then press the INPUT key. Initialization of the programs is completed
when the highlighted display of "ALL ERASE" returns to the normal display.
TPS 0

pvU

ywv

4*

DELETE

SELECT i.

1 PROG.

DELETE

V:'r;T;;; ;
ERASE

7005/10/ia |l7;42:47

i:

A3.L ERASE <-9999 INPD7> 7

so%
y

-9999
PROGRAM

r~
i
(4) When "DIR CHANGE" is pressed, the following dialog is displayed. The program
stored area can be changed by the buttons. For the following three areas, all erase of
(3) is operated.
f

>**

DIRFCTORv|C:
WORK No

jj-$

Proqraa

SIZE PKOT.P.AM KAHF.

JiTANDAKI)

PROGRAM

HACK UP PROGRAM
HOI)

OlEKAT

I(KO<;KAM-

----

---OK

J3

(Selected area)

(Directory display)

-STANDARD PROGRAM C:\MC_MachineProgurams

-E>(2)BACKUP PROGRAM

C:\MC_Backup\Programs

>HDD OPERATION PROGRAM


C:\MC_Direct Mode Programs

91

92

93

94

95

List of data backed up (If the folder/file do not exist, the backup is unnecessary.)

Data details
1 Machining programs
2 Machining programs for HD
operation

3 Gantry programs
4 Machining programs for backup
5 Sampling data tool data related
Operation control screen data
7 Display data for NIC screen
8 Data for graphic maintenance/
alarm navigation
9 Custom display related module
10 3D interference check*Real
simulator* 3D data for setup
11 Real simulator IN I FILE
12 NC system software
13 J2-CT parameters

14 Maintenance data
15 Option data

16 I SRAM backup
17 I PLC internal memory backup

96

Folder (file) name


C:\MC_Machine Programs
C:\MC_Direct Mode Programs
C:\MC GL Data
G:\MC_Backup

C:\MC sdg
C:\RUMMNG
C:\nm64mdata
C:\m6y_ymw\Mplc
C:\Custom Display
C:\MC_Machine Database
C:\m6y ymw\M740\Bin\ReleaseVealsimjni
C:\ncbackup

CAI2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat
C:\j2ctbusV***. prm
C:\mainte\mnt_j3kup.dat
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt
C:\mainte\(IMC serial No.).opt.old
C:\mainte\srambkf.dat
C:\mainteVpfcbkf1 1 ,dat (other than NEXUS)
C:\mainte\plcbkf01 .dat (NEXUS)

Matrix Data To Save


Added note in step 1 for backup-inch folder(R3)
The data for the Matrix control can now be saved to an USB Jump drive which will allows to save
complete folders easily . So, the data to save is somewhat revised from that of the M640.

Data To Save on Installation Checklist


1) Through Data I/O save the machine parameters, user parameters, cutting conditions.
Save to hard drive under Backup-inch folder if in inch mode, and Backup-mm for
metric.(R3)
2) Using either Printkey or Printscreen3(c:\mainte\printscreen3.exe) save the
following 4 pages:
A) Go to privilege mode.
(To access: Diagnos, Version, Right menu key , 1131 and Input.)
B) Option page.
C) Version page- (Note: In privilege mode, the Model number will be
displayed)
D) O-Parameter page.
E) Hardware Monitor page.
3) Copy the c:\m6y_ymw\Mplc or Tplc folder.
4) Copy the C:MC_SDG\ Alarm folder.
5) Copy the Nm64mdata\eng folder.
6) Copy *.prm and axisinfu.dat file from the c:\Program Files\j2ctbus folder.
7) Save a new mntbkup.dat file using c:\mainte\mainte.exe maintenance tool to hard
drive. Then copy the resulting mntbkup.dat and *.opt file from the c:\mainte.exe
folder to USB drive.
8) Save any 9000 series programs either by Data I/O or Explorer.
9) Save the Pic ladder. See Appendix B
If have a Gantry
10) Save parameter and programs of robot using Data I/O on robot side.
ll)Copy all of these into a folder with S.N. Machine Type and Customer Name.
Then compress to a zipped file with serial number and date(YYYYMMDD).
Example 184305_20060512.zip. For s.n 184305 and May 5th,2006.
12) Place this on the shared on locutus(S:) folder of
Address |Z] S:\MazdtroHMachineDataFromField\184305_QTN300_IPH

x j !

Folders

Bshared on tortus' (S:)


:

lu

GCM

.t

D (2004-02-03) Mahle Update

J O.ClassSyllabus

3! ft

U f

LJ

feme

fl843O5_2OO6O504.zip

Sa| Type:

154 KB WinZip File

iHddfed
05/04/06 12:15PM

184305_QTN300_IPNI

jO.dassWorkbooks
I This folder is Online.
* J OO MEAU consignment parts
Mazatrol\MachineDataFromField
by logging in using VPN or having someone in the office placing it there.
*

97

It is up to the regions how they wish to handle the data as they probably wish to
have their own backup. See Appendix 1 for more detail.

Data To Save on Service Calls if updated software.


1) Version page.
2) Alarm folder
3) Pic ladder.
4) *.LPC file if upgraded.
5) Machine and user parameters.
Appendix A

nafA'

.
-M&1MTENAHCE!

Saving the Mntbkup.dat file


y

2nd

..

NC worn
FC&6551HY-NV
CONTROL UNIT TYPE

IACKUP
HC HODEI

:_il 1

FOJC-MAG51-34
NC 5EE1A1#

DEI .

M6S6993033-9

>j

51873-DEM-0OQ7OO7-OOGOO

Li

HC SERIAL# INPUT

'1$*- INPUT

-4

OPTION

BACKUP

1
Fib Folder

m62yticcd dl

a | fjMGSysHDNC M.exe

80 KB

.....

--i j

<-<-

p] W6YSV5.DLL

24 KB

gW62VbY3.DLL

Z4 KB
20 KR

fPrintSrreenJ.eve

lgm62ytd.ag.cil
ha

28 KB

gj m62vtaDi.nl!

143 KB

pMAIWrE.KE

368 KB

pj mante.ni

~fWj mrf._bkup.dot

; 3-mainte :
L_J Vnc_t; :
;
i
M- P 1 Mcbeckjp?

48 KB Applccticn Ex
1KB
2b KB
32 KB

ID* BACKUP i j

IE# CHANGE

s-

Vnc_tool

CONTROL UNIT TYPE IHFUT

BU5DRV32.DLL
setup, txt
Dload32.exe

NC MODEL IHFUT

PRODUCT ID# r
3-DEM- 0007007-00000

'

wne

M656 9930339

yjozl:

g|||g||

'
.

1;

OPTION DATA

s/w UPDATE I HAIHTENANCE

lsti

1b

HC SERIAL*

k px'pdv<6.s: a <r-u .-nanhrr ;

FCA655LHY-HV
CONTROL UNIT TYPE
FCU6~NA651~34

OPTION DATA

si

- NC

PC
BACKUP

"

Text Docurrer
Applcation
Applcatien x
Applccficn
Applcsfcicn Ex
Applcaicn X
ApplcsBinn
Appkctlen Ex
Applcation Ex
ApplCctiOn

3 KB
1 KB DAT Fib <M

\r. \
\i

*) -Cj

nm64triat
i 1 Program I

!i

Results new mntjokup jg

Copy the new resulting mntbkup.dat and *.opt file to USB jump drive.

Appendix B- Saving of the ladder.


1) Press DIAGNOS.
2) Press VERSION. Select >RIGHT MENU> key and
press Input.
3) Press LADDER
MONITOR

4 ) Select

98

NC
FILE

enter 1131 and

'

-'.it

<7

5) Press OPEN.
6) Select OPEN again.

A)Display will say Reading from Pic


B) Display will say "Pic Onboard Complete"

7) Press OK.
8) Press CLEFT MENUC key twice to see LADDER in black now.
9) Select MONITOR and display will actual values.
10) If

still not showing status, select

START/
STOP
MONITOR

comments then may be that the comments aren't


selected to be shown.
A) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see the VIEW, select it.

11) If No

B) Select COMMENT

TOOLS
-

DISPLAY
C)Make
sure there is checkmark beside | | COMMENT .
D) Press SET when finished.
Still No comment?
This is probably because the comment file (*. wed) wasn't

Loaded in with ladder in steps 5 and 6.


Keep pressing CLEFT MENUC key till you see the
main Mitsubishi Pic Programming Tools Copyright
screen .

A)

B)

Select ENVIRON .
SETTING

C) Select NC FILE
D)
SETTING

Click on the STORAGE PATH Box so it is highlighted


or just press arrow down key to highlight it.
F) The pathway should be C: \m6y_ymw\MPLC
G) Press SETTING menu key.
H) Press the Left menu key an select
NC
E)

FILE
Repeat steps 5 through 10 to see the ladder with comments.

ladder and comments are shown, go to next step to


save ladder and comment file.

12) If

13) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see the Copyright screen,

the

LADDER must be shown as solid black.


14)

Press

NC
FILE

99

15)
16)
17)
18)
19)

Press OPEN
Press OPEN again.
Select OK.
Press CLEFT MENUC key till see Copyright screen again.
Select I EXTERNAL
FILE

20)

Press

21)

Press EXTERNAL

F)

SAVE
PROJECT

SAVE

22)

If a USB jumpdrive is inserted, then make sure that


the Drive/Path is set correctly to the drive.

23)

Select PROJECT
NAME

24)

Enter in an appropriate filename, normally ladder


version .

25)

Press SAVE.

26)

Select OK.
The ladder is now saved to the USB Jumpdrive.

Note: When the project ladder is saved, it will be a folder that includes sub-folders
containing the ladder and comments. The lathe, e-machine, and mills file structure are
different.

100

Appendix 1

Connect to shared drive, Shared on Locutus by entering the Mazak


network either from a regional office or through VPN. It is best to map that
drive so you dont have to do a search via Network Neighborhood.
r->9 shared on 'locutus' (5:)

B D !GCM
a C (2004-02-03) Mahle Update

$0] 0_ClassSyllabus

E-iCl 0_ClassWorkbooks
B-Q

shared on
'locutus' (S:)
This folder is Online.

00_MEAU consignment parts

Ifl Cl 10.0 CAPRMS Documentation


i

iJ

Q Mazatrol

Q MC parts order
ClMCAM_POSTS

Cl MEAU WARRANTY STOCK


Cl MERGE FILES
Cl MexicoTransf erPrice
Cl Midwest

Select an item to view its description. fj

aCl 100 Series APC

pjnn

Once there, simply go to the Mazatrol drive and copy the customer
information by using s.n. , machine type, customer name in folder. Create a
folder using this as your format.

Address |Cl S:\Mazatrol\MachineDataFromField

L=

I Folders
B Cl Mazatrol
: E C MachineDataFromField
| B Cl MATRIX_PRM VIEWER
!j

Name J
Cl 184305_QTN300JPM

MachineDataFromFieli

j Utilities

The zipped file with data should be named by serial number and date.
Address |Q S: \lzatrol\MachineDa!:aFromFfeld\184305JN300JF1
Folders

3$
Name l

Sj184305_20060504.zip

$ Cj Mazatrol

: E'CI MachineDataFromField
! | B -S) 184305JQTN300JPM

184305_QTN300_IPM

Once this is placed here, it will be copied over to the standard service drive
for safe-keeping and will be available by either intranet or through the
service web-site, http://main.mazakcorp.com/service/.

101

102

System Maintenance Work

2
2-1
2-1-1

System Maintenance Work


Folder/File Configuration and Device Information
AT Side Module and File List
The AT side modules and files required for this system.
These contents are planned to be described in the next edition.

2-1-2

HDD Folder Configuration


The configuration of this system's HD folders.

These contents are planned to be described in the next edition.

2-1-3

Device Information
The default setting information for the Windows system device manager.
These contents are planned to be described in the next edition.

103

System Maintenance Work

2-2

Version Upgrading S/W

2-2-1

Preparing the Media Upgraded

NC system software (MAIN-A) and NC application software (MAIN-B) are provided in the media such as
CD-ROM. In order to execute an upgrade, prepare for IC card, USB memory, etc. according to the
following folder configuration.
(1) When IC card (Front) is used:
Folder configuration
Create a Verup folder directly below the device (root), and put a version-name folder under the
Verup folder.
(D Only one version-name folder is allowed under the Verup folder.
(D The configuration of the folders/files under the version-name folder is as shown below.
@ Create either/both Atsys or/and Ncsys for the folder(s) under the version-name folder.

The Verup folder directly below the device is the only object to be
upgraded. (The other folders and files are ignored.)

(root)

Q Hi

Verup

D !l A1
CjJ LH Atsys

Create only one version-name folder in the Verup folder.

0 Diski

\-{h Setup.exe
{ e t c. )

> Application (MAIN-B) upgrade file

P Ncsys
i~Q

Bootsys.ncs

r-O NcentJ.ncs

> NC system (MAI N-A) upgraded file

Ncsystem.ncs

(2) When a medium, such as IC card (Back), USB memory, etc., that can be accessed as an external
drive of the NC is used:
Folder configuration
The file configuration under the version-name folder is as shown below.
(2) The location and number of version-name folders are arbitrarily determined.
(D Create either/both Atsys or/and Ncsys for the folder(s) under the version-name folder.

Ck)

Cn AO
in AI
CjD CH Atsys

The location and number of version-name folders are arbitrarily determined.

Diski

f-Q

>

Application (MAIN-B) upgraded file

>

NC system (MAIN-A) upgraded file

Setup.exe

dp Ncsys( e.t.c. )
j-o

Bootsys ncs

NcentJ.ncs
Ncsystem.ncs

104

System Maintenance Work

1]

(3) When the version backed up in the HD is used:


When the application and NC system are upgraded by using the maintenance tool, the contents under
the version-name folder are automatically copied under the HD's C:\ncbackup.
(Note that the contents are copied in the Atsys folder when upgrading the application, and in the Ncsys
folder when upgrading the NC system.)
Since the versions previously upgraded with this NC are backed up in the HD, it is possible to retrieve
one of those versions by selecting an arbitrary version No. as required.
(Example) When upgrading

the application of version A1


C:

Device

Ncbackup

O CH AO

(root)

O D A1

DAI

Cj3 D Atsys

Atsys

P Diski

r-o

Lp Diski
j~LI Setup.exe

Setup.exe

( e t c. )

(e.t.c. )

Ncsys

All the contents under the version-name folder, including the file
to be upgraded, are copied in the HD's C:\ncbackup before
upgrading.

105

System Maintenance Work

2-2-2

Upgrading Procedure
By the flow chart, the upgrading procedure is explained.
This chart explains a standard prodecre, so please confirm the details by Version upgrade
manual" which will be offerd when every new NC S/W version is released.

START

Back up the customers current data for attention.


Back up all data according to "1-5-3 Backing Up the
Saved Data".

Back up the saved data

ik

Farther, backup SRAM data in the NC unit.


Backup all the SRAM data and PLCs data area
according to SRAM->HDD of "1-4-2 Backing Up
and Restoring the SRAM"

Backup of the SRAM data

Version upgrade
the PC side system (MAIN-B)

Install the NC PC side system (MAIN-B). Refer to


section "2-2-4 Upgrading PC Side System
(MAIN-B)" for details.

Install the NC system (MAIN-A).


Refer to section "2-2-3 Upgrading NC system
(MAIN-A)" for details.

Version upgrade
the NC system (MAIN-A)

The saved data backed up is restored.


Refer to section "1-5-4 Restoring the Saved Data"
for details.

Restore the back up data

No

Parameter
Change?
(1) Add/Change the parameters according to
(1) Add/Change the parameters
(2) Back up the parameters after

changing

"Version upgrade manual".


(2) Back up the parameters according to (T)SRAM
->FLROM of "1-4-2 Backing Up and Restoring
the SRAM" after adding/changing.
(1) Confirm the version display after the operations
by the version display screen from the menu

Confirm after upgrading

"DIAGNOS" -> "VERSION".


(2) Request the confirmation of the machine
operation to the customer after upgrading.

END

106

(Notice) Data backed up first will be used only when it


should be necessary to get back to former state by any
chance because of unexpected phenomenon occurs after
upgrading the NC system.

System Maintenance Work

2-2-3

Upgrading NC system (MAIN-A)

Procedures for upgrading the NC system (MAIN-A) is given below.


Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open the
maintenance tool.
The operation with the maintenance tool is explained
urns ;
mwm mm
as follows.
j-:

wrnrn
r

Selection of device
Select a device in which an upgrading
file is included.

START

in>

HCJWSTCH
ic

URUTS

wmm cw

START

& 1X50.1 SWUX'

* ic WUMB cm

Execution of NC system upgrade


Click the [START] button.

STAR?

r.w

'

] MHHWKij

BI,BF

]
DT

Confirmation of execution
The following message appears.

IS IT OK
i

R.

m START- 0PDATXS&

_
_
_
---

K-C SYSTEH S? :

.-Always push the emergency stop button when


upgrading with the actual machine.

eaBferjHscjp st&p buttgn $

Mt&r

9 OVERWRITE BOOT S'K

CANCEL

OK

Leave the checkmark for "OVERWRITE BOOT SA/V"


ON.

[OK] Upgrading process is continued. > Go to @.


[CANCEL] Upgrading process is discontinued.

(4)

Exiting the application


When executing the maintenance tool without exiting the NC screen, the NC screen is automatically
exited.

Designation of installation file


When IC MEMORY CARD is selected for the device, go to .
When HD is selected for the device, a dialog prompting a folder selection is displayed. Select a
version-name folder and click "OK".
(By simply selecting a version-name folder, the ncsys\Bootsys.ncs file beneath it is
automatically selected.)

|? ]fx]

Browse For Folder


Select the Ver. Folder

c-: D nc backup

A-

Selecting a version-name folder

Ss L_j AJJ3
B D B_A8
W

C_J

B_A8B

8 LJ B_A8T

m LJ B_A8TE
CJ B_AC

&

:+;

L_J Atsys
nesys

v
OK

Cancel

107

System Maintenance Work

Copying of installation file


File to be installed is copied under HD's C:\ncbackup.
When C:\ncbackup\(version-name folder) is specified for the installation file, this file will not be
copied.
When the folder having the same version name already exists in C:\ncbackup, the folder is
overwritten and copied.
INSTALLER FILES BACK UP,
(Message during copying)
Now . Setup Files Back Up..

Execution of installation with the specified file


Stop NC operation to execute upgrading with the file in which system software in the NC unit
(MAIN-A) is specified. Then, restart the NC.
SOFTWARE UPDATE

S3S*

DURING NC SYSTEM RENEWAL ENVIRONMENT


MAKING.

fH
OVERWRITING NC SYSTEM

(Upgrading process is displayed.)

S/U

SOFTWARE UPDATE
DURING NC SYSTEM RE-ACTIVATION .

NC SYSTEM S/W UPDATE IS DONE Vv'ITH SUCCESS.


PLEASE TURN ON THE POWER SUPPLY AGAIN.

OK

When the above message appears, press "OK" to complete the NC system upgrading process.

108

System Maintenance Work

2-2-4

Upgrading PC Side System (MAIN-B)


Procedures for upgrading the NC application (MAIN-B) is given below.

(1)

Release the password key lock. ( Refer to the section "1-1-1 Releasing the Key-lock")

(2)

Check the Windows task bar in the bottom of the screen, and if there exist any applicatons in running,
close all of them.

(3)

Upgrading procedure with using the maintenance tool


Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open the
maintenance tool.
The operation with the maintenance tool is explained as follows.

Selection of device
Select a device in which an upgrading
file is included.

(2)

j sijiftirf Y

ipitU?

mwm mm-

-T,-

rjmaemaat sorrtttSE mtmt


& ic mam cm?

r is>

Execution of application upgrade


"
Click the [START] button.

$rm

*S
.

i* ic am*? a
gp

START

idUttCT srrup TOOL VP&ATS:

(3) Confirmation of execution


The following message appears.

f C-lt

mam

ic

cu

START

up

|KIISTXKiKCEj

irmTC

OACKVP

OPTICK

J
EOT

15 IT OK TO START INSTALLATION ?

Yes

[Yes] Version upgrading is continued. -* Goto @.


[No] Version upgrading is discontinued.

No

Exiting the application


When the maintenance tool is executed without exiting the NC screen, the NC screen is automatically

exited.

(D Designation of installation file


When IC MEMORY CARD is selected for the device, go to .
When HD is selected for the device, a dialog prompting a folder selection is displayed.
Select a version-name folder and click "OK".
(By simply selecting a version-name folder, the Atsys\Disk1\Setup.exe file beneath it is
automatically selected.)

Browse For Folder


Select the Ver. Folder

ri

j nc backup
+ LJ AJJ3

Selecting a version-name folder.

+ :_] B_AS
+' _J 6_A8B
+ _J B_A8T

to

U B _A8TE
B.AC

* _J

'

j Atsys

:_j

ricsys

OK"

]|

Cancel

"]

109

System Maintenance Work

Copying of installation file


A file to be installed is copied under HD's C:\ncbackup.
When C:\ncbackup\(version-name folder) is specified for the installation file, this file will not be copied.
When the folder having the same version name already exists in C:\ncbackup, the folder is overwritten
and copied.
warn

(Message when starting to copy)

Now Installer Fites Back Up . . .

Copying

(Message during copying)

data2.cab
From 'Diskl' to Diskl'
|N*

to-

; <'

25 Seconds Remaining

-[

Cancel

(7) Uninstallation of existing system


Uninstallation of an existing system is executed.
Go to when initially writing an application or when uninstallation has already been executed.

a
So# Sstfut

(Executing uninstallation)

r caa i

[Cancel] Upgrading process is discontinued upon


canceling the uninstallation.

(Completed uninstallation)

:v J j

[Finish] -> Goto

110

System Maintenance Work

<D

Execution of installation with the specified file


The installer automatically starts and installation is carried out with the specified file.

sssaaBr****to*&**aS$**& VteMl

utsm

iifck ffe*4.

Sr'.y*S>w fcOMCMto

'

...

jH&fcSDtb'MMMM

3 1 <w~3

[Next] Upgrading process is continued.


[Cancel] Upgrading process is discontinued upon
canceling the installation.

(Message during installation)


CV.\M74flNwV5igeftNL0IJL

|p|T

C; VVV i n dows\system 3 2\d ri vt; rs \V irtiidldiivai.exe

immediately before the completion of


installation, click "OK".

YMANAGER not exist !!

jx) Note: When the alarm shown left appears

(Completed installation)

tniUHVhwW Wl.'trf LTwptHn

tbviniifdtiMfi WumK-ii ieRtA

FAT tikf

FrusSj m&.

f
,

[Finish] Upgrading process is completed upon


exiting the installer.

111

System Maintenance Work

2-3

2-3-1

Adding/Setting Software Options

Preparing S/W Option


The S/W option of MATRIX is officially sold and provided in the Windows file form.
The file is named "(NC serial No.).opt".

For example, if this NC's serial No. is M7123456789, the option file is provided under the file
name of M71 23456789.opt.
Copy the option file officially provided onto the USB memory or IC card (front) for the
preparation.
(1) When USB memory is used (Recommended)

The option file installed is selected with the maintenance tool. So, the option file can be
stored on an arbitrary folder.
(2) When IC card (front) is used

Store only one option file (The extension ".opt") to "root" of IC memory card. (It is not
possible to select the file by the maintenance tool.)

Difference from conventional option


The option was provided by ROM cassette until M640 series. When purchasing an option for
the second time or later, only difference information between the previous time and this time is
written in ROM cassette. Therefore, two or more ROM cassettes exist when the S/W option is
purchased additionally. For example, when NC unit is exchanged, all the stored ROM
cassettes must be installed in order.

In MATRIX, the option is supplied by file (fixed file name is given for each NC serial No.). So,
even if the options are purchased two or more times, all option data reflected for past
purchase history is written to the latest option file. The differences of option handling between
the conventional model and MATRIX are described below.
M640 series

MATRIX series

Type

Option ROM cassette

Option file (Windwos file)

Media

Dedicated ROM cassette

USB memory, IC card, etc.

Option data

Data of difference from last The always latest option data


time

Keeping after
option is installed

All option ROM cassettes are The latest option file is saved in the
following of NC's FID. (automatic
attached to the machine.
saving with maintenance tool)

C:\mainte\(NC serial No ).opt

112

System Maintenance Work

2-3-2

Adding/Setting Software Options


The S/W option addition and setup methods are explained as an example of using the USB

memory use.
(1) Set the USB memory stored option file to NC unit.

(2) Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to
open the maintenance tool.

(3) (Only when S/W option is added)


Select "MAINTENANCE" mepu,
and click [>] button.

51

ickns

SJ'*i.niMANa
xutnteuHcc
.

? :

BACKUP

JK
W mriFT

O5KTK0I, WIT

rm

FCW-WSlSKW

The current NC's option contents


are written to
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt
by this operation.
Normally, the file is automatically
created when the option is set
last time as described later.

wi-

BC SttUU
xniuttTH
OFTIOK PATA

Sail.
IT
itc aemur

5j

123S?85

OFTIO!* BATA
.

a mtvim

ptat%

m mm ism I
wit ww' iitrer j

eoifraji

NC SSSIS.U MSOT

j
:

sm KFOATE

OFTIOK

When the option is set for the first time, this operation is not required because there is no
option data in NC.
(4) Select the "OPTION" menu, and
display the "Select a Option
Files-

TpOtS

err i os
; SOTUiC
& .t.o

_ li

nmm w

soresto

screen.
(5) Select the [HD] of "SETTING"

menu.
Select [1C MEMORY CARD]
when option file is prepared
in front 1C card.
(6)

UPDATE

[ AliifENAKOE|

DACRt#

OFT IOK

EXIT

Click the "SETTING" button.

113

System Maintenance Work

A dialog prompting an option file selection is displayed. Specify drive/path/option file name.
(When the 1C memory card is selected, this dialog is not displayed.)
Sitfcil .1 Optkw Hlrs |

fee}; US*

Cjtxea
SfyBixxs*

i3
:

13ft
'

-U

M? &$<*#**&

3B

FfcgiSSa?

fmSem

r_w~"

Ftes

Specify a file and click the "Open" button. The specified file is copied to C:\mainte\, and the
contents of option file is ready to be set in the NC unit.
When the option file having the same file name as that of the specified file already exists in
C:\mainte\, confirmation message for overwriting appears.

MAY I OVERWRITE ?

HIIIE:::)]

No

[Yes] The file is overwritten and option setting is started.


Note that the extension of the original option file must be
changed from "opt" to "opt.old" when saving.
[No] The file is not overwritten and option setting is
discontinued.

Note that when specifying the option file in C:\mainte\, option is set to the NC unit by the file
specified without copying.
Option setting is completed when the display of the "SETTING" button in the option setting

screen turns to normal from the grayed state.


Alarm message appears in the following cases, and the option setting is discontinued.
When C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt is a file with a different serial No.
from that of NC.
2 or more option files exist in C:\mainteV
2 or more option files are created by copying the specified file
in to C:\mainteV
(*) In other word, the number of option files (file having the extension
name of ".opt") in C:\mainte\ has to be only one and its file name has
to have the same serial No. as that of NC unit.

B-. y -Q
OPTION ERROR

(7) The maintenance tool is ended.


(8) Confirm the option effective setting has been updated on the option screen after
turning NC power supply ON again.

114

System Maintenance Work

2-3-3

Attention for adding S/W option


The state of option setting is changed from A to B by adding an option. The following
indicates the transition of the option setting.

Before setting the option addition


NC
Option A

HD
C:\mainte
L (NC serial No.).opt

- -Option A

After setting the option addition


NC
Option B

HD
Renamed
and seved

USB memory

(NC serial No.) .opt


Option B

C:\mainte

t;

(NC serial No.). opt


NC serial No.). opt.old

Option B
Option A

The latest option file is saved on HD as " (NC serial No.).opt", and the second last option file is
saved as "(NC serial No ). opt old".
When the option setting is different from the customer intended state by a wrong
purchase/order etc. of the option, return to the state of option A according to the following
procedures, and confirm the option arrangement again.

Method of return to the previous option state

Rename the option file under "C:\mainte" on Explorer:


(NC serial No ).opt

>(NC serial No.). new

(NC serial No.).opt.old->(NC serial No ).opt


Install the option file C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt from maintenance tool again.

115

System Maintenance Work

2-4

Servicing with the Maintenance Tool


(1) Start up "Explorer" from "Start" menu (right click), and then start the maintenance tool
(C:\mainte\mainte.exe). Select "MAINTENANCE" menu to open the MAINTENANCE
screen. The NC model, serial No. and control unit type can be input on the screen.
Refer to the "Maintenance Tools Instruction Manual" (BNP-B3934-902) for details.

3MAINTENANCE TOOLS

MAINTENANCE
'

NC
NC MODEL

(C)

_il

FCA750PY-N02

CONTROL UNIT TYPE


FCU7-MA513-22
NC SERIAL#
M7001234567
OPTION DATA

(a)

(b)DEL.

>j
(d)

A production number
note to a service part

(e)

(g)

S/W UPDATE

MAINTENANCE

--BACKUP
NC MODEL
FCA750PY-N02
CONTROL UNIT TYPE
FCU7-MA513-22
NC SERIAL#
M7123456789
OPTION DATA
NC MODEL INPUT

CONTROL UNIT TYPE INPUT


NC SERIAL# INPUT

BACKUP

OPTION

EXIT

The correspondence of each button is explained in the following section. (This is not
related to the work procedures.)

(a)

Backing up from FLROM to HD

ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE DATA TO BACKUP FILE ?

Yes

(b)

No

Deleting backup files

?j

ARE YOU SURE TO DELETE BACKUP FILE ?

Yes

(c)

The NC model, serial No. control unit type and option


data registered in FLROM are written to HD,
C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat Maintenance data
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.J.opt -Option data

The HD backup files (C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) are


deleted.

No

Writing from HD to FLROM

1J

Nr

AitF YOU Sf SlF TO RFSsOiif DATA

ftACfrt P FIiF >

The NC model, serial No., control unit type and option


data ( \mainte\(serial No.).opt) saved in the HD backup
file (C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) are registered in the

FLROM
Yes

f4o

_|si

~ORD

A password is required to return the product information


Only Mitsubishi personnel can carry out this

to the NC.
procedure

-r
OK

116

CA1ICEL | CLEAR

System Maintenance Work

(d)

NC model input

J
r

The NC model can be selected from the combo box

or can be directly input.


After inputting the NC model, click on the "OK button.
The NC model in the backup file
(C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) will be updated, and the NC
MODEL in the display window of the MAINTENANCE

screen will be updated simultaneously.


OK

(e)

CANCEL

Press "CANCEL" to cancel input of the NC model,


and press "CLEAR" to clear the items input in the
combo box.

CLEAR

Control unit type input


n:n:ir

The control unit type can be selected from the combo


box or can be directly input. After inputting the control
unit type, press on the "OK" button. The control unit
type in the BACKUP display window of the
MAINTENANCE screen will be updated.

3
OK

(f)

CANCEL

CLEAR

NC serial No. input


NC SERIAL*

M?r
OK

(g)

Writing to HD

A&F YOU

CLEAR

CANCEL

Input nine characters after M7.


After inputting the serial No., click on the "OK" button.
The input will be checked. In the input check, the No.
of input characters and the validity of the characters will
be checked.
If the input check is okay, the NC SERIAL # in the
BACKUP display window of the MAINTENANCE screen
will change.
The backed up options will be cleared when the serial
No. is changed. Note that the options will be cleared
when the password is input and the NC data is written
in.

FLROM of service part unit

to aesto&e DATA FROM fc&oar n F >


Vet

Mu

The NC model, serial No. control unit type and option


data written in the HD backup file
(C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) are written to FLROM of the
service part.
The service part is a special unit whose serial No. is
(Two characters following M7 are 0.
M700
Arbitrary characters since the third character.)
The function is same as C, but the password input is
not required when writing in the service part.

117

118

r~ r

System Maintenance Work

2-5

Inputting and Outputting Ladders


The ladders stored in the NC's FLROM can be output to the external media by ladder monitor.
Conversely, the ladders stored on the external media can be input to the NC's FLROM/SRAM.
Starting the ladder monitor
The ladder monitor is starded in 1 131mode

EUlsiilP--

3*/3

."W

so*

]ia

DIACWOS

VERSION

!s * 'SOS/i/*o

rVV'A 0 . OOSn/ttir*

Orpe
DIftGNOS

OPTION

MONITOR

SERVO

SPINDLE

JIPADtJALE| LADDER

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

VERSION

MONITOR

Two ladders exist because the ladders are operated by two CPUs in NC unit.
The ladder input/output must execute both COS1 and COS2.

2-5-1

Saving to External Media


The procedure is shown below:

Open the ladder which runs in NC on onboard edition area.


Save the opened ladder in external media.
NC HN123card
(Vertual:COS2 side)

NC

(SRAM/FROM)

(Real:COS1 side)

V*4.

External

Project/\
Save

Project
Open

PC
side

A-*

FROM area

Area for
COS2

7?

NC HN163card

HN482card

Area for
COS1

/ ROM

wrile

Save

Temporary
storage

Copy when
the power is

ON

Onboard
edition area

area

Open

n<=
\

"T

Execute ladder

Edit/Monitor

(a) Click "ENVIRON. SETTING" -"CONNECT NC Setting" to select the ladder of


COS1 side.
1

ill

!
r iLC

Vlf

r~

Ull

(b) Select " M01" from the list, and press "SET". (The selected environment is displayed
on the the lower right of the screen. M01 is displayed in case of the COS1 side. M02
is displayed in case of the COS2 side.)

119

System Maintenance Work

CONNECT Hfr SETTING".


OTjilJeiMiirsa

SET

Warning:

When connection destination WC is changed, the


PLC data on onboard is lost.

aT'
(c)

SST

!
:

i
i

Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key", and click "NC FILE".
I

i
SC

fill

OTOM/L

rut

nir

Wuswi.

riawi

W5OP

Df/IKH.

(tlP

JITHhC

M!

(d) Click OPEN".


i
Oik

Sflfc

K*C

VUUFY

WJ1E

ten it

t$i

BSS?

(e) Click "OPEN" -> "OK".


X

373j>: 1 1S
05101 ?
"tt er
PLC/tw*rk

OPEN

(0

SEL. ALL

/CANCEL

05/10/20 20:50:20 130 532Bvt

05/10/20 20:50:20

33 & B v t e

SELECT

PARAM.

+ PFDC.

Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key" twice, and click "EXTERNAL FILE".
!

rsc

MU

c-sr

ulABWs.

If IF

(g) Click "SAVE PROJECT"


I

*35. j

rr fixicT

(h) Click "EXT ERNAL SAVE".

120

M)1

(M3

System Maintenance Work

| SAVE- PROJECT

a
-J

g] PROCRAM

-0 373HXI19

051017

'.r: {*3 Parameter

parent

SELECT

SEL. ALL

EXTERNAL
SAVE

PARAM.

/CANCEL

PROC.

(i) Set "DRIVE", "Path" and "Project name". Click "SAVE".


EXTERNAL SAVE

ffra

DRIVE
LIST

j
PLC ty pel Dale of creating

Fi le name

m..

| Heading
Oi rectory

Drive/Polh _ [D'Vtenp
ld_O5O0O5|

Title

CANCEL

SAVE

(j) When the following dialog is displayed, the saving is completed. Click "OK".
, -l v

;sv>

CospIctecJ.

!
m&m

(k)

Return to the following screen pressing F1 key" twice.


i

(I)

M;

fur

ICiTX

LXttF.

fill

flWOi.

j.

| toll

eve

tar

Click "ENVIRON. SETTING". (This work is not necessary when there is no COS2
side. Jump to (o), and end the ladder monitor.
t

uu

? itr

WCtR

CICt

ttiV*.

C*!*/XG.

LUGKX.

ar

Oil

(m) Select " M01" from the list, and press "SET" on "CONNECT NC SETTING".

121

System Maintenance Work

CONNECT NC SETTING ,

'

IS m

SET

Warning:

When connection destination NC is changed, the


PLC data on onboard is lost.

(n) Operate (c) to (k), and save the COS2 side ladder.
(o) End the ladder monitor clicking "END".

2-5-2

I til

nu

iCYICC

UtWR

FJU

?}MA.

ClJJJQSGS.

SOW

JCU1

Loading from External Media


The procedure is shown below:
Clear the ladder which runs in temporary storage area.
(2) Open the project saved in external media on the onboard edition area.
Load the opened ladder to the temporary storage area in NC.
@ Save the ladder in ROM area.
if the steps of (2) and are executed without deleting the ladder of step when the project
name between the ladder executed in the temporary storage area and the ladder saved in the
external media differ, two ladders are registered (multi-ladder specification).

NC HN123card
(Vertual : COS2 side)
\

NC

HN482card

ROM write

Area for
COST

Temporary

side

Onboard
edition area

storage

area

Copy when
the power
is ON

COS2

Project
Open

/x

Save

Area for

External
media

SaveZ

FROM area

Project

NC HN163card
(Real :COS1 side)
Erase ladder

(SRAM/FROM)

Open

Execute
(a) Click "ENVIRON. SETTING"
COS1 side

Edit/Monitor

"CONNECT NC SETTING" to select the ladder of


I

rm

122

DC

( il<

L'siV-JW-

* ME

'I

UJitiK

tevicr

nr-jn.

SISS I

iCLP

tfil

LUi

System Maintenance Work

(b) Select " M01" from the list, and press "SET". (The selected environment is displayed
on the the lower right of the screen. M01 is displayed in case of the COS1 side. M02
is displayed in case of the COS2 side.)

CONNECT NC SETTING
SI

SET

Warning:

When connection destination NC is changed, the


PLC data on onboard is lost.

arjp

ECT

'

(c)

Return to the following screen pressing F1 key", and click "NC FILE".
| Ml

i
fC

HU.

DCDHiU.

rite

rju:

i
\

Wirot.

2T11HC

W)

*1P

(d) Click ,,DELETEM.


t

Mi

Cftt

vtwrr

SAYt

ICXTE

fcrawT

(e) Click "SEL. ALL/CANCEL", and all data is selected.


X

'

/\ 373lX

l 13
05101?
Pirsroete/
PLC/Mtwo/h

DELETE

AIL
f sa.
/cwa

05/10/20 ?0:5020

130S$?0yt

03/10/20 20.50:20

3360vtc

$CLECT

(0 Click "DELETE".
i

t I~I

&Sf !

! Wl

! S&

(g) Click "YES" on "DELETE CONFIRMATION" screen.

123

System Maintenance Work

3
It acil iwJ I He i deleted.
Is ii all riiM1?

El

SO

(h) If the ladder is RUN" state, "STOP" is urged. Click "YES.


FtC * ri s ftlW stile,
J* &Ieiipn >rfcred ifl*r

lgp Pt,C?

NO

(i) When the following dialog is displayed, the deleting is completed. Click "OK".

ftSMsttid
,

P|

,-E

CcfttpJeletJ.

-V
ft,;

(j) Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key" twice, and click "EXTERNAL FILE".
rant

uivu

w text

I
tc

flit

B7a*

rSLT

j.

SB

| Ml

I
IM?

(k) Click "OPEN PROJECT".


*3

iaitr

rgg.

n&< j

| ffi

(I) Set "DRIVE" and "File name", and click "SELECT1.

|:$aECI; PROJECT?
DRIVE

I PLC typeFPate of

Jiilsjsff,
E&..

c i ea tins

[Head i nr
Di rectory

B:

Dr i ve/Pftt h

jD: Vlcmp

Project

[ij>d_05030fi

SELECT

moie

CANCEL

(m) Click "OPEN".

124

|
i

tail

System Maintenance Work

OPEN PROJECT :

a I.CS0805.,:|
rKUUHAM

Q 373HX1 13 051017
Parameter

2 param

SEL. ALL
/CANCEL

CP EH

SaECT

SELECT

PARAH.

PROJECT

PROG.

(n) When a message that prompts you to comfirm overwriting is displayed, click "ALL
YES".
X

UP-- -

The program (373MX119.P?) already exists.


Are you sure OK to overwrite?
YES

ALL YES

NO

(o) When the following dialog is displayed, the loading is completed. Click "OK.

iHE.Mwrij Cclete3.

i
sail

(p)

Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key" twice, and click "NC FILE.
'n't. ;.5U5.';

Pil>

H.I*

i
:

M:

rue

! S I

HflH

>i

(q) Click 'SAVE


t

4
Oft't

SAVE

VERIFY

JSk

tGLU

| eat)

FCfirUT

(r) Click "SAVE".

125

System Maintenance Work

x]
-FREE SPACE VOLLWE

j=

a PROGRAM

LARGEST CONTIGUOUS

..2

3 [ar

373WX \ 19
Par ansttr
Par am

051017

BYTE

TOTAL FREE SPACE


BYTE

FREE

SPACE

YOLUUE

SELECT
PARAM.
+ PROG.

SEL. ALL
/CANCEL

SAVE

(s) When the following dialog is displayed, the loading is completed. Click "OK".
;X

Collet c4;

(1) Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key", and click "ROM WRITE".
esni; j.ifi'.-fr.

TO zrp

era

Ml

reran

iCLZK

|
:

WSl'.*

(u) Click "YES".


! PW wire " -

TStflPiAflV H3KY
Cd.lt

or CfCAHIC

1J

I'-Alt t> CREA11;


IV)

>co

it In RGB?

tr It*

(v) When a message that prompts you to comfirm overwriting ROM is displayed, click

"ALL YES".
AM data in
Ihe

program rersory

Do you

wsm

the lar get *i 1 1 be deleted,

lly

*on(

dale oil I bs written into ISe target.

to execute?

YES

NO

(w) When the following dialog is displayed, the ROM writing is completed. Click "OK".

126

ry.

System Maintenance Work

C*olleiJ.

'

llilll
r

(x) Click "PLC RUN/STOP,,.

i i

SAVE

troi

!I

KM

VIR1FY

-&>

rcfi

IGITC

wire

gg

(y) Click "YES"


STATUS

[SlS

Is PLC started?

xl
NO

(2) Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key" once.


rnr

| SOI

Ltfotn

tcvict

KlAGfCi.

pwi.

tar

(aa) Click "ENVIRON. SETTING". (This work is not necessary when there is no COS2
side. Jump to (dd), and end the ladder monitor.)
I

FILE

!
i

l/iCtT*

fits.

JL

soviet

?|ACME.

rlf-JU.

fii

ail

nr

M)

(bb) Select " MOT' from the list, and press "SET" on "CONNECT NC SETTING".

CONNECT NO SETTING
'TTTT'f!

Tj

\*

SET

Miasag8afflHI

Wa rn i ng :
When connection destination NC is changed, the
PLC data on onboard is lost.

(cc) Operate (c) to (z). and save the COS2 side ladder.
(dd) End the ladder monitor clicking "END".
I

1
FILL

Sr

UiCCP

:evKt

iff}*.

C- IfirtZ.

SI'S j

-w

dt

Dfl

127

System Maintenance Work

2-6
2-6-1

Replacing the HD
Replacing the HD
Preparation
HDD unit for replacement (Installed NC system (MAIN-B) of the same version as customer)
When MAIN-B has not been installed in the HDD unit, prepare NC system for upgrading
by the USB memory etc.
USB memory for data backup

The replacement procedure of HD is shown below.


Note: This method assumes that the NC is running properly. If Windows does not start, this
method cannot be used.

START

Backup of the saved data

Backup of HDD internal data

Replacement of HDD unit

Back up the customers current data.


Back up all data according to "1-5 Backing Up the
Saved Data.".
Backup the HDD internal data.
Refer to section "2-6-2 Backup data of HD" for details.

The HDD unit is removed, and it is replaced by a


new HDD unit.
At this time, replace a front cover of a new HDD
unit to a front cover of former HDD unit (The name
plate and the WindowsCOA seal are affixed).

V
Upgrading of NC application

\7
All erase in program area

Restoration of backup data

V
Data backup to HDD

END

128

When MAIN-B has not been installed to replaced


HDD or when the version should be upgraded to
the latest version, install prepared MAIN-B
according to "2-2-4 Upgrading PC Side System
(MAIN-B)".
Erase the all program area on PROGRAM FILE
screen. Refer to section "1-8-2 Initializing the
Programs" for details.

Restore the backed up data by following steps.


(T) Restore the backed up data to HDD according
to "2-6-3 Restoring the Backed up Data.
Restore the all saved data according to "1-5-4
Restoring the Saved Data" .
Back up the NC side data to new HDD.
Refer to section "2-6-4 Backing up the NC Side
Data to HD" for details.

sv*

System Maintenance Work

2-6-2

Backup data of HD
Copy the specific files in HD to an external memory of the USB memory etc. by the Explorer.

List of data backed up (If the folder/file do not exist, the backup is unnecessary.)

Folder (file) name

Data details
1 Machining programs
2 Machining programs for HD

operation _
3
4
5
6
7
8

9
10

11
12
13

Gantry programs_
Machining programs for backup
Sampling data, tool data related
Operation control screen data
Display data for NC screen
Data for graphic maintenance/
alarm navigation
Custom display related module
3D interference check- Real
simulator-3D data for setup
Real simulator INIFILE
NC system software
J2-CT parameters

14 Maintenance data
15 Option data

16 SRAM backup
17 PLC internal memory backup

Note:

C:\MC_Machine Programs
C:\MC_Direct Mode Programs

...

C:\MC GL Data
C:\MC Backup
C:\MC sdg
C:\RUMMNG
C:\nm64mdata
C:\m6y_ymw\Mplc
C:\Custom Display
C:\MC_Machine Database
C:\m6y_ymw\M7401Bin\Release\realsim.ini
C:\ncbackup

C:\j2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat
C:\j2ctbusV*.prm
C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat _
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt.old
C:\mainte\srambkf.dat _
C:\mainte\plcbkf11.dat (other than NEXUS)
C:\mainte\plcbkf01.dat (NEXUS)_

For applications installed after shipment and the network settings made after shipment,
check with Yamazaki and backup if necessary.

129

System Maintenance Work

2-6-3

HI

Restoring the Backed up Data


The backed up data according to "Backup of HDD internal data" is restored to replaced HD.
List of data restord
(If the folders/files listed in the table below do not exist at backup, it is unnecessary to restore.)
Items marked with
under [Resore] in the table below are restored.
It is unnecessary for the items with O to restore, because these items are directly restored from
NC internal data by the maintenance tool in the next step.

Data details
1 Machining programs
2 Machining programs for HD

Restore

Folder (file) name


C:\MC_Machine Programs
C:\MC_Direct Mode Programs

operation
3 Gantry programs
4 Machining programs for backup
5 Sampling data, tool data related
6 Operation control screen data
7 Display data for NC screen
8 Data for graphic maintenance/
alarm navigation
9 Custom display related module
10 3D interference check- Real
simulator-3D data for setup
11 Real simulator INIFILE
12 NC system software
13 J2-CT parameters

C:\MC GL Data
C:\MC_Backup
C:\MC_sdg
C:\RUMMNG

C:\nm64mdata
C:\m6y_ymw\Mplc

C:\Custom Display
C:\MC_Machine Database
C:\m6y ymw\M740\Bin\Release\realsim.ini
C:\ncbackup

C:\j2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat
C:\j2ctbus\***.prm

14

Maintenance data
15 Option data
SRAM backup
16
17

PLC internal memory backup


Machining programs

Note:

130

O
O

C:\rnainte\mnt bkup.dat
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt

O
O
O

C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt.old


C:\mainte\srambkf.dat
C:\mainte\plcbkf1 1.dat (Other than NEXUS)
C:\mainte\plcbkf01.dat (NEXUS)_

For applications installed after shipment and the network settings made after shipment,
check with Yamazaki and reset if necessary.

System Maintenance Work

2-6-4

Backing up the NC Side Data to HD


The data of the item with O in the previous page is restored by backing up to HD in which NC
side data has been exchanged.
(1) SRAM data and PLC internal memory backup
Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open

the maintenance tool.


Select the "BACKUP" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS".

t
'.;l

SACK?

FLASH KOX

JJ

ECT-DATA IxO

_id

do t

&-V

BACKUP

OPTIOK

EXIT

Click the [>] button on the lower right.


Backup the some all SRAM data (2MB) in NC and PLC internal memory area to HDD.
Refer to the of "1 -4-2 Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM" for detail.
(2) FLROM maintenance data (the NC model, serial No. and option, etc.) backup
Select "MAINTENANCE" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS".
/

m
KAIUTTJJAiiCE

LXA7SI1P e- m?
COKTKDJ. TJK t T TYPE
LUIIV-KASI
KC CiERI AL*

X7001234S6?

OPTIOK DATA

Df:i

KCU7-MA!.

VC SERIAL*
K? 123*56783
OPTlOIf DATA

f
1

KC KODKI. ttrpltr
IJIflT TTKK IKKITT
KC SESIAL* IHrUT

IT
\ COKTHOL
1

>

3 n,M;rTE)iA;Ki||

PY-mi;1

a.-irrsoi. mi JT TYPE

A;

bJt
A production
note to o service ijJoxt

C.- UPDATE

r-

/<i n

KC MODEL

SJOSIP

OCTIOK

EXIT

Click the [>] button on the upper right.


The NC model, serial No. and option data registered in FLROM are backed up to HD.
The Names of backup files are fixed as "C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat" and " (NC serial
No).opt".
Refer to the (a) of 2-4 Servicing with the Maintenance Tool" for details.

131

System Maintenance Work

2-7

Replacing Control Unit

2-7-1

Replacing Control Unit


Preparation
HDD unit for replacement (Installed NC system (MAIN-B) of the same version as customer)
When MAIN-B has not been installed in the HDD unit, prepare NC system for upgrading
by the USB memory etc.
USB memory for data backup

The replacement procedure of NC unit is shown below.

CSTART)
Backup of the saved data

Backup of the NC unit internal data

V
Replacement the control unit

Clearing of SRAM area

<0
Installation of NC system

Restoration of backup data

Calender setting

A
Data backup for emergency

END

132

Back up the customer's current data


Back up all data according to "1-5 Backing Up the
Saved Data".
Backup the NC unit internal data.
The target data is the following data.
(D All SRAM data and internal PLC data
@ The maintenance data in FLROM (including the
options)
The ladders in FLROM
Refer to section "2-7-2 Backing up the NC Unit
Internal Da1a" for details.
The control unit is removed, and it is replaced by a new
control unit.
At this time, replace a front cover of a new control unit
to a front cover of former control unit (The name plate is
affixed).

Clear the data in the SRAM mounted in the


replaced control unit's HR482. Refer to section "1-2
Completely Erasing the Memory" for details.
Install the NC system software to NC unit's
FLROM. Refer to section "2-2-3 Upgrading NC
system (MAIN A)" for details.

Restore the backed up data by following steps.


(D Restore the backed up data according to "2-7-3
Loading the Backup Data" .
the all saved data according to "1-5-4
Restore

Restoring the Saved Data" .


Set the date and time.
Refer to section "1-7-1 Setting the Date and Time"
for details.
Back up a part of the SRAM data like the parameter
etc. to FLROM in preparation for various data
areas' breaking down. Refer to section "2-7-4

Backing Up Data for Emergency Purposes" for

deis.

System Maintenance Work

2-7-2

Backing up the NC Unit Internal Data


The following NC unit internal data is backed up.

All SRAM data and internal PLC data

(2) The maintenance data in FLROM (Including the options)

(3) The ladders in FLROM

r
(1) SRAM data and PLC internal memory backup
Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open
the maintenance tool.
Select the "BACKUP" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS".
/

3iUEfnHK;rqG6.s
-BACXOF
FLASK ROX

IZLii

SBAX

EXT-I'ATI-0

_LJ CD

/tc' 51-mLOc t

C :s

/
Uft'iTE Mill

lAHCEj j

J||

DACJOIP

OfTICH

EXIT

Click the [>] button on the lower right.


Backup the some all SRAM data (2MB) in NC and PLC internal memory area to FIDD.
Refer to the (3) of "1-4-2 Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM" for detail.
(2) FLROM maintenance data (the NC model, serial No. and option, etc.) backup
Select "MAINTENANCE" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS.
/

mm

BACK'D?

KC KODEi

PCIIT-XAM:*-??
KC SERIAL/

I/

X/001234567

HC MODEL

/TQ

PY-KD2
CO XT KOI liKIT TYPfii

J--Y- im 2

COlfTKOL 1131 IT TYPE


KD7-HA513-3?

k)

)rt:

i-

SERIAL/

H7123A5i785

OPTICS DATA

OPT I OH DATA

A product icA
&ote to a crv :co port

/
S-V irTOXTEj

mm

HAIHTEHMCZ:
JtC

mi;iTEMiMCz||

KC XOOKL ItiPbT
j
T TVPK l jrpirr |

'l COKTROI. UK I

!i

,.;l ...

ornoir

EXIT

Click the [>] button on the upper right.


The NC model, serial No. and option data registered in FLROM are backed up to HD.
The Names of backup files are fixed as "C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat" and " (NC serial
No).opt".
Refer to the (a) of "2-4 Servicing with the Maintenance Tool" for details.

133

System Maintenance Work

(3)

FLROM ladder backup


Backup the ladders on "LADDER MONITOR" screen of NC.

Refer to the section "2-5-1 Saving to External Media" of "2-5 Inputting and Outputting
Ladders" for details.

Two ladders exist because the ladders are operated by two CPUs in NC unit.
The ladder must backup both COS1 and COS2.
(Example)
The step (i) of the drive, path and project name settings are as follows:
Drive/path
C:\mainte\ladder
Project name COS1 side>cos1
COS2 side>cos2

134

System Maintenance Work

2-7-3

Loading the Backup Data


The following backed up data is loaded to NC unit.

All RAM data and PLC internal data

(D

The maintenance data in FLROM (including the options)

(3)

The ladders in FLROM

(1) Loading SRAM data


Stard the maintenance tool, and select the BACKUP screen.
J

si05

ST)

BACiCUP
FU5K JX

sax
Ti/l/Q

IDCT-DA

C:\JW

S'K UPDATE

ijax e*v5TWLb>:( .dot

JjlAjfrTfflANCEj

|(

BACKUP

OPTION

EXIT

Click the [<] button on the lower left.


"C:\mainte\srambkf.dat" and "C:\mainte\plcbkf11.dat" (or "plcbkf01.dat") in FIDD are loaded to
SRAM in NC unit.

(2) Loding FLROM maintenance data (the NC model, serial No. and option, etc.)
Select "MAINTENANCE" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS".

fUS

jJAIlITtKAJICE

SAC y.vp

KC
KC MODEL
KCA7SUEy- KUJ
COKTROS. UKtT TYPE

KC MCC'EX.
ECA75U PY-KUL
trsix TYPE

cojrrKOL

F(,U7-A5N-7?

KU'/'K AS13*-??

KC SERIA1*

KC SERIAL*
H712345(B7B9

CTTIOK DATA

A pr<oduct ion r.uric-sr


cote t o serv 1C* JWl

OPT DOM DATA

S'V UPDATE

*
j XAIIlTGUilCrjj

KC MODE!. IKFi;r
COIfTROJ. inur TYPE IK PUT
.

>-

.isEgr,Z j

\
OiCSXIl\ I

OPTIOK

EXIT

Click the [<] button on the upper left.


"C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat" in FIDD is loaded to FLROM in NC unit.
Refer to the (b) of "2-4 Servicing with the Maintenance Tool" for details.

135

System Maintenance Work

(3)

Loading FLROM ladder

Load the ladders on "LADDER MONITOR" screen of NC.

Refer to the section "2-5-2 Loading from External Media of "2-5 Inputting and Outputting
Ladders" for details.

In the step (i) of the drive, path and project name settings, select the drive, path and
project name set in (3) of "2-7-2 Backing up the NC Unit Internal Data", and load both
COS1/COS2 ladders.

136

System Maintenance Work

2-7-4

Backing Up Data for Emergency Purposes


Backup the parameters, etc., into the FLROM for emergency purposes.

Stard the maintenance tool, and select the BACKUP screen.

1
1

V.
Btcxvp

FUSS BOX

SJ?AH

EXT-

_lj_Lf

DAfl 2x0

c:

.dot

/
M OPI'ATE

LsINTfcUMCI

BACKUP

OPT It'S

EXIT

Click the [>] button on the lower right.


Backup the some SRAM data in NC to FLROM in NC.

137

Appendix

3
3-1
3-1 -1

Appendix
Using the DIAGNOSIS Screen
DIAGNOSIS (ALARM Screen)
This is the main diagnosis screen. Detailed information is given for up to 16 current alarms.

3-1-2

VERSION Screen
The system software, spindle version, servo version, system model name and serial No. are
displayed.
S3
;

unta I sam

mamnj umi txmtm j jtatnaar. mnita 1

VI* rC07-MA&13-Xl
'

tri

WUX-JI

lOOIVlTOO-

MXIJt-B

1DOJW001-A*V
loOJDDU-fcXVfi

BMtl

MprpR

<

)
)

.liCT-3

<
<

).<

)
)

>

BRY-C?

<c

JZC3-S
.ItCT-C
atcr-i

CZCT-B

BRV-W

)
)

JTct-y

PRY-iil
BHV

SRV

ix;y

s-x?

<

3,

BRY-H

flnv-12
H*V- 13
Mt lfl
V- J5
BRV-J6
BPM-1

4
(

<

<
.<

-1
iim-i

<

B PM 6

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

12

138

P I AC NO3

OPTION

Display item

UNIT
SERIAL
MODEL
MAIN-A
MAIN-B
LGLADDER-F
LADDER-B
LGP
SRV-1 to 16
SPN-1 to 8
J2CT-1 to 14

<
<
<
<
<
<

<

,7?~4

J?Ct-10

JZCT-11

>
)
>

Jtcr-ii
JtCT-13

<
i

)
)

JTCS-l
J2tT-2

<

>) <
<
) <
)
)

.J2CT1*

<

>

)
)

1
)

<

SI IS1*

V-M O . OPIn/adi
HMJTMl

>4

nrp-o

<

) (

Hyp

> <
)

<

STM-4

8f-3

TTL&

<

8RY-10

TL'RJ JCJM

iiwi

)
)
)
)

1-XDUtU-r t001U3T3HX119
LMiDtn-U IOOIB373-HXL15

DJCKOC

HMTOJTR

<
<
<

BUY J J

fiRV-f

ear-jr?

HGOti. -CA7 50(*Y'K0l

iJliJUM. M7i73*567B9

VOttJ nta

RT:TO

SPJMIMJT.

liAsJ.DMajti:

HdHlTPIl

HUM ITO*

WOHUOY.

TP* U

yoos/io/n

WOM IT OR

Details

Control unit type


Serial No.
NC model
NC software version
Screen software version
Currently selected language version
Ladder (COS1 side) version
Ladder (COS2 side)yersion
Currently selected PLC language version
Servo unit software version
Spindle unit software version
J2CT unit software version

u. 00:34

Appendix

3-1-3

HARDWARE MONITOR Screen


The hardware mounted on the control unit and board is displayed.

MIW; antrm - gtw mmjrm- twiwj wn*

IW 1
n
*

154
1 **1

<l.03)

*rx ion rt

VLC |

W*

tfUlBi K

? tra 1S4

( ** |

x*n3|

X
7

} etn

11C-

IRIO ?i

3 kxlA3

i*i >|

lint ii

(DID ij

IBH> ti

)iw

tf

B|

Bifrtd

[ETHER] is displayed
031-Bit4 is ON.

Display item

when

Details

CNC

HN163 The CNC card name and sub-version are displayed.


HN123 The C NC card name and sub-version are displayed.
The PLC card name and sub-version are displayed.
HN482 The SRAM/FROM card name and sub-version are displayed.
HN531 The axis extension card name and sub-version are displayed.
HN251 The front IC card/USB l/F card name and sub-version are

PLC
MEM
EXT
IC USB

ETHER
RIO

RIO 1

displayed. _
Only the item is displayed when there is an Ethernet option.
RIO 4
RIO 5
RIO 2
RIO 3
RIO 6
RIO 7
RIO 8

1
2

HN203

3
4

5
6

HN203

The IC card name used each part system or channel is


displayed.

139

Appendix

3-1 -4

SERVO MONITOR Screen


The servo monitor is configured of the following five screens. The status of the servo is
displayed on each screen.

SERVO MONITOR screen (Servo monitor) 1/2


SERVO MONITOR screen (Servo monitor) 2/2

ABSOLUTE MONITOR screen (Absolute value monitor)

SERVO DIAGNOSIS screen (Servo diagnosis)

SERVO STATUS screen (Servo status)

The screens can be changed in the following order with the page feed keys.

SERVO MONITOR screen 1/2

I NEXT key

T BACK key
SERVO MONITOR screen 2/2

l NEXT key

BACK key

ABSOLUTE MONITOR screen

i NEXT key

BACK key

SERVO DIAGNOSIS screen

I NEXT key

BACK key

SERVO STATUS screen


Note:

140

The SPINDLE STATUS screen is displayed only while releasing the key lock.

Appendix

(1) SERVO MONITOR (Servo monitor)


The servo status is displayed on this screen.
fir

frriow

WBi* wasurtii wtn*! n Soxsv ywtnsrm i vcmi mtMj B

SKJIVO wowrrcuu/?)

li]

<>

(1J

SPUKD
FTID XJVT (/ in)

(>UOOP

iX)

M/m)

CM*

|A|

1C)

*c

9
0

<

fnrjiRTHT

O)

*>

0
0

MAX CUM
WAX niR2

D
0
0

<AI

0
0
o
0
0

9
9

0
0

0
9
D

-0

0
0

*0

MAX Olh3
0VTR LOW
OYilH bC

OPT.

WAX

i *)

rover.

<*>

nst.pc*ct: (*>

JWRTtA WLTIO {V)


ATUT
ATJ.I <WU*

<BJ>)

(dB)

AMP PIVP

M-lUKW

09

00 00 09

09

00

0o

00 00 00 DO

00 .00 <H> 00

00 00 00 00

90

.00 00 00 00

o
e

1/ *0

Display item

No.
1

GAIN

>1

Details
(1/sec)

[1/SEC]

Gain

The status of the position loop gain is displayed. Position


loop gain refers to the following:

DROOP

(i)

Droop

[Command unit]

SPEED

(1 /min)

Speed

[1/min]

Feedrate (mm/sec,)
Tracking delay error (mm))
The error of the actual machine position to the
commanded position is called droop.
This is the actual motor speed.

FEED RATE

(mm/s)

Feed rate

[mm/s]

The feed rate of machine end is displayed. (Only Vx)

CURRENT

(%)

Load current

[%]

MAX CUR1

(%)

Max. current 1

(%]

MAX CUR2

(%)

Max. current 2

[%]

MAX CUR3

(%)

Max. current 3

[%]

OVER LOAD

(%! Overload

10

OVER REG

(%)

Regenerative load

[%]

11

DST FORCE

(%)

Estimated
disturbance torque

[%}

1%1

__

The motor current is displayed with a continuous current


conversion during stalling.
The current FB percentage in respect to the current limit
is displayed.
The peak value is constantly sampled, and updated
every second.
The currenl FB percentage in respect to the current limit
is displayed.
The max. value of the current FB peak sampled after the
power is turned ON is displayed.
The FB value of the motor current in terms of continuous
current during stalling is displayed.
An absolute value of the current FB peak value sampled
in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.
This data is used for monitoring the motor overload.
This dala is used for monitoring the resistance load state
when the power supply for resistor regeneration is
connected.
The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall rated
torque when the disturbance observer is valid is

displayed.

12

MAX DST FORCE

<%)

MAX estimated
disturbance torque

[%]

13

INERTIA RATIO

(%)

Load inertia ratio

[%]

14

AFLT FREQ

(Hz)

AFLT frequency

[Hz]

15
16

AFLT GAIN
AMP DISP

(dB)

AFLT gain
Amplifier display

IdB]

17

ALARM

The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall rated


torque when the collision detection function is adjusted is
displayed.
An absolute value of the estimated disturbance torque
peak value sampled in most recent 2 seconds is
displayed.

Alarm

The estimated load inertia ratio when the collision


detection function is adjusted is displayed.
The present operation frequency of the adaptive filter is
displayed.
The present filter depth of the adaptive filter is displayed.
The driver's 7-segment LED display is shown.
Alarms and warnings other than the amplifier display are
displayed.

__

___
_

___
__
_

141

Appendix

SERVO MONITOR (Servo monitor) 2/2

(2)

The servo status is displayed on this screen.

W*s;ta }

uioctu >us {' Bnioi sxrvt BiaKTOa

yamm >! taa&ta*

*n*rTa|

fERYO H0*JTGR<2/J?)

irTnr cwr
CRIP MATT

<**)

I.

*.

twin

<**)

o.
c,

*XC JOK

*P)

()

ro

<)

n>A]a

WfltJK RO?

l)
|mj

<5.
o.
o<
o,
31.*-

fWMKL IT

!>

0,

pod

acv*

*.]

(1)

U>

CWD2

IA)

P.

0.

J?

21*.
0,

J:

0.

0.

0.

0.

0,.

.
0.
0.

l<-'1

0.

'*10*

s>.

0.

0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
o.
0.
6.
>.
.0,
cw>ooo<<>ooo<>olJ OOWWOOOOOWWll OCWTOOOOOPGOOOll 000000090000001 J. <XKXOOOOWOOI
OOOO11OS>OOO<K><X> ooooUoooooooooo OoeolJOOOOOOOCOO OOOOlJuOOOOOOOQO oo&ollbcoooooooo
cxX>o Jr->o<x>c> 1 r*x> oooolooooocaJtJofi o<XH>Jo<>ooo<JolOpo oot>oiooooooo3 ooo oi!o*><*HW>3<>c>o

PS tr.BO*

ftn*. CW?
CHOI

1=1

|vj

CWD>*

POOOW9PIMW9IV cJCBJOOOOOOOOPOaOCa <JOOOOO*>0<HX>OCX>0 PC

oaii
al

OOOOOOOOOtXXSOolO

OOOOOOOOOOOCKXXXX OOOOOOOXVXXKKXtO
ooooooooooootjolo OUOOOOpOAO&OO&lx)

POOOQOOOPPPPPPOO

001X)pQ<X0000(X> OOOOOOQOOOOpQpOti

PT*2
trt S3
=73*

CXXXXHKXXXXXKXIO OOCQOOWOOOOOOOO OOOOOCKKKXIOPPOOO

OOOPOpboOOPOOCWJ

D00000cx>0000oc>00 OOOOPoOOOOOPOOOO OOOOOOOOOoCOOOOO

oooooooooooouooa oooooooooooooooo

oe

ST5S
TfS*

C<S3<>OOCOOOCC><>CK)0

ico owioooowwwo

OOOOOOOOOOOCOOOP OCKJOpOPOOOOPPOOP
rximMVKXVXxjobo1a (Xoooooooooocwlo
#**>KjOWOWOW
(WWOOWOOOOCWOO

i)oo<jcx>ck><w3ot3o iwwcoooooooopofi ppp*H?oc>PP=<><*a*{><> o**>o<H3>c<>oooo<x OO<>OO<X>O<)0CK>O<><J


OOOCPOMWXWOOO OOOCWO<>OPOO<><K>9> o,*>4>CH?W>pOO(>*;wo u-WOWWWIHW POOOCkOPOOCOOPOOO
DV>>C<><>X>OC>0<>00 OOOOOOOOOOOOIXKXJ OOOCOOOOUOOOOOrtO OOOOOOiVJOOtKWOOO oooooooooooooooo

*/>* II

No.
1

CYC CNT

Details
(P)

Cycle counter

[pulse]

GRID SPACE

(mm)

Grid spacing

[mm]

GRID

(mm)

Grid distance

[mm]

MAC POS

(mm)

Machine position

[mm]

5
6

MOTOR POS
SCA FB

(mm)
(mm)

Motor end FB

[mm]
[mm]

REMAIN

(mm)

WORK POS

(mm)

Machine end FB
Remain
command
Current position

J2L

Manual interrupt

The current position is displayed.

|mm]

The amount of manual interrupt is displayed.

10

FB ERROR

(i)

FB error

[Command unit]

11

DFB COMP

(0

DFB error

[Command unit]

12
13
14
15
16
17
10

CMP1
CMP2
CMP3
CMP4
CMP5
STS1
STS2
STS3
STS4
STS5

20
21

[mm]

(mm)

Control input 1
Control input 2
Control input 3
Control input 4
Control inp ut 5
Control output 1
Control output 2
Control output 3
Control output 4
Control output 5

_
_

The remain command value is displayed.

MANUAL IT

amount

The position per rotation of the encoder delector is


displayed.
The grid point's value is used as the 0 position and the
position per rotation is displayed in the range of 0 to RNG
(movement unit) multiplied by 1000.
The grid spacing for reference point return is displayed.
The unit is [deg] when using a rotary axis.
The distance from the dog off to grid point when dog-type
reference point return has been carried out is displayed.
The grid mask distance is not included.
This is the position on the NCs basic machine coordinate
system.
The feedback position of the speed detector is displayed.
l The feedback position of the position detector is displayed.

[mm]

19

142

Display item

the error

of between the motor end FB and machine end


FB is displayed.
The compensation pulse amount for dual feedback control
is displayed.

Appendix

(3)

ABSOLUTE MONITOR Screen (Absolute value monitor)

The servos absolute position is displayed on this screen.

i
vtasini i tnatmn n* ! DTTTW

aw> wann* Isnjnt* t*rrsi [ Konax

w*m|

PXacOLtrtt MPMITPU
A65

voa

KM:

W)B

row
no

W1

Vt. J

3z\

[A1

(**>

o.

#.

o.

0.

0.
ft.

ft.

0.

<)

ft,

0.

ft.

sta

t*t>r

M>8

ICJ

t.
o.

ft,

<p>

ft

to

1)

ft

ft

CP)

fin
Fn
Ko
ABSft

(P>
<p)

0
ft

ft
0
ft

ft
ft

<P>
<P>

ft

ft
p
0
0

ft

EO

si
0

ABSn

<P>

M5*Q

<*>

0
0

D
ft
p

ft

<p>

ft
ft

ft
O

ft

ft

ft

ft

V 7*

No.

Display item

Details

ABS SYS

POP POS
PON POS

2
3

*5 \

Detection system

(mm)

The state of the absolute position detection system on the


servo side is displayed.
ES : Semi-closed encoder
EC : Ball screw end encoder
LS : Linear scale
MP : MP scale

Power OFF position


Power ON position

[mm]
[mm]

Current position

[mm]

(mm)

ESS : Semi-closed high-speed serial encoder


ECS : Ball screw end high-speed serial encoder
INC : Incremental
The absolute position at NC power OFF is displayed.
The absolute position at NC power ON is displayed.
This is created from the absolute position when the NC
power is turned ON.
The coordinate value at the NC basic machine coordinate

__

MAC POS

RO

6
8

PO
EO
Rn

Cumulative number of
rotation

The cumulative number of the motor rotation is displayed.

Pn

Phase

ABS0

Basic point

ABSn

Current position

The position in one rotation is displayed.


Each rotation is divided by 4096, The range is 0 to 4095.
The absolute position basic point is displayed.
This is the FB position memorized during basic point
setting.
The current absolute position is displayed.

MPOS

Scale offset

The initial offset distance for the MP scale is displayed.

10

11
12

(mm)

system is displayed.

143

Appendix

(4)

SERVO DIAGNOSIS Screen (Servo diagnosis)


The servo mounting state and alarm history are displayed on this screen.
r vri

rrm-

ratior. Hiooiii t*m }

arum

OTTO

anw|irn* mntn!SJ*SB HSIIW }

IYJ

rxi

tin IT r*

IS!

[A1

1C)

OMIT Ho.

S/W

VTIVSICHI

comrnoi.
KMCrTYV*

r.wc. oinjtAj, m>.

eCiWLE TYTU
SCA1X 8ZK1KL
MOTOR
WOtOC 7 D
AJ*f JJf3* I

Ho;

w)

100)

100}

100)

IPO I

100)
100)
100)

0
0
0

HAurrE nisi

HAwrrins

JO-OJ

100)

100]

o
n
o

100)
10QJ
fOP)

o
0

)O0)

oo oo oo
oa oo oo oo

p.

|O01
00 00 00

Ov

00

00

oo

00
Co 00

00

!0OI

JOOI

100)

1001

1001
(0C)

100)
JO0)

0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

00 CO 0D 00
00 00 00 00

oo

0
0

|00)

|OOJ
IOC)

1001

rooj

100]
IO0)

|00|

I00J

)0OJ

0
0
0

100]

IPOJ

OO OO CO 00

00 00 00 OO

oo

100)
fOO)

rp)

9
9

I0)

00 00 OO
00 00 00 <70
(70

00

13/ 7

No.
1

2
3
4

Amplifier type
Amplifier serial No.

Software version
Control method

ENC TYPE
ENC SERIAL No.

MC DT

SCALE SERIAL No.

10
11
12

MOTOR
WORK TIME
ALM HIST 1 to 8
MAINTE HIST

Alarm history
Maintenance record

13

MAINTE STS

Maintenance status

144

Display item
UNIT TYPE
UNIT No.
S/W VERSION.
CONTROL

__

Motor end detector


Motor end detector
serial No.
Machine end
detector
Machine end
detector serial No.
Motor
Work time

Details
This is the servo amplifier type.
This is the servo amplifier serial No.
This is the servo amplifier software version.

: Semi-closed loop
SEM1
CLOSED : Closed loop
: Dual feedback
DUAL
This is the motor end detector name
This is the motor end detector serial No.
This is the machine end detector type.
Only displayed when CLOSED or DUAL of control method.
This is the machine end detector serial No.
Only displayed when CLOSED of control method.
This is the motor type.
T he cumulative ready-ON time is displayed.
The Nos. of the past servo alarms are displayed.
The amplifiers maintenance history or NVRAM (special memory in
servo) status is displayed.

Appendix

(5) SERVO STATUS (Servo status)

The servo statuses are displayed on this screen.

He WnSw

|OJHQCSIS WBUW ; emm &>no HWJUW


SERVO STATUS

1X1

wm* j IWRWWK

enures J

too, OOJ

|0o,ooj

[00,CO|

2
3

[00,00)

0
0

[00,001

[00,001
[OO, 00|

[00,001
[00,001

[00,00)
[00,001

J00,00)
|00,00)

100,00)

[00,00)

100,00)

[00,00)
100,00)

100,00)

[00,00)

[00,00)

100,00}
J0o, oq)

0
0
0

100, 0}

JOO,O0)

10

[00,00)
too, 00)

100,00)

11
IP.

[00,00|
[00,00)

0
0

100,00)
[00, 00)

0
0
0

[00,001
[00,001

7
0
3

ICJ

IA1

ALARM COO XT 1

100,001
coo, 00)
100,00)

100,00}

100,00}

0
0

100,00)

0
0

100,00)

100,00)
|00 j 00)
100,00)

o
c

100,00)

J00,00)
100,00}

100,00)

CoO,Oo)

100,00)

[00,00|

[00,003

0
0
0

100,00)
)00, 00}

0
0
0
0

[00,00)
100,00)

0
0
0

IDO ,00 J

100, OOJ

100,00)
100, 00 J

0000
0

0 l
y

OOOO

0000

0000

oopo

oopo

0000

ODDO

17/ 20

No.
1

Display item

ALARM COUNT
DA output L

l
I

Details
Alarm No.

Count
2

si

0000

DA ADDRESS 1

DA OUTPUT 1
A ADPMS99 2
DA OUTPUT 2

0000

DA ADDRESS
DA OUTPUT
DA ADDRESS
DA OUTPUT

The servo alarm No.


The number of times of servo alarm condition implemented after servo
amplifier power ON.
Servo parameter svQ61 setting value (address)
Servo parameter svQ61 setting address data
Servo parameter sv063 setting value (address)
Servo parameter sv063 setting address data

145

Appendix

3-1-5

SPINDLE MONITOR Screen


The spindle monitor is configured of the following five screens. The status of the spindle is
displayed on each screen.

SPINDLE MONITOR screen (Spindle monitor) 1/2

SPINDLE MONITOR screen (Spindle monitor) 2/2

SPINDLE DIAGNOSIS screen (Spindle diagnosis)

PS DIAGNOSIS screen (Power supply diagnosis)

SPINDLE STATUS screen (Spindle status)


The screens can be changed in the following order with the page feed keys.

SPINDLE MONITOR screen 1/2

I NEXT key T BACK key


SPINDLE MONITOR screen 2/2
I NEXT key t BACK key
SPINDLE DIAGNOSIS screen

1 NEXT key t BACK key


PS DIAGNOSIS screen

I NEXT key t BACK key


SPINDLE STATUS screen
Note:

146

The SPINDLE STATUS screen is displayed only while releasing the key lock.

Appendix

(1)

SPINDLE MONITOR (Spindle monitor)

The spindle status is displayed on this screen.


fm

ViV

vaana ; IUOQD i

tn; inis ; IOW KMJT SJ

SPIXDU2 MOtUTOK . U/2>.


CAIB
&nv>O0
fipcna

(.1/300)
U)
(ill- 1)

<0
c*>

CO

0
0
9

0
&
0
0

0
0

0
0
0

t>

0
0

tft>
00

MAX CUR1

10

11

MAX CUR2

MAX CUR3

00

00

00
00 00 t>-0 00

00
00 00 00 00

co no oo

00 OR 00 00

00 00

[1/msec]

(i)

Droop

[Command
unit]

(1/min)
(mm/min)
(%)

Speed

Feed rate
Load

[1/min]
[mm/s]
[%]

MAX current 1

[%]

MAX current 2

[%]

MAX current 3

l%]

Overload

(%]

Regenerative
load

[%]

Estimated
disturbance
torque

[%]

MAX
estimated
disturbance
torque

[%]

(%)

(%)

(%)

OVER LOAD

{%)

OVER REG

{%)

DST. FORCE

(%)

MAX DST FORCE

(%)

INER1IA RATIO

14

AFLT FREQ

(Hz)

15

AFLT GAIN

(db)

16

TEMPERATURE

(X)

(%)

Load
ratio
AFLT

inertia

frequency

AMP DISP

ALARM

0
9

Gain

(1/msec)

13

17
18

00

__

12

Display item

LOAD

6
o

D1SP

o
0

r*%e>EtuiTtni

SPEED
FEED RATE

0
0

DROOP

fSD 1*01*5 J

0
tv
0

IBPinotro

*)

GAIN

iatt)

rPLQ.

<*>
<*>

ATLT CL 3*

ATX.T

0
0

MM Dttr.x>ci; ( *>
OffiXTM RATIO (V)

rtr.D

nrrr roues

&

LOUD
MM nm i
MIU ctmi
MM CUBS
(rtm tixxt>
OVXR REK

No.
1

151MWDU!?)

IHKIKDIJCI |
t>
0

(%J

[Hz]

AFLT gain

[dB]

Spindle motor

[C]

temperature
Amplifier display
Alarm

Oo 00

Details
The spindle position loop gain (1/s) is displayed. The
value is not set when in control modes other than
position loop control.
The feedback tracking delay to Ihe commanded
position is displayed.
This is valid only during position loop control as with
item 1.
This is the actual motor speed.
The feed rate of machine end is displayed. (Only Vx)
The motor load is displayed with a continuous current
conversion during stalling.
The current FB percentage in respect to the current
limit is displayed.
The peak value is constantly sampled, and updated
every second.
The current FB percentage in respect to the current
limit is displayed.
The max. value of the current FB peak sampled after
the power is turned ON is displayed.
The FB value of the motor current in terms of
continuous current during stalling is displayed.
An absolute value of the current FB peak value
sampled in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.
This data is used for monitoring the motor overload.
This data is used for monitoring the resistance load
slate when the power supply for resistor regeneration
is connected.
The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall
rated lorque when the disturbance observer is valid is
displayed.
The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall
rated torque when the collision detection function is
adjusted is displayed. An absolute value of the
estimated disturbance torque peak value sampled in
most recent 2 seconds is displayed.
The estimated load inertia ratio when the collision
detection function is adjusted is displayed.
The present operation frequency of the adaptive filter is
displayed.
The present filter depth of the adaptive filter is

__

____
___
_
_

displayed.

The spindle motor temperatureis displayed.


The driver's 7 -segment LED display is shown
This item is displayed when alarms and warnings other
than the amplifier display is occurring simultaneously.

147

Appendix

(2)

SPINDLE MONITOR (Spindle monitor)

The spindle status is displayed.

r*m

Wfrij~

St$

IKKU*; >IK*TVIS

mini] arm*- VKD

warm* PT*U ***!*

jjanwrax Banna;

SfJHtU.1 MOM ITOH <2/7)


jspiKDtca j

eve cur

<>

CRIO SPACE
GRID
KXC VOJf
MOTOR P03

SCA TV
KEMAXH
WORK 1*08.
MANUAL IT
ns riwou
W.'C COMJ*

OO.

In)

0.

(M)

<*-)

0.

o.

fwO

p.

<wo

o.

e.

0.

0.

0.

0.
0.

0.

0.

0.
0-

0,

o.
o

0.
0.

0.

0.

o.

0,
0.

0.
0.
.

9.

0.
0.

o.

<4)

0O0OOO0WX3OO000O ooi>w>oooooooooo
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
oooloooooooooooT *

Stal

O-

0.

oooooooooooooooo
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO


OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
0. OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOl OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

STS5
STBS

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

Display item

CYC CNT

GRID SPACE

GRID

OOOCOOOOOOOOOOOQ

STS2
ST S3
ST 5 4

Cycle counter

[Pulse]

(mm)

Grid space

[mm]

(mm)

Grid

[mm]

(P)

MAC POS

(mm)

Machine position

[mm]

5
6

MOTOR POS

(mm)

.mm]

WORK POS

Motor end FB
Remain command
Current posirion

REMAIN

121

Manual interrupl
amount
Machine end FB

MANUAL IT

SCAFB

10

FB ERROR

(i)

FB error

11

DFB COMP

(i)

DFB error

12

CMP1
CMP2
CMP3
CMP4
CMP5
STS1
STS2
STS3
STS4
STS5

21

0.

|w)

CHM

20

0.
0.
o,

0.

9.

o$

19

12SPJ#D.E5J

0.

CHD4

15
16
17
18

o
9.
9.

0.

CMD3

No.

ispixomi

0,

o.

:>ct)i

13
14

(*)

DJD2

148

(M>

tKt>XMDlX3)

l:p*MDur2j

(mm)

Control input 1
Control input 2
Control input 3
Control input 4
Control input 5
Control output 1
Control output 2
Control output 3
Control output 4
Control output 5

cocoooooooooocoo

Details
This displays the position within one rotation of the encoder
detector. The position is displayed within one rotation in the
range of "0" to "RNG (movement units) * 1000" using the
grid point value as "0"
The grid space for the reference position return is

_
_

displayed.
When rotary axis, the unit is [degj.
This displays the distance from the dog-off point to the grid
point when the dog-type reference position return is
displayed. The grid mask amount is not included
The NC basic machine coordinate system position is
displayed.
The feedback value of the speed detector is displayed.

__

[mm]

[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[Command
unit]
[Command
unit]

_
_

The feedback value of the position detector is displayed.


The error of between the motor end FB and machine end
FB is displayed.
The compensation pulse amount for dual feedback control
is displayed.

Appendix

(3) SPINDLE DIAGNOSIS Screen (Spindle diagnosis)


The spindle mounting state and alarm history are displayed on this screen.
i4e xwbM t-kfe

VZKCTOB } (MK MGWrnat 0 mad RW3 *CHai

tfvxwMje

I
!

WT ! KWCO* WJflTOB t
:

MACHOS*
ISP lJ*P*-*4)

[SpjMZ7|>]
imrr TYEE
UK IT Bo.

8/W YFRSJO*
C6BTK03U
KKC.TYPE
EBC.6ER3WL Mo.
|81TB ENC. IYTE
SUB EMC.8Ea.Mo.
tOTOft
*010t TXX*
ALM HIST 1

r*

3
4

5
6

7
0

MAXHTF BJST

WAXBJfc ft a

I
0

100]

[001

[00]
100]
100)
|00)

100]
100)
100)
100)

[00]

0
0

[00]
too)
ioo)
00 00 00
00 00 00

0
0
9
0

1001

oo

[00]

oo

00 00 OO

00

00

oo

06

00 00
00

100)

0
0

IOO)

tool

0
0
0
0
0
0
00 00

[001
[00J
[001
[00)
[00J
[001
[001
[oOl

0
0

100)

0
0
0

00 00 OO 00
00 00 oo CO
CO

[00 J
[00)
too)
tooj

00 00
00

oo oo

00

[00]

100]
100)
too)
100)

[00]
100]
[00]

Si
0

M
0 S

00 CO 00 DOrt
00 00 00

00

o|

oo .

oo I

No.

Display item

Details
Amplifier type

This is the spindle amplifier type.

UNIT TYPE
UNIT No.
S/W VERSION.

Amplifier serial No.


Software version

CONTROL

Control method
Motor end detector
Motor end detector serial
No.

This is the serial No. of the spindle amplifier.


This is the version of the spindle side software.
SEM1
: Semi-closed loop
CLOSED : Closed loop
: Dual feedback
DUAL
This is the motor end detector name.

ENC. TYPE

ENC SERIAL No.

SUB ENC TYPE

Machine end detector

SUB ENC SER No.

MOTOR
WORK TIME
ALM HIST1 to 8
MAINTE HIST
MAINTE STS

Machine end
detector
serial No.
Spindle motor
Work time
Alarm history
Maintenance record
Status

10
11

12
13

This is the motor end detector serial No.


This is the machine end detector type.
Only displayed when CLOSED or DUAL of control method.
This is the machine end detector serial No.
Only displayed when CLOSED of control method.
This is the spindle motor type.

The cumulative ready-ON time is displayed.


The Nos. of the past spindle alarms are displayed.
The maintenance history is displayed.
The NVRAM (special memory in servo) status is displayed.

149

Appendix

(4)

PS DIAGNOSIS Screen (Power supply diagnosis)


The power supply mounting state and alarm history are displayed on this screen.

He "Mnicrm
vrasiat j Dra*sis HOTT j onwi

[xwxwx w*orn|

j sjrjjvo mrrtw

*> &X*CHOI;S

<1S>

<17>

-uav

<19?

<?o>

1131X1 TYPE

uxrr no.

s/w

YEBaiox
COM AxX$

<V>

MAX TOLT X
HIM VOLT Z

<v)

WAX VOLT 2

(X)

HIM VOLT 1

100)
[001

0
0

tooj

1001

[001

1001

oo

00 <J0
0

o
fool
00 00 OQ 0

urn

00

HAXXrrg *1rs

150

1001

No.

o
9

WOttX 1JH8
AIM JBiKX 1

:HAn*TE

!:

Display item

UNIT TYPE

Amplifier type

Details
This is the power supply unit type.

UNIT No.

SA/V VERSION

Amplifier serial No.


Software version

This is the serial No. of the power supply unit.


This is the version of the power supply side software.

CON AXIS

Connected drive

MIN VOLT 1

MIN voltage 1

The driver connected power supply unit is displayed.


This displays the minimum PN bus voltage after the NC power ON.

MAX VOLT1

MAX voltage 1

MIN VOLT2

MIN voltage 2

MAX VOLT2

MAX voltage 2

WORK TIME

Work time

10

ALM HIST1 to 8

Alarm history

11

MAINTE HIST

Maintenance

12

MAINTE STS

Maintenance

history _

status

J absolute value)

___
_

This displays the maximum PN bus voltage after the NC power ON.

(absolute value)
The minimum PN bus voltage in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.
(absolute value)
The maximum PN bus voltage in most recent 2 seconds is
displayed, (absolute value)
The cumulative ready-ON time is displayed.
The history of the servo alarm No. and time generated in the past
are displayed.

__

The maintenance history is displayed.


The NVRAM (special memory in servo) status is displayed.

Appendix

(5)

SPINDLE STATUS (Spindle status)


The spindle status is displayed.
r*

tmfc

OT3U*fMJ6*nis monJttrrw| tawti Hn*

ww

|HWM

K*JTO )

SPIUDUE STATUS

r->

KLH&4 COBHT

100,00)

i
3

|C6, 00J

100,00 J

100.001

too, DO)

100,00)

'1

too, 00}

JOO.OOJ

[00,00}
[60,00}
(00,00)
100,00]

1.00,00).
(60,001
{00.001
1 OD , 0 1

too, 00)
160.001

0
0

100,00)

100,00)

100,001

too,*)

0
0

100,60)

loo, O)

0
0

100,60)

loo,oii
100,001
[00,00)

JOO.OOJ

0
6

{06.06)
too, o)
100,001
[00, 0|
[00,00)

100.001

100.MJ

106,00]

a
o

100, OOJ
loo, 00)
100,00}

J06.06)
100,06)

100,001

|00,00)

[00.001

(60,00)

<00,00)

too, OO)

(06, OP)

loo, 00)

|Oo,0D)

0
0

100.00)

12

ICP.OOl

0000
0

DA AOGSKSip *
DA Otm>DT ?.

0006
o

6000

DA output L

106,80)

0
0

[SP*XD1JIS)
0
0

100,001
[60,00)

100,00)

OK WMWEB8 1
DA DOT6 UT X

Display item
ALARM COUNT

ISFIMOU]

Alarm No.

Count
2

fsiMjHnii:?)

}0

No.

JlH>DtDT4:lJ

DA ADDRESS
DA OUTPUT
DA ADDRESS
DA OUTPUT

0006

[00,60)

<i

(o,t>0)

joo.oo)

l.
0

000.0

006

0000

0
<060

0600

oooo

Details
The servo alarm No.
The number of times of servo alarm condition implemented after
servo amplifier power ON.
setting value (address)
Spindle parameter
setting address data
Spindle parameter
setting value (address)
Spindle parameter
setting address data
Spindle parameter

151

152

153

154

y >.

r-*

|r? PPSPIAVW

'A:

Fit vV3or* HfP

[TKRCe
[El A MONITOR
:
[MACH III BIG
MONITORING
A|DRXLL MONITOR
[SPINDLE %0A> GRAPH XC
;\ilKAVIGATIOH T RESULT .
[AUTO MEASURE
.

]
]
]
)
]
]

*:

{TOOL

PROGRAM

[PROGRAM FIXE
}
[TOOL PATH CHECK
J
[SHAPE CHECK
* 1
[PROCESS CONTROL
J
[PROGRAM XAYOUT
[H A V IG AT ION
PREDICT ION J

DATA
[TOOL OFFSET
[TOOL FILE
[TOOL LAYOUT

]
:

WORK: OFFSET

DATA I/O
[DATA I/O PARAMETER

USER PARAMETER

I ADDITIONAL WPC
[MACRO VARIABLE
[MKASXIPF
[STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH

[MACHINE PARAMETER
[PLC PARAMETER

1
3
3

CUTTING CONDITION
[ CUTTING OoNDXXIOH LEARN

:5

f.

ru\;~oH

...
i

n>

i>IAGHOSIS (USER)
3

[DIAOWOSIS (MAKER)

[MAINTENANCE CHECK
[RUNNING CONTROL
(GRAPHIC MAINTENANCE

3
)

I)

15 Gain1

NAM

Omm/min

<CUR SORXINP UI> ?

] i

T~

MAP
j

Operation Procedure : Display selector key

> DISPLAY MAP

155

YVYWkYVWV.WW

XX

0.

P.

Cl

0,

0
O-

xz

NEXT CtttAXHKD XOW

0.

Z2

0-

C2

0.
0.

G
H

0,

0,

f$

I
Il

zi

0.

0.
0.
0.
0

C2

->->
)

0)
0)

DS (
II# {

6 i>

G50.2 G113

0 MIN-1
0 M/MXN
0 MIN'1

0
0.

Y
Z

0.
0.

SPDII

(0)

M/MIN

0 MIN1

SPDI2

K/v
i

l|
5PDL Zj
XI-AX|
Y-AX |

T.

MM/MIN

13
Cl

0.
0.
0.
0.

C2

0,

j LOW

0.
0

MM/MIH

Cl -AX|
X2-AX
Z2-AX

MM/REV

C2-AX

*
"

Zl-Rxj
B-RX

/ln
/a in

/in

W-AX

C_J:*

5o%

1 s i fl>

W\A

.TPs -

o;.

Oiran/nin

:t
i

o I

o
0

B
:

o
0

mmmmm

I:

!
V?0KK

H . SPDL

M. SPDL

LOCK

LIGNT

JOG

REV

/.V.W/W.VA

Operation Procedure : Display selector key

156

200

MACHINE
L
'.VAVA'WM'.

%
\

M. SPDL

M/MIM

m
i

X
:!?

T. SPDL

Crain -

100

FEED

<

I.

i
\

G 40
G 64

:\
!

) !;

(CIR-DR

LOW TNo.

T -OFFSET

98 G 21
G53.5
0X23 G
G13.1
G

<0)

MflGAZNPKNo.
)

23

C 69.50 97

(0)

WRIT :

0.

0.

G
G

M. SPDIi

i
0

Tito.

0)

0.

! T

0.

>

0.

TNO.
(

0.

C2

0(

0 F
G 1 G 17
G 80
G
G 68 G 67
G123 1G111

0.
0.

in

O.
0.

<W0DAt>

z
c

I
I

TRS-CNK

COUNTER

0.

0,

XX

ci
X.2
Z2

0.
0.
0-

OFFSET

0,

Ei

UNO.

REMAIN

MACHINE
0.
xi

ci
X2

t
!!

Zl

M
T

*
>

WHO-

CX
X2
Z2
C2

0,

0.

NEXT COMMAND

0.
0.
0.
0.

XX

urn*

Ccu./

&rfssft Vv>V >'.< H'->&


BUFFER
POSITION

I
5

1I

\YY*Y.\\YYVA\

(Y'VAYSYI'IY

&%>

>

A\YA'AY\\\W.Vi\NNW.Wk\\\V\\%

.WVYWAY

1I

> POSITION

IPS

.YMWNWAVn:

dfc

aaas

A~faitViWrry

( VERSIGMj DiaCSDSIS JSKITt I OPriflH \ SERVO

pxm
?

<.

I
i

ITEM
SRV--X
9RV-V

VERSION

MAIM -A

MAXH-S

1001WOOO-A*WQ
lQQIMOOl-AO

iooim>n~Axwo
XG-ENG
XADDER-F 1001W568-A0016

SRV-Z
SRVH

LADDER- B
LCP

SRV-A
SRV-6
SRV-7
SRV-8
SRV-3
SRV-XO
SRV-11
SRV-12
sRv-13 ; .
S.RV-X9
SRV-15
SRV~16
SPH-1
SRN-2
SRH-3
SP1I-4

t-

*
f

1
.

I 5PDE<LE

SERIAL

yyyyyyyyyyyyy

ITEM

W3HITflR

iM7W HJ3*mS; IfDMTTfiR

>

yyyyyyyyyyyyyy

wox>eL ymryyy>ryyyyyy
MACH THE

MOTOR

VERSION

;:

<
<(
(
(
(
(
(

<

<

(
(

<
vvM( /:
> ::
:;>; < V ''
V <
) (
> <
> <
> <
> (<
>
) (
) <
> <
) <
> (
) <
> <
>) <
)

>
>

(
(

<
<
<
(

>

>
>

(
(
(

I
:

ITEM
J2CT-X

>
)
)
)
)

>

>

)
)

>

Q%

OlAOHOS

c
VCRSlOM

ISOmln'1
OX AO NOS

J2CT-2
J2CT-3
I2CT-4

J2CT-5
J2CT-6

J2CT-7
J2CT-8
J2CT-9

J2CT-10
J2CT-11
J2CT-12
J2CT-13
J2CT-14

>
>)
>
)
>
>

*
i

i
IPS 0

KrC

VERSION

"

SPH-5
3PM- 6
SPH-7
SPH~8

WvA

2005/10/31

11:16:03

Own/sln

OPTION

SERVO

MOHXXOR

MONITOR

SRIMDIE
MONITOR

HARDWARE

LADDER

MONITOR

MONITOR

>

fty.WAV/AWV

Operation procedure Display selector key --> DIAGNOS


.

VERSION -> VERSION

i
iI

>

157

fi* Wn,tx Htb

1
2
3
4
5
6

t i- T
8
9

10
11
12

13

14
16
11
18

1
-

29 GANTRY ROBOT CONTROL


30 FLASH TOOL

HIGH SMOOTHING CONTROL

31

ROTATION
GEOMETRIC
SCALING
EXT-DATA I/O
MA2ATROL 3D
POLYGON MACHINING
HOB MACHINING
5 -PLANE
HIOH SPEED
SHAPE COMP.
THREAD !
SOB C-AXTK CONTROL
INVERSE TIME
DYNAMIC COMP.

33 COO SLOPE CONST.

34 SCALE FEED BACK


35 SOB SP 1/1000 DEG POST.
36 VARIABLE 600 SETS
31 SCALE F/B (A)

DLACHOS
:

I
1

'

38 CYLINDER
39 SYNC. MAIN SP. TAPPING
40 SIMULTANEOUS 5 AXIS
41
42
43
44

B AXIS CONTROL
IC CARD HUMMING

'

45 PROTCOL B

46 SHAPING
41 2ND AOX. FUNCTIONS
48 NURBS IMTERPORATTOH
49 TH.TED WORKING PLANE

R0T-

50
51
S2
53
54

LOWER TURRET MA7.ATROL

60 MILL TURNING MAZATROL


61 HIGH SPEED SYNC. TAPPING
62
63
64
65
66
61
68
69
70

:.

ETA ULRICA!, TAP CYCLE


EIA PATTERN CYCLE

SP/ROT. PARA. ADJUST


TABLE UNBALANCE DETECT
5-AXIS TOOL COMP.
AUTO PECKING

ETHERNET RUNNING
55 TOOL CENTER POIHT CONTROL
56 THREAD START POINT COMP.

-r*v

o*

59

32 ROT- AXIS SHAPE COMP.

70
21 POLAR COORDINATES INPUT
22 COMPARISON STOP
23 HV CHTR.
: 24 SYNC. CCHT .
25 EIA CONVERSION
26 SPLINE
21 G54.1
78 SYNC. MILL TAPPING

KAy

51 RE-THREAD

58 PROGRAM MEMORY EXPANSION

INCH AM COM VEST

SPIRAL
EIA 3D COMP.

1i

jOFIXIMij SEHITO KDHTTtffi I KPJJfiOi BEMITOR [ H3HDVJCE lStNITCK|

ETA

-,To

W3OTM I DljtfKOSIS JfflWITCR

iMlM <\

12
73
74
75
76
77
78
15*
80
81

VERSION

150mins

OIAGHOS
MONITOR

vW*
OPTION

\
1
:

l
t
::

82

83

Qd

0 : 20 05/10/31 ; IX: 13:*3

?'

lb

OPUB/BIU
SERVO
MONITOR

SPINDLE
MONITOR

HARDWARE
MONITOR

LADDER
MONITOR

Operation Procedure. : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->


VERSION -> OPTION

158

mm

:v r o'- 77"r OTIT,.;. To

,VV

E-TO

!?
'.-?'

>V!j{>fU

j"?*

VERSItM DUU2H0SIS HDNITtJR OJTTCH SOIVO WCMITttR

[sPQHKJB WfflttTJK j HSRDVSiJE

SERVO MONITOR (1/2)

1X1J

i
(1)
DROOP
(i_n-l)
SPEED
FEED RATE (wm/win)

0
0
0

0
0

0
0

(%)
<%)
(h)
<*)

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0

C-DKRENT
MAX ClfRl
:: MAX CUR2
MAX CUR3
OVER LOAD

<**>

DST . FORCE

<*)
MAX DEFORCE <*)
INERTIA RATIO ih)

0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0

0
0

<

0
0

0!J
0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

(Hz)

(<*B)

KFVt CAXH

ALARM

AFLT FREQ,

00

00

00

00

00

00 00 00 00

00 00 00 00

00 00 00 00

OO 00 00 00

00 00 00 00

AMP DISP

0
0
0
0

<*0

OVER REG

icx)

JB)

(Z1J

(J/soc)

CAIN

t:

MUnTtHt

!
I
J
i

rrnsrg

mmm

1
:

A?Y.
1

50%

DXAGNOS

LSLLiD

Omin'1

VERSION

DTAGNOS

MONITOR

:\WOPTION

Own/win
SERVO

SPINDLE

MONITOR

MONITOR

HARDWARE
MONITOR

TPS 0 j 2005/11/04 110:12:04

t
I

LADDER

MONITOR

t
>

WWAVWA1

.v/w/.'.y.w.v.

Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->


VERSION -> SERVO MONITOR

r
159

{ife

y'VjjjTs

KVsp

VERSItBT DlftQfOJwIS

tSBCCTCK OfTItBf SERVO BUKITHR j SPIMDLE WDnTt | MfiKEWMZE MMTTCR

SERVO MONITOR<l/2)

tzi)

(XI)

(1/SOC)

U)

0
0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

<*)

DSX.FCRC <*>
INERTIA RATIO <%)

0
0

0
0

0
0

CAIN
DROOP
SPEED

(min-l)

FEED RATE (JftM/jfcii) )

|CURRENT
MAX ami
MAX CUR2

MAX CUR3
OVER LOAD
OYER REG
DST- FORCE

<*>
<*>

<*)
<%)
<%)

<*>

\mx

IRFLT

FREQ.

RFLT CAIN

(Hz)
<<iN)

AMP DISP
ALARM

0
0
0
0

IBJ

CC1-J
0
0

0
0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

OO

00

00

00 00 00 00

00 00 00 00

00 00 00 00

0
0
0

00

00

oo oo oo oo

00 00 00 00

1/

16

-H

TPS 0: ! 200i/n/04 ,10:12:04

fW

50*5

DXAGN03

isW.
s
VERSION

Owin'1
OIAGNOS
MONITOR

VV\A
OPTION

0m/in
SERVO
MONITOR

SPINDLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS


VERSION
SPINDLE MONITOR

160

>

AWAV\YVVY

yiwiWM V,VA\

miitm

v 'it 11

\Y.\\>YASYiWiV/ V

WYNWAAWAVYi

mmmmMt

* it*

>

Wy*ivft

:K*'s

VERSION Diaorosis: WKITOR OFrrnH j SERVO MBflTCR SPIKDLE MJKITGS

KWDWSIHE

MfflmUR

I
I

:-

'

CHC

1 HM1(>3 A (1.03)
2 KK123 A

X
\

( Ptc )

( HEM

HW102 B

HN402 ft

:
I

EXT ]

i
f
!

|xq USB j

KH-531 A

HR 251 A (0.02)

<

(RIO 1)

(RIO 2]

X
2
3 KM 2 03

[RIO

31

(RIO 4)

(RIO 5]

(RIO 6]

(RIO

7J

(RIO 8]

1
i

HH203

:
f

I
>*'

!
!

msmr

f\A 50%
s

iili)

Omin *v

0jwn/in

! */.

Itl,,lw>.'i

TIPS 0

2005/11/04 ij 18 : I?: 46

' V

0I&CH08

5
VV.v. /.W.S'AV. /

VERSION

DIAL*OS
MONITOR

ORYXOH

WA..VW

SERVO

3 PIN OLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

I
?

AW

Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS


VERSION ~> HARDWARE MONITOR

>

161

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI CNC
PLC PROGRAMMING TOOLS
V

COPYRIGHT. O

20D4 Ml

ISUBISHI El ECTRIC CORPORATION

RIGHTS RFSFRVFn
i

f RE

eanm

me

162

iKf

DI/W80S.

Operation Procedure : Display selector key > DIAGNOS


VERSION -> LADDER MONITOR

! I!

>

<YYAWiYiYi

M\\\S\Yl\yAU

mtyrrrtiaaw

>

a? ft;

l fife
>

iLM3K

am

ttlftVittiWf

mm I

- -

iS

WVhfert

5LBJW

msrana|

f\jQ

sionc

ALARM MESSAGE

MO.
5

HEAD DATE

471 .TOC toon not $mm

TIME

TYPE

IX. IS 10:47 OP&RATB

I
I

I
I

f
i

?;j

l
l

I
I

47 x

mo mm
m

VERSION

HOT F01WB
ov

fvW* ioo%

ALARM

ALARM
HISTORY

PIJC

SIGNAL

wmmm

MAXWTtH
CHECK

ii

RUSHING

GRAPH Xc

DATA

ACCOM*!

CONTROL

MATNTEo

ERASE

T-THE

Operation Procedure : Display selector key

> DIAGPTOS

> ALARM

163

IWmmMm
Sotp Wrtfo*
file

;;

ii
I

[aLsrai HiJ.Ttiia J pi.c sum |

H.7BW

milM

Hjfc

Ho.

'

A.LIUUI MESSAGE

442 DATA RENEWAL HOT ALLOWED


406 MEMORY PROTECT

442
442
442
442
406

DATA RENEWAL HOT SHOWED

DATA REHEKM, HOT ALLOWED


DATA RENEWAL HOT ALLOWED

DATA RENEWAL MOT ALLOWED


MEMORY PROTECT
442 DATA RENEWAL tfOT ALLOWED

-100,

1, I00,

1, -100,
1, -100,
1, -100,

>
)

439 MS2ATROL PROGRAM CKSlGHATBO


439 MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED
439 MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED

)
)

l, -100,

439 MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED


406 MEMORY PROTECT
8LC

58 DORROTT RI.C
I -\&0.:CORROTX.S1C

1i
i
1

'

>

i
,

130 HO OPERATION MODE


468 MAINTENANCE CHECK WBRMIHO
642 DATA RENEWAL HOT ALLOWED
'

4328,62700,

3)

.t.SC

4,

<

1 EMERGENCY STOP

10.31

9:43

OPERATE
OPERATE

10-31

9: 38

OPERATE

10.31
10.31

9:32
9:27
9:17

OPERATE

10.31

9:15

10-31
10.31

9:11
9: 8
9: 3

10.31
10.31
10.31

406 MEMORY PROTECT

OOSAOET
dPSW
'

10.31

TIME
10:22
9:54

10.31
. ..

(&OOOOFFTE/

0$ 2

TYPE
OPERATE

10.31

DATE

B;59

8:59
8 : S3
8:49

1
1
1
\

OPERATE
OPERATE
OPERATE
OPERATE
OPERATE
OPERATE
OPERATE

OPERATE

1I

OPERATE

fe

10.31
10.31
10.31
10.31
10.31
10.31

8:49
8:46

SYSTEM

8:45
8:45

MG
OPERATE

10,31

8:45

10.31
10.31
10.31

8:45
8:45
8:44

OPERATE
SYSTEM

10.31

a; 44

SYSTEM
SYSTEM

U-

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

j"" 1/

i
1 rv/\>
I

TpS O

g*5

VERSION

~~D
AIi ARM

7 50 min 1

VV'A

nij'KM

pix;

MA nn f.n

SIGNAL

CHECK

PU;

-M

10 : 23:37

wimum;

GRAPHIC

TEXTPILE

CONTROL

MSIHTS,

DISPLAY

Operation Procedure Display selector key --> DIAGNOS

164

OIUIL/JAIR

HISTORY

I 2005/10/31

"

> ALARM HISTORY

The Procedure Of Reset Alarm History And Extended Alarm History


1. Go to DIAGNOSIS screen and push DATA ERASE button.
X

ii+
Ui mVTmnr

Bn.

;Nr

ilfcHal,

AI.XKM KF..13WC

DATE

TIM

TWB

|
!

:
j

:
1

:
IM 0

TTB

;W 7*v>
VERSZOK

2(106/09/2* 22; 3?: 2#

vVVS 1 .

Or[i
Al.ARH

IK

wwm*

HISTORY

Sir.HAf

erase*

RDIDJTHC
OONTBCT,

cpj-.pmc

HAIKI

2. Move cursor to ALARM HISTORY


and push INPUT key.

DATA

3. Move cursor to COMPLETION


INPUT -9999 and push INPUT key.
J

CHUCK JAW

TOOL DATA

CtDW.

BRBSB

TOOL DATA

TOOL FILE

CHUCK JAW

TOOL FILE

TOOL OFFSET

TOOL OFFSET

CUTTING COND.

ALARM HISTORY

WORK OFFSET

SJ

CUTTING COND.

ALARM HISTORY

WORK OFFSET

MAINTENANCE

MACRO YAR.

MACRO VAR.

COMPLETION <-9999 1NPUT>

COMPLETION <-9999 INPUT>

START INIT .

START INIT-

4. Open Explorer and Delete C:MC_sdgAlarmAlarm.txt file.


.

File

8SS

WJ Back
A

View

Edit

V :-

Folders
+
+

Favorites

i:
S

-ft-

Search

Folders

)J\ ~
vi

C: i MC _sdg\ Alar m
X

__) MC_Gl Data

Name

mm
_=J

E xcbjdeAlarrri

I M-I.Machine Oatabas
_j MC.Machine Program

88

Help

Tools

Sire

Type

89 KB Text Document
1 KB Text Document

| MC.sdg

___

A Alarm
I CiistOfnMenij
I cutest
) '. u* morn

_I

ojties

_l

dbl

_) tug

I Tocillnf or matron

>

<

>

165

166

|fw.raS15AI|p0;:

Y '*:

w .Wip

fife

EJSPK

___

W-

m
\

|sown MCSTORZ

I*.
1.MF1

0000

Condition
XZ30,X$30,X690,X930

2.HF2
4,MF4

0000
0000
0000

X231,X531,X891,X931
X232 ,X532,X89?,X932
X233,XS33, X893, *933

5. SF

0000

*\TF1

0000
0000
0000

X234,X534JX094,X934
X238 , X538 X898 ,X938
X239,X539,X899,X939

Sts.

Ho. Title

3.MF3

7.TF2
8 HF
9.DEH

1000

X23C,X53C,X89C,X93C
X1F8,X4F8,X858,XBF8

10. JOG

oooo

xieoafio.xBio.xBeo

13. HANDLE
12. STEP

0000
0000
0000
1000

XlEl,X4El,X84I,X6El
X1E2 ,X4E2,X842,X8E2

13.PTP

14. ZERO RJETORH


IS. MEMORY

iCjTJVPE

'

17.MDT
IB . OPERATION

X1E3,X4E3,X843,X8E3
X1E4,X4E4,X844,X884

SS:;S:S5J:

0000

X1EB,X4EB,X84Q,X8EI)

OOQ0

X1E2 ,X4E2,X842,X8B2

No.Title

Sts.

19. RESET
20. MX AXIS IHP

0111
1000
1000

21 MJ.aXXS SMTH
22.SYHC-Z
23. SYNC -c

24.SXKC-SP
25.SYHC

26.GOV. :
27-61 V
ZB.XIIREADXHG
29. CONST

0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000

0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000

30. SKIP
31. OH ZERO RTH.
32. FINISH
33. PRESSURE
34.HAXXHG

0000

35-MFIHX
36.MFXH2

0000

Condition
X1C$(X4ES,X845,X8ES
X1F9, X4F9 , X859 , X8F9
XlFA,X4FA,X85A,X8FA
X274 ,X5?4,X8D4 ,X974
X27S,X57S,XBD5,X97 5
X27fc,X57.,X0D6,X976
X204,X504,X864,X904

>

X200,X500,X860,X900

X20X,X501,X861,X901
X203 , X503 , XB63 ,X903
X205 ,X505 , X865, X90S
X206,X506,X866(X906
X207,X5O7 ,XB67 ,X9D7
X26O,X5GO,X0CO,X96O

X268,XS68,X8C8,X968
X26C,X56C,X8CC,X96C '
Y226 , Y526 , Y9A6 , YAA6
Y227,Y527,Y9A7,YAA7

X/

inj.0]! 2005/10/3X j10 : 23; 43

I
f\T\j

0A

VERSION

!ZJ
ALARM

7 SO min1

ALARM
HISTORY

VV\A

"3~J

0m/in
PIC

SIGNAL

MAINlEH
CHECK

PJ.C

RtUtNXHG
CONTROL

Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS

> PLC SIGNAL

167

Fite

Vfcteri
susm JCCSTCBCC nx: Slant,

ALARM MESSAGE
471 1TC ATfc HOI TOmp

TYPE
HEAD DATE TIKE
11.15 1B;'47 OPERATE

HO.

w~v-

:*

il

'Q';VSO:.
*::. .*>

*;

TOOL. FILE

__

TOOL OFFSET
-

..

..

ClTTTTliG COHO.

ALARM HISTORY

WORK OFFSET

MftIHTEJUiCB

MACRO VAR.
.

ADD

'

. %VV>5v:J i

l%0,

me

COMPLETIOH <-9999 XNPUT>.

START IH IT,

[IB: 48; 2:1

| 47 l C DATA. MW FQ1W*>

kW 100%

jVU 100%
VERSION

ALARM

ALARM
HISTORY

PIC
SIGNAL

MAINTEN
CHECK

Operation Procedure : Display selector key

168

.
RQNHING

GRAPHIC

CONTROL

MAIHTE.

DATA
ERASE

> DIAGNOS --> DATA ERASE

ACClJHlI.

TIME

A.

rfliV'ii niRivav'-yv'v}\)Yi

'~'v-

6M.

.w.ifr'>nvrii

;
<

Fite- WWSor*
SXSJOI

Hr>

poi

j rrrcif ITJRIK j KEY MisTtaa|fOw scan7.|

:-

l
i

i
i

Ol

019

01111011

037

02
03

3
4
6

01000111
10111111
11101111
11101111
10001110

0
030
039 ; OOOOOOOO
o40 iooiloioo

oo

020
021
022
023
024
025
026

09

027

oio
oil
012

020
029

04

05
06
07

013
014
015
016

!5

8
4

2
1
0
O

017

018

041 jOOOOOOOl

10011111

042 OlOOOOOO
043 00000000

11111111
00111110

044
04 5

10100000
10010100
030 11110011
031 11100100
032 OOOOOOIO
033 11001101
034 . 00010001
035 i 10000010
036 U 110010

04 6
047
040

1000
100 0

250

0
2000
2000

049
050

500
0
0

051
052
053 j

054

055 toooooooo
0
056 i
057 j IOOOOOOOO
0
050 i'
059 j 00000000
o
060 j
061 : 00000000
0
062 ;
063 00000000
0
064
0
065
0
066
067

0
060 :j
069 1
0
0
07 6 ;
071 ' 00000000
072 UOQOOOOOO

00000000

091

jllOOOOOl

074 iOOQOQlQl

09Z
093
094

loooooooo

[00000000

095

ioooooooo

096
097
098

10000000
0

073

075 j OOOOOOIO
076 jOlOOOOlO
077 loOOOlOOO
070 j 10101000
07 9 i
0

080 :

OOl

002

0
0

OB3 j

0
0

0103

006 |

007
088
089

os 5

096

|
j
|

1
O

16

084

<

j OOOOOOOO

09 9
0100

0101
0102

0
0104
0
0105
0106 IOOOOOOOO

0107 -OOOOOOOO

OIQO

i
:
i

0
?

\:

ij

1
>

EDI

Vv 100%
DIACHO#

WA ioo%
SYSTEM

PITCH

KEY

MEMORY

PA*Uki

ERROR

MI STORY

SCOPE

-rJ Ij#'?'

|fg||ftjj2005/ll/15 1 18; 50: 58

r:

I
:
<

5&

DIAGNOS ->
VERSION -> VERSION -> SYSTEMPARAM

Operation Procedure Display selector key


'

169

rtfUH

rircf

zmam

Ol
02

03

04
05

6
8

06

07
08
09
OlO

1
<>

on

012

RTT mviwi' ; msfufn sn>n;

oi9 muon
020 01010111
021 10110111
022 11110111
023 11111111
OS 4 immMt
OS 5 10011

0
0
08000000

OS5

0 0000 000

056
057

040 00100000

056

041 00000001

059

03?
039
039

111111

060

018

061

1,00000000

062

0
i.00000000
0

07 9
OHO

on i
082

003

0
0
0
0
0
4OO0OOOOO
L 00000000

084
08 f.
086
087

029 11

030 11111111 \ 048


oil 10000100 \ 049
032 00000010
050

01.1
Oil
015

016

04?

017

035 00000110

01Q

>

o36

cfcp
OtU

01010000

0
2000

063
D64

065
066

2000

067

068
069

VlSl

033 01900001
034 0091 oq 01

093

04 00010009

VJOloA

07 5
07 6

043 OOOOOOOO
0
044
045
0
046
0

?
0

111000019

091
092

00100011
9IOO0O1O
0O1O10OO
1010000 1
0
0
0
0

0?6
O71
020

0011110

P?3 00000009
01 4 00000101

0
29
0
O

OlO
071
O? 2

tOOOOOOOO
0
400000000

077

094
095

096

11000001
ooooo loo
00000000
00000000
00000000
0 10OOO0O

097

096
099
0100
OlBl

010 2

0103

1
0

0103
010 5

088
089

0106 00000090

O107

00000090

090

oioa

0
16
?
0
0
0

rV\*

so %

Hfl

>AAA 1 46 tsi/mS

oiM y

>- v

2006/12/01

09:52:31

\\

HIT

r*r

\
Cursor to the coirect. 0 parameter
Press BIT INPUT-"'

170

'*?

'M

4:

fejg

F$* 'itev* twp

SYSTEM

rmm|nttDt mum } I&Y tfusreaa* ) lasas# %tmm J

03
of
03

XI 111011
010X0111
021 10110111
0.22 lillOlll

019
020

04

3
4
6

OS

06
07
08

0*5 1001.1 m

2
?

026
027

OIP

Oil

012
013
014

0
1

0X5

016

017
oin

023 11. trio X


024

I 11**1011
I I nun

001X1110
Of0 11100000
029 XI I18100
030 llilllll
031 10088100
032 OOOOOOiO
033 01000001
034 000X0001
m% 00000110
036 010X0000

9
033
8
038
039 00000000
040 00100000
041 00000001
042 00010008
043 00000 D 00
8
044
045
0
0
04$

055 & 00 00 0000


0

073 00000000
074 00000103

057 *08009900

075 00100011

m%
092
093

076 01000010

0.94

059 09000090

077 OO1010OD

060

078

10100001

mi *00000000

079

05$
058

o
062
063 00080000
cm
0
065
0

047

040
049
050

2880

06$

2098
0

067
068

051

069

052

29
0

070

Oil

072

400000000
00000000

053
054

0
0

on
A/V. 50%

..

lift

Orpm

J
Select,

VW* .1 , 4

mb

099

002

01.60

003
OQ 4
005
086

0
0

0X81
0.1Of
0X83
0104

O90

:;V/|

00000000

096
097

000

087
008
009

j 0 0000000
00800000

081

8
i

1100 OGOL
G 9000100

01.05

0
0
0

0186
0187

0180

O1OO0OOO
0
2

1$

8
8
0
0

00880808
08000000
8

iwi 2006/12/01

09:52:50

in /m in
BIT- f

the bit. you want, on ur off ... Highlighted = 1 or On

I-

3rX

IHPIST

EX
Not Highlighted = 0 or Off

171

vwvWftwiWft\YT

\YAVTlYlVA*>YtYYn VTYtT.YlYlT tYYYi V/Yl Y\ YiWr>1Yl T

&&$&

SYSTEM FWtfO* FITCH EKHR KEY JCISTflJOf

AXIS
PI
P2

1000000
13
10
0
0

P3

PI
P5

#2G

0
0

0
0
0

-6
j
-7
-7 i

0
0 !

0
0

-7

-13
-1

0
0

-10
-18
0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0
0

-1

0
0

jj
2J

I \
fc.*r.v5cn.v."

5
;

.*.y

Tl I !!' I
DIACMOS

SYSTEM

1/16

-13

0
0

i
J

0
0

0
0

JPXTClt

KEY
HISTORY

>

0
0

0
0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0

o
0
0

0
0

MEMORY

0
0

0
0

<

.....

0
0

0
0
0
0
0

!
?

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0

SCOPE

Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS


VERSION - - > VERSION - - > PITCH ERROR

j
<

!
'

0
;

i
i

man sar

TJjJJ.'JAWWX'.'AWA'AW/AVW .V..V

172

-;

0
0

0
l

vW'ioo*

ERROR

Si RHBBRBR

#234

#208

#102

#150

#130

#101

#70

#52
0
0
0

XI

| KQCJHY SCOfE|

go

mu

'

T. 'J&%.Zp***r ~

Hrt>

FI**

>

\
\

0
0
0
0

0
0

!
1X8:51; 17

DMrK Ko.

SEARCH

fR-tif

F7?

R;T

\o

-O

riLLi
f

SYSTEM

rwam| men unm

40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
340

<5

10

11 12

13 14

15

16

17

18

10

20

MS

MS

Fl
Fl

MS
DS

F3

F4

CR

F4

48

F7

CR

UD

DS
UR

DS

FG
UD
FG
F2

FG

UD
F2
Fl

FG
TB

F2

UD
F2

UD

F9

AX

AH

F2
41

F2
42

F3
43

F2
F3
F?
4B

F7
TB
F2

F4

UD
F2
F7
F2
45

DS
*D

DS

UD
Fl

FG
UD

F3
F4
UD
F2

DS

F6
UD

Ml
FG

CR
UR

DS

FB

Fl
FS

Ml

DS

DS
UD

FG
UD

F3
F3
F6
UD
F3
F2

F2

F3
40

53

53

56

56

UD

F2
51
F4

UD

UD

FA
40

UD

F3
F7
Ml

F4
Pi

FG

DS
FG

UD

UD

UD

Ml
F?
FA

F2
F2
UR
53
FG

iwoarior SCOPE |

5ft

0 MS
20 Fl

KEY msTmor

F3

DS

FG
UD

FG

WD

MO

CR

UD

DS

F2

F2

F2

F2

DS

Fl

DS

Fl

48
5B

40
5B

4A
55

41
55

UD
DS

UD

UD

F7

UD
DS

DS

08

F2
FT

UD
UD
Fl

UD
UD
DS

UD
UD
F8

FG
MO

F6

FG

UD

UR
48
FA
MS
DS
UD
UD
FS
DS
UD

CR

DS

FO

F6

DS

F?

360 UD

UD

300
400
420
440
460
400
500

Fl
F4

Ml
DS

CR
F4

Fl

FA

F2
PD
DS

Fl

CR
UD

UD

DS

FA

DS

F4
Fl
Fl

DS
DS

FO
F7
DS
F?

UD

UD

UD

F4

F7

DS
DS

DS
Fl
HO

DS

H4
PD
FG
FG
FA
CR

Fl
HO
UD

UD
FG
FA
CR
UD

DS

F6

UR

F3
44
54

F2
42
54

MS
UD
F2
Ffi
f3
42
F2

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD
OS
F3
MS

DS

DS

F5

F2
DS

DS

F6

DS

MS

DS

UD

UD

UD

UD

Ml

FG

UD

UD

DS
UD
DS

UD

F2
F6

DS
FA

F8
UD

UD

F8

FB

PD

PD

FR
PD

Fl
PD

CR

CR

CR

CR

F2

Fl

CR
CR

CR

CR
CR

UD
UD

UD
UD

UD

UD
F4

UD
UD

F5

DS

UD
UD
UD

Fl

Fl

DS
FA

UD
UD
FA

F7

F3
M3

FA

PU

FA

PU
UD

FA
F3
DS

F3

UD
F6
F4

PD

DS
DS

F8
Fl

CR
CR
1ID

PU
CR
CR
UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

mmmi
EE
PXA0H03

DS

UD
UD

UD
F3

DS

4A
F7

CR

F4
UD

DS
H.

4B
DS

M0

FA

DS
FS

CR
UR

UD
FA
F5
Fl
FS

DS

DS
DS

UR

UD
FG
F4

FG

Fl

AE

UD

DS
FO
DS
F8
PD
CL

DS

DS
Fl
Ffi

AT
UR

51
F3

F3

F2
MS
FS

CR

F2

UD

UD
F2

DS

FA
DS
F8

DS
UD
F8

UR

4C

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

F6

FA
Fl

UD

Fl

UD
DS

FB

F7

UD
DS
DS

UD

UD
FO

UD
F4

UD
DS

UD
F7

PU
40

PD

DS
UD
FS
DC

DS

F4

DS
MO

F3

UD

CR
CR
UD

DS

FB
DS
UD
F4
UD
DS
PU

DS
UD

FA
PU

CR
CR
UD

CR

UD
UD

UD

Fl
UD
UD

Ml
UD

F8

UD

DS
UD

:TPS 0 (2005/11/15 18:51:35

E
BYSTF.W
P ARAM

PITCH
ERROR

RET
HISTORY

MEMORY

SCOPE

Operation Procedure : Display selector key


DIAGPTOS
VERSION -> VERSION -> KEY HISTORY

>

173

yVA*>ViV.,S*VV%\VISNNWIV.VIWTVV>V.VAW,/VAV\WVS

LYftmvWlWWYlWYlVW.W

jMliaF

i Fite

t*

i
*

WWwf Hfr9f>-

serra*

ra ) ?XTCM ERROR j KEY rasrraac

vaxsci

scare i

l
\

i
I

TRIGGER No. 0

Ho.

QZGHKL

00000000-0

oooooooo-o

00000000-0

oooooooo-o

00000000-0

fi

00000000-0

IIP
+

SAMPLING CYCLE
*-
-+
+

4-

I.TBS

+-

i
$

IJ
I

Ii

<

::

00000000-0

oooooooo-o

:?

i
1
i

\
1
\

;
i

ioos/ii/is jiafsi: sa

! FW ioo%

vV*A ioo%

['VIZ

SYSTEM

pxtm

ERROR

KEY
H.TS20RY
WBB

MEMORY

RTRRT

SCOPE
W

TW/.ViV.V.VAW.'.V

Operation Procedure Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->


VERSION -> VERSION -> MEMORY SCOPE

174

WWHWX'IWW.'TO

i
mui

Memory Scope

Primary Function
Digital Recorder

-Ability to monitor 8 (eight) signals set to anything that is


an address
inputs, outputs, latches, etc..

175

176

Memory Scope

Cursor down to the desired signal number!!


In this example, signal No. 1

mm

M DIAGNQSIS(MAKER2)
File Window. y Help

'

Hi

SYSTEM -P AR'Mr I PITCH EPP.0P. | KEY HISTORY.

>v;KEK0RY \3rftW

rS:

Wo.

TRIGGER Wo.C
+

SIGNAL ,

1 00000000-0

f.ly,
;

M
$

Hi

2 .00000000-0 V -:

3 00000000-0
*!

4 00000000-0

ft}.

5 00000000-0
'

6 00000000-0'

V'lllifPSiii
m

ISW*y.
>

7 00000000-0

;v

8 00000000-0

S Jslfvfe,
&
m- VVVilitl

A:-

iVfii

m mm \ iHM aMfimB
vy

ij'-y."/-;;'1 \

vy;-

-- : -i

"*"v

}''

WW

33 EMERGENCY STOP

rVV 10 0%
A

[xjj

WA

Orpm

B-

'

SiiHiP

100

------

j?

r,

8.V

S'-VT

A;

>

:v

-7',l/,V;7 %

iiiiiin
Y

VVV--
V.;

A4

is-:

ss;

iiiiil

Memory Scope
Input the desired address, example X140-0

(For X146, type X146-0 input)


i DIAGNDSISIMAKER2)
Rle Window Help
SYSTEM

.<AK| PITCH

ERROR

| KEY

mrntmmmmmt
HISTORY

TRIGGER No. 0
Ho.

SIGNAL

+;

MEMORY 3C OPE

v-'H-W

--

'>

SAMPLING- CYCLE
+
+

DOWN

T;

1 00000000-0

2 00000000-0
3 00000000-0

iiiMiiiMHi silS
lilgi
. - r*S:
f
j

li

4 00000000-0

S 00000000-0
6 00000000-0

.7

ooo.ooqoo-o

..

Yg,

8 00000000-0
gift

&

To 05 |xj}
A

[WvA

Orpm

m
m

[ j ~'.:7 ]lpgjg ['2000/03/25' [12:52

33 EMERGENCY STOP
!Vv

: I;;

100

X14D-0

177

178

Memory Scope

Insert up to 8 addresss

.......

1 DIAGNOSISJMAKER2)
3V3TEH PARAH

No

PITCH ERP.0R

KE'2 HISTORY

TRIGGER No. 0
+
:f;

SIGNAL,

1: X0140

111

jmmmmummmmmmmm

File VindoW' Help

.ICCKORY-

: ;

DOWN
+

-0

2 00000000-0

mmmmmssmmSBmrnmmsi

3 00000000-0

ii

i'm

9y
Cy'ti

4 00000000-0

lg

5 00000000-0

fM
s

'V;

wmmm.

33 EMERGENCY STOP

I'vviaos
A:.

jxQ]
B

fvWv

Orpm

'.(2,

X
2#

y-:

f?

Ni

100

f
WM

a&

mk

*#
;

i;

ooodoooo-o

-w

>

6 00000000-0
7 00000000-0

&

mmm
si

Memory Scope

XI 40-0 through X147-0


J

DIAGNOSISIMAKER2)

File Window Help


3Y3TEK PAR AH

Mo.

__

| PITCH

EBP OR

KEY KISTOP.Y

1 X0140

-0

2 X0140

-1

3 X0140

-2

-------- ----

TRIGGER Mo. 0
+
+

SIGNAL

HEHORY SCOPE:

wimmm

DOUN SAMPLING CYCLE


~+
+
+
+

----

~+
3

tie

%
i

4 X0140

-3

5 X0140

-4

6 X014D

-5

7 X0140

-6

8 X0140

-7

X'

1M

>\\;

IV?

m- XX& X
.--

'

v,m

xMWB

:>

'

.,-

...

&

33EMER(HCY.

P'/v

100%

[Vjjr

aMMHMM [

!7-

"100

Or pm

DIAGHOS

; SYSTEM
PAPsAM

PITCH
ERROR

KEY.
HISTORY

HEMORYf;
SCOPE

2303/03/29

&

X'iv

f 12: 57

_jr

:\

'

'START,,,

179

X140=Reset

>i

180

Memory Scope
Enter the No. for the desired trigger signal
i pi

(MAKER2)
File Window Help
SYSTEM PAJ..UI

No.

PITCH EPROP.

SIGNAL
-0

.2X0140

-1;

3 X0140

~2

4 X0140

x3;

.5 XOl'lO

-4.

6 X0140

5:

7..X0140

;B6:

XOi.iO:

-7

HISTORY

DP

PARAM

x 7.,1m?

'

>

iu;

Illiii
fSililil;

M
$

wsg

liii 11

Orpm

SYSTEM

20

''5

33 EMERGENCY STOP

DIAGIJOS

Vvv'
W3M
______

. 0:M fvv 1005 [zSQf

SAMPLING CYCLE

+ r-

Tr

ue.

MEMORY SCOPE:

-------- ---TRIGGER: Ho. 6


+ -yw,
+

1X0140

| KEY

|vw ioo'

.PITCH
ERROR

;,

KEY,
HISTORY

I-;

r~~~

I :2P0p/03/2. rls,; 02

MEMORY

SCOEfel

?7$

START
l

In this example, signal No. 6 will be used as the trigger


signal. (X145)

Memory Scope
ENTER 0 TO USE THE RISING EDGE
ENTER 1 TO USE THE FALLING EDGE
U
WmsmmF wmmwmmmmmmmmm

C DIAGN0SIS(MAKER2)
File Window Help
SYSTEM P ARMI:.|:P ITCH ERROP.

KEY HISTORY

; /*?*;
No.

;;

. ;;

X014Q

~i

3' X0140

=rs2

$ g tip

:V

TRIGGER No. 5 DOTO


-:4 - +V I- -;+
-:+i

; SIGNAL.

1 X0140 . ..-0
2

MEMORY SCOPE 1

;:-<

mmmm
:TUW;

. ..: /.
'.

>avi ;

I'
l|raHn|

.V:.

;v;,it

r|

'-..

'.'O
mm

4 X0140

-3

5 \X0140

-4

6 X0140

7 X0140;

-6

3 X0140

-7

33 EMERGENCY STOP

j-W 100%

jDIAGNOS
I
i

Orpm

SYS TEH
PARAH

Jg

m$

lltiSIfllll
i mt istsi

W:

My

mm

I
-A
Vtvy/

lliila
]

|WA
PITCH
ERROR.

( IPlT 0

f 2000/C3/29
M

100 ;*

KEY
HISTORY
[

[12: 58

SCOREI

-START

181

THIS EXAMPLE USES THE FALLING EDGE

3*

'S

182

Memory Scope
INSERT TIME
(20 = .14 SECONDS)?
/

PIAGNOSIS|MAKEH2)

File .Window. Help


SYSTEM PAR All

PITCH ERROR

|KEVHIST0RV

.........
TRIGGER

SIGNAL

No.

1 XOl'lO

-G

Ho . S

wn?co]

DO'JW

wmmmmBi

SAMPLING CYCLE

IP ,7
.

XOi-4.0

3X0140

-2

4 XCI140

-3

5 X0H0

-4

6 X0140

-5

7 X014U

-6

8 X0140

-.?

Wm

IS I

; gf|
\
B
gmxgMmmmmm
as p
i I
<

is

I M 8 11
Wii
11111 ;
li

W:

EHEBGEMCY" SIOT
Orpin
|w 1005 gj
SVSTFW-

7.1ns

M w

33

DIAGNOS

[E3
'

'

u w,US
i

fWA
PTTfK

ioo'
TCFY

MFWriRV'

PRESS START

LTi

jTPS 0

II

jg

2000/03/29

s
p
I|
.

START

[T2:S3PI?

'i

Memory Scope
The sampling cycle begins after the
desired trigger occurs.
,g DjABN0SIS|MAKER2|
File . Window

Help

SYSTEM PAPAM

] PITCH ERROR] KEY

----

SIGNAL

SCOPE

HISTORY

TRIGGER No. 6

No;

y W"

y
UP

-0;

2 X0140

-1

3 X0140

-2

4 X0140

-3

S X0140

-4

6 X0140,

7 X0140

-6

8 X0140

-7

wmm

:v yw.-y.;.,.y .
j,

20 . x 7.1m 3

U'

WJ! :-7:

mmmmi

__
_
_ _ ;
:__

~~

~~

'

2,
"

SYS T Ell
PA RAH

-+

'V

yj33TEHERGENCY
Orpin.

;'V

SAPLING. CYCLE

DIAGNOS

+----+

1 XG14G

|vv'l00% prjjj

[$}

jy-M

PITCH
ERROR

'

10 o"

KEY
HISTORY

'

HEHOEY
ECPE

IPS

fl
'

O '

-o

"

[-2000703/39 FTof
'

'

V.w- y.

EHvraa

183

The result of signals will be displayed after the sampling


time cycle expires.

184

.....

Maintenance Check

ivMmm

3lfc

U2
i

Vi

;#

;:'4&

itf
m

ill I

>

n-

Uj.

xW
t.v
r-t'i

ilKg

IHWHI

-0.023
0.
0.
0.

X2
22

py-

65.3. .10

11!
I*
I
aw

X1
o

;.*

VI ?*

Z1

ilS

IBB
' 'v-

:i

I
1
lliflf
FT witm
EJ 5.'. mi
%
SLIS
1

'

"

.'

oc
nA

mm
0

k,

*r :

...

m
si
is

-';

l
i!inssi!&! If
. *>

-Ill

f.

aJ* BE

'

4W8#L

Si...

.; i*S

Molin

*: r>\
0

.:

:.: PC
.
-!' -

**/&/'>

0.
u

...

-...

N
T13

. f . 5....

.*

i;-

'

J,,

||||j|P

il;

l&raf

"

3Bflgigj[

fi

ly'i

SSlSMlt-i m

111

aa

1$

vi

Ai;>v

31

i*V'\

Maintenance
Check
Jr

'r-

<

.'I

'

X*%< K

*Y-

..

.~

*<'

A? A-

:9*

v.

?' ;

C--

.?

muV

WfS

>

:v;

v?;

185
.

1
8HR

'i m

:i;;8
.

H it V

S| T

K.i

Bii

'-

L+

!N

F TV

3TT. .

T/

A pi

w
v

ft

rXj

iv

12 13

>. o.1

A1

.-:i '

Vi!
1

,r

mu&zBx

:1

If

'.<

*
*|A..' *

V . W I

TTT

1 1T*
'. <*

E>

i
;

I8

ia

186

Maintenance Check Display


|/*MWNIt;HMiK?E CHECK
Pil*.' Wrdcw Hob
mwrnmjci OTCK

Bo.

aiti.1

pxmoua ana;

(l
trot.

lSOp-HJfS' CHECK .1TOK

30C0-WS CHECK . 3TEH2


l

CHECK' GUIDE BAY


6;

tUB-ou- 1

1593.. 6. A

H82LJ

1998. 6. 4

1.18 2L1

1993. C. A

I382LJ

CHICK BHMDiG
LUB-OIL

I102L]

,3- CHICK COOldlTI XZVEL

L953. C

1593.! C

Function

\4\ CHAN
S

cooijjri jiirzK

CHECK- aar- LcvEi t;;


IH CHIP SUCKlT

f
f

_o

1 1821] .
I192L)

.1993,. C. 4
. 1993. C. 1

6 am.HicHnajioRU

L993. C

1 18 2L]

.4

'

Periodic check of items


Last date of check

118 ELI
3000

'

ri/~2'i

: ."[.m 0:i 'l999/p5>3C . '34147

fv.-

Z0

SOI |

POSITION

Orpa

)*V/

O.OClu/iU)

K V.-f'-v;;

DliGUOS

if m

Lonuiewi

mu

that has elapsed since the last Check

Machine function continues, even after the display of time


elapsed exceeds the target time

2 pages, 8 lines each, 16 items total

i rk
I

HC*

MJlXHTEHftJWCe CHECK DATA

Ho.

TIME <H)

PREVIOUS CHECK

1500

3000-fcfcS CHECK ITEMS

*
m

:=

l 101]

2005. 10. 31

i ion

2005. 10. 31

l 101]

2005. 10. 31

11]

2005.10. 31

I 1013

2005. 10. 31

4
v.;

CD

0
"

/V\/

0s

Iff

7 5 Owin'1

VW'-

1.

101]

2005. 10. 31

1/

I
I
$
s

2005. 10. 31

1 101]

1500

1500

..;*

2005. 10. 31

3000

VV

( 101]

15 QO-fiKS CHECK ITEMS

II

\t

-iJ

XM 0 2005/10/31 -10:23:57

Ij

!
l

07*m/jin
i

lOSXTXOJI

D1A0W0S

LOHGTCRW

''.DATA

Operation Procedure : Display selector key

DIAGNOS

"

> MAINTEN CHECK

187

His

File

Hr*.

ISOO-BRS CHECK ITEMS


HO

1
2

II
18

19

20

21

22
23

7
8

24

25

10

26
27
2B
29
30
31
32

11
12
13

14
15
16

o ?: /

1/

o' 2005/10/31

;10:

1
irs
0>
POSIT.tOH

.0?

TSOBIJII"1

VAA

24; 06

Owm/nin
DtACHOS

PRTA

Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->

MEINTEN CHECK -> LONGTERM DATA

188

'itnn'TR

Mazatrol Fusion 640M MAINTENANCE CHECK Dtspl-ay


Function:
Pertodls

dsie

cfleet Herrs. the

lasl dale of sheeting. and tie time that has elapsed since

ine I3&1

or cPEcv.lr-g are displayed.

Periodls elect Items car ba regls'.arec.

8.173 rtf-S:

Tne machine will net stop even rT:ne display df die. time wfclsh: has elapsed since
checking exc-aecs 'fie target lime.

tne last date oT

Data display
1.

Displayed data

IP WMBTCH*JKige OUECK
FJ ..*#W=W Hflp
Ho,

ILkTfTtllTAJfC! CB1CK UAtA.

TOT&lHJj

PJvI 71D VS 5HIC K

WEB

ia

;t4i :

Pd :

%
it;

Si;

ns

1
[

ili

imm

i
t

I:
f)

mmm;
W4VV>iV4MMm . .

Hi j~ i jggvff/

L.

fw

i&et

EUSHH ESZEEBHH

5A-,

jiggfe
1

D725S1CB3S

2.

Display data description


tem

Me.

n
3

Ur It

Hvr# or a erti>:l- cr3 Rem

CM to: HAT*

189

riMt

il

Targcl irne

53

CuTcnUme

S3

PREV30US OJZCK

PJ<;C

Data desedpflon
CAficK number

Kc-.
HA-IMTUCrvHCE.

Graph k:a; repreggnlaton cf ire

haur

Hru
'V M. 0

rate et 1h currer,! Brr-e la Bre targe l. rm e

Target fmt for the rxf.DO'c chxK HOT

CuTcrTt BmsfcfUiepenca'c chscK Itesa


The

art da% cf

Page number

periodic cire-rt Hem

3.

Registering the data for regular check itei

190

A.

Presetting, the target time or the current time


the cursor to r.he data item sstiere data is to c<= preset.

f 1)

Mo/e

(2f

Enter me.
Example: Specify fc90" and press ihe INPUT icey to input 90.
Entry cf toe current time updates the date of date item [5] (PREVIOUS CHECKS

Note:

Data display for Cong-term check items (1500 and 3000 hours check items)
1.

Displayed data

Pi

CHECK
H]p

Fib

1SD0-HJS CHECK IJLHS

Kto1
2
3

/'

IT.
ii'

i
S

CD

>

ti'

*5

VI

S2J

Ilf

123

LO

It
IS

ZT
2D

m
$0

L3

U.
LS

'*31

LG

- DE

r;a~d
iw

lfitil

i
luu*

ftJsTfl f is3?B5?as

neiia'

|W

07355-1:0692.

2.

Display data description


MfifB

Na.

Data descrpUon.

U.Tit.
Cfteclc numa-r

i;

Me

Check terns

-oca terra ensefc Hsre.-

a;

Fat*

Fags minber

Maintenance Check Display


Display operations

The display status of cata item will reverse when- the oirrent time reaches the target, time. After
a:m per.cn of checking. rr the cursor to "No. using the cursor key and then press the INPUT
key. The display cf data item will then return from the .reverse status to Che rarmac status.
Entry of the check items to be displayed

The check items to fee displayed cannot be entered directly on the MAINTENANCE CHECK
display. This subsea cn cescrbes the procedure for adding cr deleting the check items to be
displayed.

1 ) Save the factory-set data cf display items beforehand into the file.
to create a file under the specified directory (see Item 2

21 Execute the File Write function


below).

3) Edit the text file as required l see hen 1 betcw).


*5) Execute the File Read function tc fetch the data onto the display (see Item 2 below).
1.

Registering the data of the check itemrs

Using a comnerciavy avalable edrtcr. open the text fi of the folcwng format under the
spec flee directory tom 64mdstai engVnai rnenan ce.txt ).
(urcon] ;

.n*stf*rof c-en'cai-c cr,czv. terns'


.Cc'ur-enr Vn

i, CHECK -JUICE V&Y LUB-OIL


2-4,
[rail IS] ;

n'es*ar Zff

ate c ,Tdm z

I.CKAHJE HVDFJtULIC UNIT OIL


32.
[TW13-0];
Weaker of KtC-nrs cnec*.terns
1, CHECK HACHItfE LEVEL
32,

Note:

eng' in the directory name conespends with the language currently selected for the

display mate.
191

192

Maintenance Check Display


Entry of the check items to be displayed
A.

Data format of the periodic check items


[urconj

1,

-TE-TT:

P-ixic-ali-s ebacb icinto

ma

WAY LUP-OTL

- lJp to 24 items can be registered.


- Set the description after the serial number and
comma.

24

Note:

The description can oonsst of up to 4D characters (a two-byte code is counted as two


characters). Excess items or characters will be ignored.

B. Data form at of the lo ng-term ched! items


[insllS]

l, :m>?eg

r!h*c!c it.ana

HSHE53JLI SSSU. OIL

- Up to 32 items cam: be registered.

- Set the description alter the serial number and


comma.

22
[BSil-Q] SCOO-hr*
c Ic
2,. CHECK WACKIKE LEVEL
22,

Note:

The description can consist of up to 40 characters {a two-byte code is counted as two


characters). Excess items or characters will be ignored.

2*

Read and Write of check items text file

__

A> the check items presented cn the MAINTENANCE CHECK display can be read in from, and'

written into, the specified text file. Use a commercially avaBable ed&ar to prepare a text file
ccnlainiri the desired check items to be read m and presented cn the display.

A. File Read

Using a commercially available edftar< prepays a text file (containing the desired check items}
and copy it into the specified cirecsory.

j&>MAIMTEHAN6E CHECK
Film
iu7My,
!

File ftead
Filhoi

zazcic.z

Select the option 'File Reac" through the item Tile" cn Ihe menu bar to start data loading. The
contents thus reaa In vrill be displayed as shown betow upon completion of loading.

:/iMiinewawe cure*
Fib- Vrxlcw

ssm

h.fc

wamnifle* DtECj-riiti.

'

S2s;*;-v

_
m

].POD.-}i0aHi.(;>tv;iTia5;

VN*.

rHECXCUIOl-.WTf
UE'rQIL'.

;f

>&y:

'"-t:

-;:b

$Sx).

2- CB20t.SPIl,n -vLOT.-OIt:: :

;E

ySyy.-:

'

.TIJIl

"7

mmm

..

..

smm

"-31-

; m lit
..----3:

B. Rle Write
Select the option Tile Write" through the item Tile' on the nvsnu bar to save the display data.
A text file containing the current display data will be created under the specified directory.

yfeMAIttfrewroE CHECK
filu,

WrsTl-ksIp

193

H~d-v

.?

fisrirar
r"

, ' :"

Vst

'

194

r*

r*

SMU322S.*-..Y__
I mMm
:h Vfafort
! r ronfT

AVA\\VA\WAYWSWjNSV

AMAMM .NA'.'I W

'IY,'-'.V.'I'I VI'. Vi:V.'\

F!

UtHE/riCE/3D

:
[

I
;

II

031

30

02

10

03
04
05
06
D?

2
10

D8

32

Df)

45

DIO
Dll
012

63
10
5

5
2
0
5
0
3
0

D32
D33
034
D35
036
037
D3B
D3$
D40
D41
D42
943 3
944 !1
94 5 !I
94 6|
1
D47
048|

10
3
5
2

10
9
2
60
6
0

D22
DZ3
024

D25 f
D26
D27
D20
029]
030

D1

013
014
015
D16
D17
D10
D19
020
021

l\

sen

CO /ISO

LIWT

| SXSTCK<1I5UI)

||

L; - OY Y

. , j t .'

Gs&gggi

HKMTHE TUS SCLJD

TURKISC

?-

.. _/.....,-

r v

'

IV&

o
2

049
D50
D51
052
053
054

O
0

055

0
0

100

056
057
058
059
060
D61
062
D63
D64
065
066
D67
960
069

100

070

3
5
0

20
100
100
2
20

2
0
0
2
0

D7l
D72

100
0

D73!
!
D7 4 }
D7 5 I
976
077 i
D7B
D7 9
DBO I:

0
0
0

3
20

DB1]

0
0

DQ2

DB3]
984
OB 5 1

0
0
0
0

D97
D98
D99
DlCO
0101
D102
D103
D104
D105
D106
D107
D108
0109
0110

300
500
1000
10
50

200
500
700
0
0

DBO 1
DB7 !

0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0121 j

OOOOOOOQ

01241j
0125 j
0126
D127

00000000
00000000

00000000

oooooooo
oooooooo
oooooooo
oooooooo
OOOOOOOO

D113

0
0
0
0
0

D114
Dll 5

0
0

0116
0117

Dill

I
DB8 j
0
D89 j
0
D90 j
091| 11110001
D92 j 00001111
D93 j OOOOOOOO

00000000
00000000
00000000

D112

D94| OOOOOOOO
D95 j OOOOOOOO
D96 !- OOOOOOOO

DUB
D119

0
0
0

D120

D122 I
i

D123 j

D128
0129

0130}

D131J

0132
0133|
0134|

0135|
D136|
i
D137 j
5
D13B

0139
D140 j
0X41 :
D142 j
:

0143 i

0144]

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0

5Q%

9OlH'7
ID)

>

::
5

\
5
t

!:

o
o

t
.

M",

s
1

i f\j\j

i
>

0
0
0
0

i
l

>

sinr

WA

Omin

LXH , FACE
30 [ J

;i; i3:53
\

0*u*i/nin

EIA/X30

son

SYSTEM V

TV AM.me

MACH me

SOLID

Ptc

Z.3MXtriX]

[SU]

ITC]

TXM

ISO]

PARIIM-

w*m

f mmmemmm

v.

A'.'.'

MACH1HE
PAFAM.

:
t

;.VW/WWWWWJMU.WJ

Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> PAPJy>vl

<

POINT

195

iVi*yYAV>v.yyr*

!
.

KEA'asa:

.C--:->V.-r

fm. Vfafcri
l

TJ3ILE

CSH. WKRP

iXH>

VEL.

K25
K26
K27

0
0

yX49

K20
K29
K30

TDC

cmcr-

SMOTHER

SrjHOLE

:-.

B2KWER

f.

::

I
:

i
i

0
500
0
9

K1

K2
K3

'\K4 ;
K5

K6

K7

80
2

*8
K9
K10
Kll
K12
K13

0
K32
0 -:K33.:
0 ;'J :K34 j
0 j;. 35
0 , K36 |
30
K37 |

>

s
i
i

30

K33
K39

O
O

2000

K40

25
50
1000
1000
100

K4X
K42

2000

K15
K1V
K18
K19
K20
K21

0
0
0
0
0
0
2000

X14

K23

. . . K24

XS5
X56
X57

00000111 y:)'.KSl]

K7 4

0
0

K76
K77
K7$
K79
K80

7;:.
o l- Kdi

K82
K83
K84
KB5

0
0

4
1

1
1
2

K63
K64

1
K65
120
120 -:k66!
i
1
K67
120
120
X6B 00000000
120
K69 00000001
0
K7 0 00000011
0
Kll 00000111
0
K72 00000111

K43
X44
X45

K73

: K75

4l<A>

$:;X58
X59
X60
K61
K62

I;

O
O
O

1 ...;V-V46
K47
1
K48
0

K22

f; x5i
KS2

o : A K53
o ':y-k$4

0
0
0
0

#: K50

Kfi$
K87
K08
K89

0
0

K9B
K99
K100
K101
IC102

icio3
K104

KlOS
K106
K107
K108

00 < >
K121
*00< >
K122
-:-V
4 2<B>
K123
5A<Z>
K124
*5B<X:> '><125
Q 010 0000
ooooiooo
00 000 000
00000010
10001000

;KI27

K128
XI29

0
0
0
0
0

0
0

: K132

K1Q9

KUO

Kill

0
0

K134
y X135
K136

10100000

0
kii 2
0
100
0
K115
K91
0
KllS
K92
2 V/ K1.17
K93
IOO< > V; K118
4*94
K119
K95 10001000
K120
IC96 10000000

8ft

:--m&

K130
K131
X133

K138
K139
*140
XI 41
K142

0
0
0
0
0

0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

"

;
i<
i

0
0
0
0
0

I
:

0
0

0
0
0
0 v.y. V;

'

Cviu.43

XI 4 4

:
;
:

;
>

HVS 0 2005/11/01
1'.

|/W 100%

i-

ifr

7 SOinin1

MKA50RC

TABtE

WACKO

[KJ

[11

Qxn/min

.***> .VA

PECO
VL. JH)

xiWBV,-:.

COHSXIMJ

ANOTHER

S\ m

mm

miiujjxiw

%s.3

{SA1 i:

l
USER

|BA]

V.VMV.VM-'-VXV.WAV/.V.W//.',

Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> PARAM -->


IvIEASURE
DLA.CHINE PARAM.

196

SXWOXE

;;'iV

V;V

"If k*-.'

13; 24: 57

PAKAM.

2AKAI1-

n?

I
J

V:

F.S"

|
ns

TXH

KB

KL

{
J

urn

TIM?
TIM3
TXH4
TIMS
TIM6
TIM7
TIM8
TIW9

TJMlO

!
Ii

|
i

30
30
50
20

20
200
20
100

20
300

TXM25
TIM26
TIM27
TIM2B
TIM2J>
TDflO
TIM31
TIM32
TIM33
TIM34
TH<35
T3M36
XIH37
TIH30
T3M39
TIM40
TXM41

150
TIMll j
30 0
TXMl? }
J
TXMI3 f
1.50
50
TIM14 |
TIMlS !I 1000
0
TIMI6
0
nmxi :
1 TIM42
Tima i
70 TIM43
TIM19 j

TIM20

100

TIM44

TIM21
TXM22

TXH45
TIM46
TIM47

TIM23
TIM24

0
0
3

T3M4B

0
0

0
0
30

30
30
30
300
3600
20

TIM49
TIM50
TIM51
TXX52
TIW53
TIM54
TIMS 5
TIM56 1
TXH57 !
TIM50

10 0
0
0

0
10

TIM78
TIM79
T2M80
T3M81
TIM82

TTM59j

10

TIM83

1
TXM61

10

T3M84

10
70
10

TDW05
TIM06
THI87
TXW88
TIM89
TIM90
TIM91

0
0

T3M60

600
10000 TIM62
10 T3M63 1
i
15 T3M64
10 TXM65
15 TIM66
600 TIM67
1800 T3M68 5
;
600 TXM69
3000 TIM70;
100 TIM71
50 TIM"/ 2

0
0

0
0
0

0
0

T1M73
TIM74
TIM75
TIM76
TIM77

10

T3M92
TTM93

0
0
50

TXM94
TIM95
TIM96

10

i1
>

50%

ljS3)

drain*

vwr~

50
0
SO
50
600
30
60
0

P
0

0
0
0
0

TXM97

TIM98

TIM99
TIM100
T1M10X
TIM102
TXM103
TIM104
T1M105
TIM106
TXM107
TXMlOB

0
0
0

TIM112

0
0

TTK141I

0
0

TIMl43i

TIM144

0
0

TXM113
0 TIM114
0 TXM115 j
0 TXMH6 j
0 TTMIX7|
0 TXM110
I
0 TIMll!)
0 TIM120

THH24

TIM111

TXM145
TXM146
0 TIM147
0
0

TIKI 2 5
TIM126
TIM127
TXM12B
TIM129
TIM130
TIM131
TIH132
T3DMI33
TIM134
TIM135
TIM136
TXM137
TIM138
TIM139
TIM140

0
0
0
0
0
0

TXM109
TIM110

TXM121
TIM122
TIK123

0
0

0
0

TIMll 2

0
0
0

0
0

TIMldd
TIM149 ;
TH4150

TIMlSlj

o
o

0
0

T1M156

tmisi
P TIM150
0 TIM1S9
O TIM160

TXM161
0 TJM162
0 TIM163
0

0
0

TJM152
rmx53
0 TIM154
0 TTM155

0
0

TIH164 I
T1X165
T1M166
T1X167 !
TIM168 :!
;

0
0

0
0

<

gmspr

J 10 ; 15; 50

i:
:

Omro/saiit

USER

[TIM]

IRS]

[RX.J

MftCttlitE

[]
:

Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> PARAM


PLC PARAMETER -> TIM

197

5
17.
MS

T
VftVKkr,

fi* \f**

H*>

HC
PROGRAM

#|

91

SAVE

Jfi

BB3SMB
SWM)

198

"

---

--

--

;200S/ja/15

TAPE

CMT

i
i

-T-J.

: 35

.*.-.*: \-L~ Jr-sr.r*

jwYss

FLOPPY

ii$fi

:<

p/<M ioo%

MSK

-----
-- ---------------

l
\

IfPS-O

CARD

!
I

..--

:
i

OTHER DATA

OTHER DATA

>

I
I
I
1

i !

I
i

%
m\
Ji *f

1 T

aI

'

DIRECTORY:

:
:

|
1\
I

i? i

PROGRAM

CAH DATA

sI

swe

dJ 55

199

200

..

y.y;.\-.-.\

! POSITION PR2J

21
B
Cl

X2

Z2

BUFFER

0.

0.
w4 . 5
0.
0.
13.30
15.14567

C2

0.
0.

xx

Q zi

0
Q
9
0

cl
X2
22

C2

Q w

XI
Y

21
B

NEXT COMMAND

0.
0.

o.

0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0,

0.

UNO,

*,

>

Cl
X2

6.

COUNTER
<MODAL IOW
S
0 F

Z2

0.

C2

NEXT COMMAND LOW

0.

->->

<

0.

0)

M
G 23

G
G
G

G 68
6123.16111

OFFSET LOW
z
4, S

ot
0*

G 18
G 80
G 67

9.56 97
1.13

&5Q , 2

0
G 98 G 20
653 5
6123 G
613.1

0 MXN1
0
0 FT /MIN M, iPDIi
o Mor1 T.r SPDL Ij
0 FT /MIN
o Miir1 T * BWBL 2\
Xl-lixj
0 FT /MIN

ft*. SPDL

<i>

SPBLl

<1>
T , SPDL2

<15

TNo .

<

MRGAZNPKHo.
(
LOW 108

<

12

Xftf/REY

0*

* /min

Cl
C2

0,

0.
0

LOW

8-AX

POSITION

SET UP
INFO,

O.

rprn
PROGRAM

0
0
0
0
0
0

TOOL

iVWo.Ot
s

C-COHD.

mm \
&

/min

IN /MIN

IM/REV

C2-AX|

/min

DATA

201

Select DIAGNOS

tvw

DIAGNOS

0
0

w'tr

El:Z006/12/13

in /min
PARAM

Cl-ftxj
X2-AX
Z2-AX

CE1

200

IN /MIN

0*
0.

W-AX

o%

100

YrUX |

UNIT :

V\J

G 40
G 64

i
i

FEED
1BT No ,
( GENERAL OUT )

Qj

REMAIN
0,
XI
0.
Y
0.
Zl
B
0.
0.
Cl
0.
X2
0.
22
C2
0.
w
0.

0.

US

WHO ,

0.
0.

MACHINE

Q
Q

S>>KSS>

Hefc

POSITION
Y

H*

rite Ym* Settp Window


xi

.vN>.;

W/A'

y-yff

0
8

69:44:27

/?,

DATA

TOOL

DISPLAY

I/O

LAYOUT

MAP

''

/DIAGNOSiSjUSW)
202

pile

Wm.

FV

View Setup WirxizM Help

;aLWi

W*iRM KISTOEOT i PLC SIGNAL

HEAD DATE

ALARM MESSAGE

No,

TIME

TYPE

m
O/Yr

0 rpm

0%

VERSION

ALARM

VV\A 0

V? !

,I

00 in /min

ALARM

PLC

MAINTEN

SXIHHIHG

GRAPHIC.

DATA

ACCCTMU ,

HISTORY

SIGNAL

CHECK

CONTROL

MAINTE

ERASE

TIME

Select VERSION

Jlmmmmm Wmlm1
Help
Fie

P||

<&

Pl

Winejgwi

VERSION ; DIAGNOSIS iJONITOR j OPTION j SERVO MONITOR | SPIKDLE MONITOR j KiRD-VOlKE WDHITGR

SERIAL M73682107 61

UNIT FCU7-MA513-22
j

ITEM

VERS ION
10O1WOO0-B4A

MAIM -A

MAIN-B
LG -ENG
LADDER-F
LAD D R S
LGPENG

1001W001-BO
1001W011-BO
1001W37 4 - A1310
1001W37 4 - A1310
I001W01137 4A1300 2

ITEM

MOTOR

VERSION

MACHINE

SRV-Y

SRV-Zl

<
<
(

) {
) (

>

>

>
>

(
(
(
(

(
)
)
) (
) {
) (
) (

SRV-11

) (

SRV-12
SRV-13
SRV-14
SUV IS

>
)

(
(

SRV-B

SRV-C1

BRV-X2
8RV-Z2
SRV-C2

SRV-10

<

)
)
)

i
(
(

SRV-16

<

SPN-1
SPN-2
SPM-3
SPN-4
SFN-5
SPN-6
SPM-7

>)

(
(

)
)
)
)
)

<

SPH-B

<
<

Oh
DIAGHOS

s i ID
VERSION

Or pm
DIAGNOS

MONITOR

ITEM
J2CT-1

J2CT-7

>
>)

J2CT-8
J2CT-9
J2CT-10
J2CT-11
J2CT-12
J2CT-13
J2CT-14

>
>
>

<
{
(
(
(

i
}
)

<

<

>
>

<

mr

TPS 0

:\AM o . 00 in /min
OPTION

VERSION

J2CT-2
J2CT-3
J2CT-4
J2CT-5
J2CT-6

>

Ell
r-i

FC&750RY-NQ3

<

SRV-Xl

SRV-W

::

MODEL

2006/12/13 09:44:55

II

SERVO

SPINDLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

203

Select DIAGNOS MONITOR

gggaa;

File Window Help

204

i VERSIQH

MACHOSIS MBflTOft j OPTION ! SERVO

MEMORY MONITOR 0ISP


ADDRESS 76543210 HEX
KKOOOOOOOO oaoooooo 00

KKOOOGODD1 oooooooo 00
KHOOOOO0O2 csaoooooo DO

I KK00000003
ADDRESS

j KKOOOOOOOO

00000000

00

76543210 HEX
OOODOOOO

00

KHOOOOODOl OO&OOOOO 00
KKOOOQ00O2

gooDDCioo

KKOOOO0GO3

00000000

ADDRESS
i

00
00

76543210 HEX
OQOOOOOQ

00

j KHOOOOODOl oaoooooo

DO

I KKOOOOOGD2

oo

KKOOOOOOOO

00000000

KK00009003 oaoooooo 00

ADDRESS 76543210 HEX


KKOOOOOOOO oaoooooo GO
! KHOOOaOOOl oaoooooo 00
KH0QQ00D02 00000000 00
HHOOOO00O3 oaoooooo 00

MONITOR | SPTtffiLE MONITOR

j HARDWARE

I/O MONITOR I) ISP


SHORT
ADR35 FEDCEA98765432I0 HEX
XGQ510 OOOOODOOOOODOOOO

t/o nmttm ntsp


LONG

0
d
0

0000
X00520 oooooooooooooooo 0000
X005 3O ocscicic>eDOOQec?CidJCj<3 BOQG
XQ054Q 0000 ODDOOO DDQOQO 0000

SHORT

ADR55 FEDCSA98765432I0 HEX

SHORT

TOO110 aaloooolaloooaal 2 111


TOO120 OQDDOOOOODOOOQOD 0000
TOO 130 eoOOOO<MWob'OQ!l& 0000

TQ0140 tlrnntl&QaoomQ

XWm

MJWG

643

TOO 3 60
TOO 370

0
L<MQ

0 -2147463648
XD0150 looooooooo oooooo 6000 -32768
XOO16 D 0000000000000000 DODO
a
o
0
X00170 oooo C'Oooooo:D oooo 0000
ADRSS FEDCEA987654321D HEX
0000000000000000

DOOO

HO10 5 6

oooaaoooooaooooQ

DODO

SHORT

H01072 aoooaaooooaoooaa oooo


330108 ooooaoooooaooooo OOOO

L-mo
0

T&VG$MSW?G5*$ZIQ

8513

-mzomsm

MX

tom

SHORT
0

OmoOOOOMdO!iN0 oooo
OOOOOOCIOOOOOOOD

WWG

SHORT
8513

CF00 ~t2W

TOO 3 40 oootsoo0OODOOoid<fO 0000


T003SD OOOOOOOOOGOOCIOOO 0000

643

X00140 oooooooooo-oooooo 0000

3301040

wx

xm%%

ARR33 FEDCBA96765432 10 HEX


oooo DO lo IO-OOOD11 0283
X00110 0000000000000000 D000
X003.2Q ooooooooooftooood 0000
XOO130 oooooooooooooooo 0000
XOOIQO

ICOIIITGE.

0005

IB RSS F EDGE A98?6543310 HEX


TOO0OO ocNooooooloool11 0047
T0001D OO*DOOOOOODOOQC)00 0000
wmZQ
OOOO
TOO 03 0 aoooooooo-oooocioo 0000

SHORT
71
0

kms% FEDCHA987654S21P HEX


00530 aoooooooDoooQoao 0000
TOOB40 oaaoooooooooooao OOOO
00650 0000000000000000 OOOO
00860 0000000000000000 GOOD

SHORT

LONG

71

LW3

o
O
9

MEMORY MONITOR If RITE

ADD RESS
KHOOOQOOOO

7 6 $4.3 2 10

HEX

oooooooo DO

I/O MONITOR WRITE


SHORT
ADR38 FEDC BA987 65432 id HEX
R02 100 oooaoooooaaooooo DOOO
0
Q
P02101 0000000000000000 OOOO

LONG
0

DB1
r\f\

0%

DIAGNG5

~sTT[o

Or pm

VERSION

DIAGNOS

HOHIT OR

W 0

VV\A 0 . 00 lw /min
OPT ion

2006/12/13

SERVO

SPXHDLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

09:45:13

WM

RWMMj

T POSITION [TR2]
fife

Vew

Window

Setup

Hep

BUFFER

POSITION
0.
xl

0.

21
B

-4.5

Cl

0.

21

0,

0,

Cl

0.

X2

0.
13. 38

X2

0.

22

15.14567

22

0.

0.
0.

C2

0.
0.
0.
0.
0.

Q Zl

?
0 cl
B

X2
Z2
C2

0,
0,

O.

M,

0.
H
G
G 23
G
G
G 69.5G 97
<350 . 2 G113

0
0
0
0
0
0

SPDL

<15

o.

T , SPDLl

<15

8PDL2

<15

->->

G 40
G 64

TNo,

MAGAZHPKHo*
)

<
(

UNIT

FT /MIN

IM/MIN
IH/REY
* /min

0*
0*
0.

ci
C2
LOW

Tv SPDL Xi
FT/MXH T SJPDL 2]
*
1
MIN

O.
)

LOT 108

200

MXJT1

0,

12

100

FT/MIN Mt RPDL

Y~*

* /min
*

/min

0
0

Zl-

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

B~AX
Cl-AX

O.

IN /MIN

Z2-AX]

IN/REV

C2W-AX

nil P

n % HD
POSITION

0
G 98 G 20
G53. 5
G123 G
G13.1

MXN'1

0,

FEED

TNo.
0
IB(GENERAL
OUT )

05

0(

4,5
0,

0.
0.

0.
O
0

>

G 18
G 80
G
G 68 G 67
G123 . XG1X1

<

OFFSET LOW

0,

Cl
X2
Z2
02
W

0.

Y
Zl
B

<

COUNTER
<MOOflX LOW
S
0 F

REMAIN
0.
XI

0.

mro,

NEXT COMMAND LOW

0.

MACHINE

0 xi
1

0
0
0

0.

WMTM

NEXT COMMAND

XI
Y

0,

C2

vmm

wswmttm

SET UP

INFO.

rpm
PROGRAM

TOOL

vWo.ooC-COKD ,

*BS 0

2006/12/13

09; 44: 27

in /min
PARAM

DATA

In the 1131 Mode


205

Select DIAGNOS

DIAGNOS

DATA

TOOL

DISPLAY

I/O

LAYOUT

MAP

/' DIAGNQSISflJSER)
206

Bte View

Setup Window

Help

j iLfcUM :j ftLftRM KISIGHY j FLC SIGTOL

NO.

j
HEAD DATE

ALARM MESSAGE

TIME

TYPE

&

m
0%
VERSION

MB
ALARM

Orpm

TPS 0

VV\A o . 00 in /min

2006/12/13

09:44:40

ALARM

PLC

MAINTEN

RUNNING

GRAPHIC

DATA

ACCOMU *

HISTORY

SIGNAL

CHECK

CONTROL

MAINTE

ERASE

TIME

Select VERSION

mm
fi

:fl<y

Rl? Window Hgfe?

VERSION i DIAGNOSIS

KOHITQP.

! OPTION i SERVO

MONITOR f

SyrWLE

MONITOR I K&HDVaRE

KQHITOR

OH IT fan -ms13-22

MODEL FC&7509Y~lf03

SERIAL M73682I07 61

VERS ION
1OO1WOO0-B4A

MAIN-B
LG-ENG
LABDER-F
LADDER- B
LORE NO

1001W001-B0
1Q01W011-BO
10G1W37 4 - A131Q
10011937 4 - A1310
1001W011-

ITEM
\

374A23QQ

;
S

ITEM

MAIN- A

M Model

0373GM03300

VERSION

<

SRV-Zl

SRV-B
SRV-C1

<

)
)

>

>
>

<
c

(
{

)
)
)
)

8RV-ZZ
SRV-C2

>

SRV-W

SEV-X2

SRV-10
SRV-11
SRV-12
SRV13
8RV-14
SRV-' IS
SRV-16
SPN-1

(
(

)
)
)
)
)

(
(

SPN-2

<
<

SPN-3
SFtf-4
SEN- 5
SRN~6
SPN-7

SPN-B

MACHINE

MOTOR

SRV-X1
SRV-Y

>

>

)
)

>
>)

<

>

>

)
)
)
)

)
)

)
)
)

(
(

)
)

0%

DIAGNGS

sTf(a

Orpm

VERSION

DIAGN0S

MONITOR

J2CT-7
J2CT-8
J2CT-9
J2CT-10
J2CTr-.ll
J2CT-12
4J2CT-13
J2CT-14

>

TPS 0

V# 0.00 ill /min


OPTION

2006/12/13

09:45: 55

v :-S

J*

SERVO

SPINDLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

207

The other VERSION will now appear

VERSION

>

m
r\KJt

ITEM
J2CT-1
J2CT-2
J2CT-3
J2CT-4
J2CT-5
J2CT-6

VERSION

( one way you know you are IN the 1131 mode)

Select DIAGNOS MONITOR

-m*

/'DUMTO'UKff''
208

Fil- Window

j
|

VERSION

M&SH0SIS MONITOR j OPTION I

HE KORY HON I TOR D1SP


ADDRESS 765432 10 HEX
KHOOOOOOOO oacoQOQQ 00
HHD0000B01 O5-000000 00
KHOOOQODP2

HHQOO00OO3

ADDRESS

| KHOOOOOOOO
j

I/O KCNITOR DISF


ADR3S FEDA9876S4321C! HEX'
SHORT
0
XOO-SIO ooaooooooooooooo 0000
X0Q520 0000000000000000 0000
a
0000

HOO540 oa a a 00000000000 0000

76543210 HEX
o3oooooo 00

ADR3S EEX'CE A98765432 10 HEX


oooooo lo loo ODD11 0283

SHORT

XOOlQO

KKOOGGQOG2

00000000 00

KHOQOO0QO3 00000000

XOQ530 oooaDpdOdOooao

76543210 HEX
QOOO00OO

KHOOOOOQOL

oaoooooo

I KHOOOOOOOO

00000000

AD PS 5
HOG 1 40
1500150XD016O
XOG170

00

00
| KHQOOQQQ02 oa&Poodd 00

ADDRESS

j
|

00

765432 10 HEX

KHOOOOOGQO 00000000

00

KHOOOOOQOl OOOOOOOO 00

| KH000000D2

EEDCBA987 65432 10 HEX

a
LCWQ

643

X00110

00

I/O HOWltOR PISF


SHORT
APRS? FEW:!W*7$543210 HEX
TOO!10 ooloooololoooool 2111
8513
TOO120 0*0000000000000 OD 0000
D

Larc

643

oooooooooooooooo oooa
3CQOUO ooQQ0>OQ0Od$$QO09 0000
XOO 130 oooooooooooooooo 0000

00

OOQOOOOO

ADDRESS

SERVO MHJITOR ! SPINDLE MHUTOR KSRtrtraRE KOHITOR

aooooooo 00
oooooooo 00

KHOOOOOQOl

j KHOOOOOOOO

....

He|p

wm

3CKrooO$0$toQOOCMi&

000P

lloolUlaooooQD

CFO0. ?12544

mam

TWQBtsmmwzm
OQ oooooQOooooGioo

HEX
OOOO

SHORT
0

OODOOOOQOOOOOOOO

0000

mmmamwomw

QQQQ

TOO 370

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOD

0000

8513

TOO130

100140
YQ034Q
TOO 3 50
TQ030

LCW

-8220835i4

mm
0
0

mm

ADRSS F:EPCB&987&54'3 2 IP HEX


TOODOO 000000000!00011:1 0047
TO0D.1O 0000000000000000 0000

SHORT

GOOD
0000

AD ESS FEDCBASP76543210 HEX


70083 0 0000000000000000 0000

SHORT

a
a

Y00840 00000000*00000000 Oado


T0O850 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OQQO

TQ086O

0
0
0

SHORT

oooooooooooooooo 0000
0 -2147483648
lo oo 0-00000 a 00000 8000 -32768
000000000000000a 0000

oooooooooooooooo 0000

APR3S FEPC8A987 6543210 HEX


HO10 40 oooooooooooooooo 0000
HO10 5 6 oooooooooooooooo 0000

SHORT

mm
0

daooOoOO 00
KH00QD00G3 00000000 00

HO IQ 7 2 0000 OPOPOOO 00000 0000


HO1088 oooooooooooooooo 0000

HE KORY KON I TOR WRITE


ADDRESS 76543210 HEX
KHOOOOOOOO 00000000 00

I/O KONTTOR WRITE


ADRSS rDCBA9876S43210 HEX
SHORT
0
02100 oooooooooooooooo 0000
Q
R02 2Q1 OOOOOOOOOO-OOOOd 0000

Y00Q20 0000000000000000

TO0O9O

00000000a 00000 o o

71

71
0

oooooooooooooooo 0000

hOm

LCN&
0

I
..

n
OH
DIAGHOS

s 1 i]D
VERSION

:VW 0

Or pm
BIAGNQS

MONITOR

flHk US

0 Gin /min

OPTION

i'>/>W < rf

vW'

v 1 v>

2006/12/13 109:46:52
I

: I

SERVO

SPINDLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

I/O

WHITE:

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

WRITE

CANCEL

Now the I/O WRITE & WRITE CANCEL appears

9 POSITION (TR1J
F?le View Setup- Window Help
.

POSITION

XI

45.912
0.

Zl

-0.30512

or

i
:

0.
13.38

22

15.14567 \

0.

Zl

0.

0.

0.

22

0,

gQ 121
Q 21

o.
0.
0.
0,

id

ci

0.

X2
Z2

c2

0.
0.
0.
0.

-i

UNo.

<

0*
0.

0{

i
0

0)

0
G 98

G 20

GS3.S
G123

4. S

0.

0.

Zl
B
Cl
X2
Z2
C2

0,

G13 < 1

! M* SPDL

0 MIN 1
0 FT /MIN M. SPDL |
0 MIN1 T , SPDL
0 FT /MIN ,
T SPDL 2 1
0 MIN*1
XL-AX]
0 FT /MIN

Cl)
T, SP'DLI
i Cl)
T SPDL2
:
(1)
I

0.

0.
0.
0.
0.

TNO

>

LOW 109

|
Zl-Axj

Y-AX

IN /MIN

0.
0.
0.

12

MAGftZNPKNo.

> <
<

UNIT :

a
Cl
C2

m/&m

ci-nxjj

X2~AXl

/min
/min
IN/MIN
IN/REY

0.
0.

LOW

/min

Q*

Z2~K&|
C2~AX|

1
'

W 10*
POSITION

SI [
SET UP
INFO,

G 40
6 64

OFFSET

0,

~>~>
<

> <

6
0.
0 F
M
GOG 18 G
G 23
G SO G
G
G
G 66 G 67
G 69 . 5G 97
G123. 1G111 G50*2 G113

FEED

TNO
160
(GENERAL
OUT )

<MQDAL>

NEXT COMMAND LOW

MAIN

MACHINE

WNo*
:
:
!

COUNTER

cl
X2

C2
w

0.

NEXT COMMAND

0.
0.

Cl
X2

C2

i
I

BUFFER
o.
xi

0r pm
PROGRAM

#A 0 . 98in/min

P1

$0M

ir

100

200

o
0
0

I
I
I
I
I

C-COND

P ARAM

DIAGNOS

DATA

I
I

Vm

2006/11/30 j III 01: 29

DATA

TOOL

DISPLAY

I/O

LAYOUT

MAP

209

(Important to remember when changing R parameters)

: .% ;;.v: vXvv.:y...

Matrix now goes 5 places right of the decimal.

0
0

0
0

i'

TOOL'

itlilArNnCN/MAVFD
(AKEgj::
210

I Fife

......
'

->

'

'
1

1 pg

IB

Wm6:m Hdp

VEBSIQH
?

DIJU2TOSIS MONITOR j OHIUH j SERVO MDKETOR SMMDIJB BOOTTOR { HSSDMKE 1MHITOR

HEHQP-Y

ADDRESS
HHOOOODOOO

BGNI70F DI3P
76543210 HEX
GGOOQQOG

00

I/O WCNITQsR BWF


ADRSS FE0CBA9876S43210 HEX
SHORT
XQ0 170 OOOOGOOOPODOOCl-QO

0000

7274496

o;

W1:1000 000 Q1 oooooo oo 00


HHOOOOOOOa oooooo-oo 00

XO0180
XO019O

XQQ1A0 Q<WNSDOOOK>OOQOCK>

0000
0000

KH0OOOODQ3 OOOOOOOO QQ

AH D RESS 76543210 HEX


HHOOOODDOO OOOOOQOG 00
HHOOOOOQQl ODOOOODO DO

ADRSS FJE&C8*9e?6S43210 HEX


MOO IDO QooooolQleooooli 0233
X00110 oaooO loaooOoo# 0200

SHORT

MH00000002 oooooooo 00

X00120

oaooooocwjioooooioo

MHG00OOOO3 0000000=0 00

XO013D

OOOGOOO0OGOQ0*G

ADDRESS

76543210 HEX

HHOOODOOOO GOOOOQOO 00
MHQQOOOOQ1 80000080 00

1101111 006 F

QO&OOOQgO

00000000000000-00

33555075

0000

0000

OOCHQOOOOOOOOOCKK3

0000

QoooooDD

00

00130
00140

000*0000000000000

OOOO
OOOO

MHGQ0DOOQ3 0-0000000

00

XD015D 10=0=000000 000000=0

8QO0

MH00O0OOO2

ADDRESS 76543210 HEX


HHDOODDOOO OOOOOQOO 00

ADRSS FEIKBA9S76S43210 HEX


>10011.0 oooooolooooooooo 0200

oooooooo 0=0000000 OOOO

00
HHOOOOOOG2 oooooooo 00

X0013O o0=0=0ooooooooooo-o 0000

MHOO0DDOO3 000000=00 00

XO014O 000000000=000000=0 0000

39H0OOOQOO1 0000000=0

XQ0120

76543210 HEX
HBOOOO0OO0 0OOOOO99 00

ADRSS FEDCEA937654321D HEX

R02392 ooomoolleoidlo 1CCA


R02 3 93 ooaooooooo loolo=o 002 4

YOD34Q ODOGOOOOOOGOOOO

0 -2 147483 648
-327 SB

SHORT
512
0

LOMO
51.2

0
Q

SHORT

SHORT

-e22083Se4

hatm
0

ADSSS FEDCBAWR? 6543210 HEX


ODOOd =0=000000000000000 QQ'OD
OOQQQ fcO0oa&oOQr$&OQ 0000
00000 0000000000000=000 0000
0000.0 =000000=0=000000000 0000

SHORT

ADRSS FE&CBJM7 6543210 HEX


YDDDO0 0000000=001000111 0047

SHORT

:
ham

0
0
0

Y0OOIQ =0000000000000000
00020 0=000000000000000

0000
0000

71
0
0

00030

0000

0000000000000000

i
LONG
4673 I

0
0

GOOD

Y00350 OOOGGOOOOOOOGO 0000


TOD3 6.0 OOOOOOOQGOGOOOGO 0000
YD03 7d 0000000800000000 GOOD

LOWS

I/O BCWITOR WRITE

tCEHORY MONITOR WRIT!


ADDRESS

SHORT

mm

ifjcwiTOE

S FEDC-BASO? 65432 .10 HEX

ham

643
512

ADRSS F E DCBAS8 76343 2 10 HEX


XO012D

i/o

SHOW
AMS* FEDCB AB7 $S4 3210 BEST
YOO1I0 ODOlGQlOO1.00000 % 12 41
4673
0
mm# o m ommtmmmm o QOQO
0
0013O 0-OGOO o D= cooa o-oooo 0000
rm i4Q i ioo % i xioGQoaooQ CF OD ; -12S44

LONG

W.
71

L me

7370
36

t\/\/

10%

ITIJi
VERSION

TPS 0

2006/11/30 11:05:09

W\A 0 . 98 ill /min

Orpm

><<>**

DIAGUGS

nwX<t<uWAvAvhMvM<vi

jjMgtr

m
DIAGNOS

MONITOR

OPT I

c **iv

SERVO

SPXKDLE

HARD1

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

LADDER

I/O

WRITE

MONITOR

WRITE

amCEL

Stay out of here unless instructed to.


Monitor all addresses in this area. X,Y,M,D etc.

O!AGNOSS(MAKR|

1 Fie Wndaw Help

Mats MMKOSIS M3KH0R OfflOM j SEKVO HOHTTOR j SMHBUB MMHTOR j MKSDlfSEE KHUTOR

KEHOY MONITOR DI3P

ADDRESS

76S43210 HEX

HHOOQ0DOOO

oooooooo 00

J3H0QQQQQQ1

OOOOOOP'Q

QO

| HHOOODOD02

00000000

00

HB000DD003 OOOOOOOO 00

HHOOQOOOOO

I/O HONITOF !D ISP

ABRSS

FEE>CBjL98?654321fli

I/O

HE I

0000;

TOD140 1loo llllOOQOdOOO CFDO

SHORT

QO

JLDRSS FE D CBMS 76$ 43 210 HEX


ZOO IDO 000800 iQlOOOOOll 0283
ZOO110 OO 0000 lOOOOOOOOO 02 00

| HH00000002

00000000

I ZH00000003

OOOOOOOO

00
00

ZOO120
ZOO130

HHOOQOOOOO

76543210 HEX
oooooooo 00

TOQ120

HHOOO 00001

00000000 QO

X0Q13Q

HHQ0000003

00000000 00
oooooooo 00

ZOO ISO lo a DOO OO0OOOOO0O 8000; 32768

HHOOQQQOQl

ADDRESS

moomoooz
|

AX' D RESS

76543110 HEX

HHOOOODOOO ODOOO0-&O 00
| HH0Q8QQ001 oooooooo 00

0000000000000000

oooooooooooooooo

OOOO
0000

1DRSS F.E D CB A98 76543 2 10 HEX


oaooooooooooaooo 0000
Q0O0>PO0O0PQ0Qa00

512
0

AftftSS FE DCBA9878S43 210 HEX

512

Hfl00GQ002

oooooooo 00

ZOO120
0000
ZOO130 o oo ooooa oooooooo 000#

0
0

HHOaOODOOQ

oooooooo 00

TOO 14.0

OPPdPdOdTOQQOdPd

0300000000000000

00 QO

-#22083184

km%s Tmcmmi6B4mio HEX


OO O Q O0=00 OO 00-00 OO 00:00

SHORT

'>000

00000

OOO00CJ0Q0OQ00DQO

00:00

0
0

000.00

MDQQQ0QQOQBO(3

OOOD

wm

o
0

ABORT

YDOOOO 0D0O10'0001000111. 0547 ,'WQQm . m&ammmmmm moQ


TO002 0 000000000000000 0000
T0OO3O 080Q00;OO OOQ Si>0 Q O 0000

tows'

0
0
0

..MMHSS FEDCBA9876S43210 MX.

512

SHOT*?

00000

wm

SHORT

-12544

mi.

OOOQQ wQomQQommoQ

Y00350 000o40ft60e4000 Q0OQ


TO03 60 .00000000000000.00: O'QOO
Y00370 000000:0000000000 0000

QOOeODlQOOOOQOOO 0200;

4673

0
0 -214748364#

QOQO

LC0

4673'

700340 OBOOOCWksopOOODOO OOOO

L.om

ZOO 140 ooooooooooooooao 0000

ZOO110

SHORT

OD loo lead ioootscJt

Mm

LOMO
33555075

643

SB!

'

0000;

ooer

00

7654321.0 HEX

mo110

7274497

oooooooo
oooooooo

ADDRESS

MSP

JJQNITOE

mSS FH>CBJ8?6S432iO HEX

1241
TOOtZO'
OOOO
TOO130 oooooiooododooo . 'OG0B

ZOO170 0008000000000001 0001

zooiio 0000000001loin i
ZOO190 OQODOOOo a ooooooo
ZOO1AO aa & o oo oa O Dooaa o o

LCM&-

SHORT

hotm

/!

mis
0
0
0

:V:iQ.-:|

1
I/O HONITOR WITH

tCEHORY KGHITOR URITE


ADDRESS

7654.3210 HEX

HHQOCJOODOO OOOOOOOO 00

JfcDRSS f EDCBA.9876543210 HEX


02392 00o.lt lOOtl 00 Id 1-0 ICCA

02393 oao&oooo&olooloo 0024

SHORT

7170
38

LONG

2$m$m

Ig

kt>m3 FEDCB AR876S432 10 HEX

10%
DIAGROS

MB

Or pm

VERSION

BIAGN05

MONITOR

mm

V# 0 . 9 Bin /Akin
OPTION

mu.

2006/11/30 11:06:56
jr

SERVO

SPXRDLE

H.

MONITOR

MOHITOR

HbHITOR

JWARE:

LADDER

I/O

MONITOR

.WRITE

irnmmSM
CmCEL

211

Use this area for forcing.


You may force up to 4 addresses.
XOO170-1 forces on
XOO170-0 forces off
Powering off the control cancels all forces. Use this button to remove forces. WRITE CANCEL then INPUT.

mM

212

Fie Window Help


VERSION DIAGNOSIS MOUTIR | OP110*1 j SERVO MfMTTOR

MEMORY MONITOR MSP


ADDRESS

76543210 HEX

HH0000000Q 80000000

00

HHQQO0DQQ1 90000000 00

HH00000002 oooooooo 00
MH00000D03 DOGGOOOO 00

Alt DRESS

76543210 HEX

MlMTfOR Hmmm Kfl&WTOJR

i/o MONITOR \m?


ADRSS F E DCBA9876S43 210 HEX
SHORT
200170 OGOQOQQOO OOOOO 00 0000:
200180 ogdopood d 111111 POST
K00190 0000000000000000 0000
2001AO ClQ GO OOOOO DOOOOOO 0000

ADRSS FE DCBA9876543 210 HEX

SHORT

o-ooooooo 00
OOOGOOGO 00
oooooooo 00

>700110 ooooooioaoooaaoo 02.00


X00120 000000000.0000000 0000:

512
0

200130 0000000008000000 0000

76543210 HEX

ADRSS FEDCBA9876543210 HEX


200120 OODGOOQOO-OOOOO'OO 0000

SHORT

HHOQOOGOQ2

ADDRESS

MHOQQOOOQQ GOOGOOGG

00
HHOOOOOOOl 00000000 OP

200130

OOOOPOQO&ODOOO&O

HHQ0000002

oooooooo 00

200140

ooooooooooooooao

HHOOOOOOOl

OOOOQOOO

00

200150

IGOQOOOCIQ

ADDRESS

76543 2 iO HEX

BHOOQODOOa 0GGOGOOO 00
HHOQPOOPPl 000000-00 00

ADRSS FEDCB A9876543 210 HEX

00

HHOOOOOOOl OOOOOOOG 00

200140 0000000008000000 0008

MEMORY MONITOR HR2TE


765432 ID HEX
HHQQOOOOQd 80000080 00

LONG
0

512

4673

SHORT

LONG
0

0OOOOOOOOOOODOOO

0000
Q0DO

ADRSS FEDCBA9? $543-210 HEX


00000 000000-000000=0000 0000
ooooo mmommzQQmm&o oo&Q
00000 0000008000000000 0800

SHORT
0

0800

ADRSS FEBCB A98? 6543 2 10 HEX


YD 0000 000000800 loo 0111 0047
TOGO IP aooaaoooooaaooeo 0000
700020 0000000000008000 0000

SHORT

YD DO30 8000008000008000 OGDD

C0OOQ080OGGO00OO

-822083564

Y00370 0000000000000000

Y003 60

LONG
4673

0
0

OOOOO

LONG

SHORT

0000
0
CFOO -12544

ADRSS FERCBM87 65432 10 HEX

0 -2147483648

SHORT

HEX
1241
0000

Y0D340 OOOGOOOOOOOOOGOO 0000


YDQ35Q 0000000000000000 0000

ooooo oo 3000 -32768

200120 aooooaaoa-oooaooo 0008


200130 O0OGOOOO0OOOOODO 0008

ADDRESS

ADRSS FEJ>CBA9e76S432iQ
YOD13LO coo 1 J j 1 c-o Lcocoo 1
YOG12 Q <3-6OOOOQOOOQOCOO
YOG130 oooooooooooaoooo
TOO140 noollliooQOODOO

urn
33555075

0000
00OO

512

OOOOQOOO

20011.0 OOOODGlOODDOGGOD 0208

! HHOOOOOOOl

7274496

643

HHOOOOOOOl

i/o MONITOR vmp


Lorn

2001 DO QQOOOOlOlOOOOOll 0233

>

111

HHOQQOO0OO 0-0000000 00

HHOOQOPOOl

j SpntDUi

LONG

M. o

0
0.

LONG

71

71

0
0

I/O MONITOR RRITE


ADRSS FEDCBA93765432 ID HEX

SHORT

:'h

LONG

7370
36

ooollloolloololo ICC A
ooooooooo-o loo lo o 002:4

\J

10 k

\J

mi

S3 H P
rpm

VV'-A 0 . & Bln /mill


:<,:*//// vpx

I*

. : x vy,:

JX;

;;

flft, 0
:v$ .<:

2006/11/30 11:02:36

:H:X -WVV*.

iDRESS

I?

'

ADDRESS

>

4-

Use this area for searching R parameters. Force under I/O Write.

Use this area for changing R parameters.

PIC PARAMETER (DATA TYPE)


ADDRESS
ACT J Vli

M KM OK Y

K 2350

STANDARD

CON.Ml: NT

H 2830

**

Long type
R 2380
I

2880
1

2
3
4

5>

213

R 2390

R 2890

>

*7

R 3980

s.

TOOL LENGTH MEASURE SKIP SPEED

ns m /
cn i

TOOL LENGTH MEASURE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERPAID

DISTANCE OF THE TOW SENSOR SKIP AND DEC.

2 AXIS SKIP POSITION

ni

1 AXIS START POSITION: Of TOOL LENGTH MEASURE

V AXIS START POSITION OF TOOL LENGTH MEASURE

X AXIS START POSITION Of TOOL LENGTH MEASURE

TOOL

BREAK AGE ALARM LIMIT

300

17

<

25000

20000

(7874)

214

Long type
PLC MIA dm TYPE) PARAMETER

c:omm
1

STANDARD

RL

BELUKE ATC BLOCK l

AXIS POSITION of 1st AXIS

Si

>

BHBO KB ATC BLOCK l

AXIS POSITION of 2nd AXIS

$2

BEFORE ATC BLOCK I

AXIS POSITION of 3rd AXIS

S3

BELL) V

ATC BLOCK 1

AXIS POSITION of 1st AXIS

54

BE LUKE AtC BLOCK 2

AXIS POSITION of 1st AXIS

55

BELOKB ATC BLOCK 2

AXIS POSITION of 2nd AXIS

*7

BbLURb AtC BLOCK 2

AXIS POSITION of 3rd AXIS

61

hi

BBLOKB ATC BLOCK 1

AXIS POSITION of 1st AXIS

SB

BEL 0KB A 1C BLOCK 1

AXIS POSITION of 2nd AXIS

50

10

BE I '0Kb ATC BLOCK 1

AXIS POSITION of 3rd AXIS

60

1i

BEL UK B ATC BLOCK 2

AXIS POSITION of 1st AXIS

61

12

BEL UKB: ATC BLOCK 2

AXIS POSITION of 2nd AXIS

62

13

BbLUKb ATC BLOCK 2

AXIS POSITION of 3rd AXIS

63

U
15
lb

17

64

OOMBHf

RS>

mmm

Short type

...

FIX BIT PARAMETER <RB1 RB8>


KB No.
i

BIT

COMMENT

PLC DEVICE

RI 1156

0
1

2.

3
4
5
6
7
0

ENABLE E NOR ILL TOOL MEASURE


TYPE OF FEEDBACK X
TYPE OF FEEDBACK V
TYPE OF FEEDBACK 1
TYPE OF FEEDBACK 4

VALID

INVALID

ABSOLUTE
ABSOLUTE
ABSOLUTE
ABSOLUTE

INCREMENTAL
INCREMENTAL
INCREMENTAL
INCREMENTAL

3
4
c
D

7
8
9
A

MAGAZINE MAX TOOL NUMBER

< NOTE 1

Ml OH NG. MAGAZ INE TOOL DETECTOR

D1SAVA I'LABLE A V A I TABLE

*}

4
5

SELECT TEE T CODE *M06T**"

NOT *M06T**T***
AXIS MOVE AT ATC BY PLC

2 PALLET CHENG ER

<N0TE2>
ONLY PROGRAM BY PLC
VALID
INVALID

Rill 57
n

3
4

5
G
i

"AUTO "OFF
AUTO "ON
LH SAVA 1LABLE AVAILABLE

COOLANT MENU AT POWER ON


ONE CYCLE SW. OF PALLET CHANGER

TOOL MES. EQUIPMENT AT ATC

ARM

FIX

*T

>

8
9
A
B
C

El A ATC METHOD

T CODE

MO 6

AXIS MOVE PATTERN AT ATC


AXIS MOVE PATTERN AT PALL ETCH ANGE

Z-XY
Y X

XV z

3
4
i:

B
E
F
0
I
2
3
4
5
6

D
E
F

mom
If 1001
Ml 002
If 1003
Mi 004
SO 005
10006
Ml 007
10008
111009
Ml 010
in oi i
Ml 012
Mi 013
MIDI 4
Ml 015
Ml 016
Ml 017
MI018
Ml.019
Ml 020
Ml 021
MI 022
Ml 023
Ml 024
Ml 025
Ml 026
MI 027
Ml 028
B1029
Ml 030
M 103 1

215

216

Short type
PLC-CMN PALAMETER TABLE
R

El T
2'M.10

3
4
u
I;v

8
9
n

3301

D
L
F
0
i.

3
4

&
6
f

9
a

B
C
1)

COMMENT
MANUAL MEASURE
TOOL 11)
VARIABLE TIMER
VI 00 ONLY
Vi 00 ONLY
Vi 00 ONLY
m: CONTROL.
FMS PALLET ID
EMC CONTROL ID
RS232C 1 PORT TYPE
TOOL ID R RESISTOR LOAMTHERMAL DISPLACEMENT OFF SET
THERMAL DISPLACEMENT MACRO VARIABLE WRITE
VI 00 ONLY
TOOL ID SERIAL TYPE
TOOL ID EUCHINER
TOOL i, ENGTK TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ
TOOL LENGTH TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ
TOOL LENGTH AT WRITE
TOOL LENGTH TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ
TOOL LENGTH TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ
TOOL DIAMETER AT WRITE
TIME TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ
LIFE AT WRITE
FLAG TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ
FLAG AT WRITE
ID NO. AT WRITE
DATA AT MANUAL WRITE
PROTECT SPINDLE TOOL AND NEXT TOOL NO. OF MUTE
READ AND WRITE TO LIFE CONTROL DISPLAY
READ AND WRITE TO ID NO. GROUP NO,
TOOL DIAMETER READ AND WRITE TOOL COM, TYPE A

VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID

INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID

VALID
VALID
VALID

INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
TOOL DATA
COMPENSATION
COMPENSATION
TOOL DATA
INVALID
TOOL DATA
INVALID
TOOL DATA
INVALID
ALL DATA
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID

VALID

INVALID

VALID
VALID
VALID

VALID
VALID
LIFE CONTROL
OFF SET NO.
OFF SET NO.
LIFE CONTROL
VALID
LIFE CONTROL
VALID
LIFE m TOOL
VALID
ONLY FLAG

217

9 9LZ~ 0009

ItfOHS

OS T 002

W
.]

/'

\>0
I

/
/

\s

j
i

9ESS9 ItOICI mWI 88CKS 9iSm)I ISUCOI

DN01

tOCtilt 80988C8 9Uiii.9I

J.80HS

CCM-SSCC f9880K9 SEitUni 9Stj*893 I160L89CS

t-C8If'iLC i.01

8t9(.8t.fi:

POOO oooo-oooooooooooo o>TOOX


X2H

I Z t 8 91 Zt *9 8ZI 9$Z Z\S KOI

St-QZ 960

c6I8 t89I

Q9LZZ

......

99LZ~ 0008 ooooooooooooocc ~

os T 002
o-ooooooooooooooo
OH COX
0000

S1

mu

0000 ooooooooooooO'irevr'oc 1 002


0000 0-000000 O OOOO 0 0 CO OCT 002
JH o i "O' $ 9 L 9 ms ;> 131 s ?; < i Y

218

219

220

sy

;
;]
K

if
r_
"

5T?>

ja

JA

MR-JT-CT

SAVING PARAMETERS
221

222

MR-J2-CT DRIVES
Wm

'

.. ..

I IfiaSt i
I
is

m*

BIS MU

V-

*- '

m a1

III

#4
s
ft

K*!W. f

mlmM

|MJUtCt

KPS

.f it

m I

if

Kl

Hv'ft

X.

fi

JNSH

iftce
9

iiaiisiP
S fee Cl

91
:

!5'i

Mi
Mil

SM

s?

as

&

mmmmmmmMMMmMMMmmfmmMMmMMtlMM u*M
c

xt
is-

PMSMMMMW
wyy>ywsyyyyyyy%yy>%y>wyy
:<

MMMIMMMMM
iMMMiiMiiMM
a

wmt

>Xx?K-S

Kg

ss

K3

i*:-

>

sm

2fc

X-.

SSSB

x*

I1mMMfMWiWMMMWM0MlWMMM
VJ

SS23KK

iS

tSxS

<-xc

>*X\

MWW1MWWWWMWW1
K

/,TL

,sv

s?

>X'

*3

ssSS

X><J
*3

>Xr

SSS

rim W
-J53

l#L

&

mm

$3

f:Fil
te#
W'

lat*%M

MSM
||S

sS

--r!=?,0

>>Xx-

L%
;n

|jli

3SKS&;

3?

flfel
J&m

m m fil
&*
ViSlI IOTS

*!SlfSMmmmm.Itafe*
#P?
\

:Xx?

>y$

rm

/r

HD

co

V*A*TJ>--*.*>

223

224

mmmmmmmmmrnmmmmm
352

SR
KaK>

'

K
2SJ

<*

$1

tgj

Intel LN+Modem

PC Card

S| WinZip

tfj Documents

Main

<

jS
Q

Settings

iU Run...
| l|yil

Shut Down...

Hltari

MS-DOS Prompt

CS

.:

illtlieJ
a
f>.

/S*

/' ftp/

Hi

E
&

P
4#

gi
MS

/I

Printkejj

Internet Explorer
-

Ml

ill

'

g Startup
g WinZip

Pin:
Help

_g

,:

-'

g NetOp Remote Control


g Online Services
lg ORiWOCO

MMMMI

Lg KEY HISTORY

IS MR-J2-CT-M6 Setup S_W

Programs

MB

mmmmm

g MAZATROL FUSION 640

-ri /

Desktop On-Call for Masak

ig

ig

Outlook Express

(oQ Windows Explorer

tills

mi

IffI'FjFile

(S.)S efcup lWlMonitor.

_*i

|>r*MMtsp

lAJAIarm Qpiagncsis
B

i.i,

A'-0~:<V, ',,

'

:- :

cplppt SetUp-Axis
CptT rn A vie Tnh
Select
1 abs'K"

HHBBBHBMHi
UIIAlifUipSAI*
!

Siaiii*

;.*

:.

225

ij'Aaa iAeUACTUvAy fvu,;:

IBIBiiS

226

MR-J2-CT Setup Softwaie (Foi MG)"MAGAZINE[Rotary Axis Spec.)"

| (F)File

(S)Setup (MlMonitor (A)Alarm (D)Diagnosis fPjF'arameter [T )T est-operation | (U)SetUp-Axis (H)Help

MAGAZINEQJ

Axis Select(C)
Axis Spec.(S)

&

a*-

lisffiir

HH

1 n Si

a
MU
mm m9m m

AMR.J2CT Setup Software 1st Axis*


(P)Fite Setup

(Monitor

Liner Axis Spec.

(A)Alartn (PPsgnoss (P)Paramefcer (T)T$$fc-operat:iof OUjSettfe-Ms (HjHefci


L

'

BB

'L.ijj

Il

S HHB

MBS

w
I

:Krh:

nil
niH
:

ills lit
i

227

SELECT PARAMETER

228

r.

o'

iPV.Vd'WfcSf

UTO ,

_______

1
~

sif

Pa.aUe

sr-ss:

Nuirfee N-srmc

itw:iX,

Rtename ;

'.m;:
1

'

::.V >: :siiPs/:sV::::;-S::::;;


j:>:

*i*ui

sIHjHgsp

...

llli!

As

TTr:
1 1 in#

~ ~trr
i

SIS

~*1

SiSSSKSS

S':

PARAMETERS ARE BROUGHT OUT ;EROM THE MR-12 DRIVE

''ISIS',;
S : i:SS.
'

SS
i;

'

:
': '

'

.-

wmm -

: SS'SS'S
. 'S'.
'

SSiSSsii:'

V/f kEfat)

Detailed):

!.

Comparel

ADS Poi

---:

r~~~.....
,

___
_

S- S'

SSliS

Al read

li

::

iiss

>*<

0>

<

'M

'*

<

<

h- "

PMNM

wv*$m.

Si \

iMsm

is:

lialSeifl

Chants fed

'

Erd&l

Press All read

Pop up window will appear....maintenance; All parameters will be read. Is it O.K.?


Press O.K.
Parameters are brought out from the MR-J2 Drive

- . ~ .. ..*

.I' l

i
M

TTY

ni.

(P)Fite Setup ('Monitor fAjAlarm (Diagnosis (Pparm&ter (TiTest-operation (UJSetiWs (HjHete

mrnmm
s

WtfM

in

Parameter table-

aasa
sH
,.

sap

" '-

File name:

j Nurrfce Name

Set value

U rd

Setting rang

'

[
'll

'

-J

111:

Yvi
. . ...

i
!
i

iTCTl
':

ill

T%*i\

/|

.?

:D:i:?5K:::S::::::sS;-S:::::i:s
3

I:

t\

Please turn eft the servo ampfe after seating the parameter vath the 8,t- tga

~r

WrrtelWf

Detail Inf (I)

Ccrrcafe.10

AJl read
\\
1

|1,
-

'

I
All wrlJ

iiilili111

Change kill]

'

Mial Sei||]
End)

iP

- I

T
:

SELECT File

SELECT Save

'.

229

11

230

mmam

Save in-

pINGSTONfEl

zi

*>

is O in*

:Zd LADDER
My Accent

mi

m\

Docurnesnte

s***

!
'

Desktop

3
9>

Z 1
~

My Documents

ji

~~

__

_
.

My Computer
:

$vto

fife HiSfn:

Save as (ypts

My Nelwoik
Races

*pfl*

zJI

Cancel

i
'

. _ . ;

'

VrsteMI

Competed

Drtrfw..m

iia|fl*(

AJ\ffltfQ

All >e4*

-J

chaw lastly

U:;

MSi
i

Save in (Where you want to save) C: or E: etc.


File name (A name you will remember)

Press Save

Parameters should now be saved.

Use Windows Explorer to verify.

hfcidSeS

'"'Si
5r

wis*>

Swi
~v

,';

2S a'H
Cra1
I

I$

V*

MR-J2-CT

UPLOADING PARAMETERS
231

232

MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For MGJ"MAGAZIHEfRotary Axis Spec.}" - [Parameter list}


& (FJFile (S)Setup iMJMonitor (AjAlarm [DJDiagnosis IPjFarameter il)T est-operatiori (J ]S etU p-Axis

liiaiPi
, [H)H elp - It?!
MlltSm
*1

'

V-j:

si

ave[S]
intfP)

ir

table

''A''

u.

mmm

4.

HE

File name :

vOi

\<* s.i

vj

nd(Q]

,;

Setting range

Unit

Set value

..........
.............
............
------

IS

v;

II

Select Open on File


......
Fab

. i
.......
- ..

Iill

m
m

T"

II

4-

4-

i
\
\

t,

tfi

1
I
I

II

|1 >

M
m

&
!

s mmmmmmsmm
/;Y;

!!/

.
.

the
Please turn off the servo airolifier after.. setting the. parameter.. with
:
ppp
.

..-i :<W.

. V V-V-

>)

I/-1

Ev

!.

Detail Inf . (I)

Compare (C)

;Ml

II

m:
:iV

Write <W)

V/iM.

V,

Parameter value

'v:

<

!>)

'ii;

;<.rj

i,
X;

d;

Set
read.P):| all
I
|Change list,L)g Initial
taissi C 8 p $$-1IIp pi |-/k) % End(Q.)
:

writ>I;tKj

V-

ABS Pos. Repair (A)

sign.

Hi!

'Ay

/y

>::pp

i&n V
M

Vs'l.f

:i

.
; iSlssSi-ii
'

..

*V

rr

1#

'

(E)

S:

vl

-M

.....
......

|pfgy

S;.

JT

.Lr''.

aaa

,
S / ;w
j
'<* ~> C
S.F .! .1 ..
\* t
(F)Fite (S)Setup tMQMonibor IA)Alarrn (OSQnosis (P)Parafiteter (T)Tet-operaUi (ytSeit-A>S (H)Heb
i

I. '!.

a.

>.

dBBhiwm..
: Parameter table'*
Mi pl ??F:ci I i
'

"'

'!j

Unit

Set value

[*

S etting range

iu
.

'

WW

.;:

'

.:

mm
_ ___':'WM

'

Mm

Wiimao
Detail W.flJ

.
........
....---

mmmm
Compare

& Parameter

the

*?

sm

rWSKKHHSfSBSm
I

....

lililiiliililllP

liigliiM

All vwtdUS)

AJI read

Change Mi)

initial $e

I MMi : ~
* * ** . I

<*

I::

.;

MM.

mm

SELECT Open on the File Tab

'

M
-

.;

4-Sit

Mil

II

End)

l:>

ijil

1
l
,i

bdl

lil

| Fie** turn fc the servo ** mm

r-r~

..........
--------- ......
-
. . .. . . . . . . .
i

US

tSSSf *

'

[ Nurrtbe Nam

wsmBL

......
.
~
i
Fib name :

':

S
:

233

234

locfc in'

'*&

Jli

KINGSTON | |

** ia

tit M*

SB!

Op.-n

JjLADWA

mMnlH i

MyRflccrt
Documents;

>i

SelirpgTiwia
:

D GSkkp

Hj
-

OP

My Dcewients

&

ili

My Computer

Mjp Network
Races

Opsn

Fite name;
Fites oHype:

Cancel

jfcprm

TSPSTS'

TOelST
D<W Inf (il
i';S

HI

mm

..

j
I

saasifflis

Mit&m

mmm

Cbanpe

Intel Ss1((

irnm

WM1
mmmm

Look in (Where you saved it to) C: or E: etc

File name (the name you would remember)

Press Open

5>* MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For MS)

-"MAGAZINE (Rotary AKIS Spec.)" - [Parameter list]


(P)Parameter (I)Test-operation (U]SetUp-Axi$ [H]Help
11 f)File (S)Setup (M)Monitor (A'jAIarm

[jyDiagimg

~
Q

Magazine Selectede?

Eile name : ft: \INDEX. PRM

Parameter table

Numbe Name

:Motor series

Setting range

Ifni

HE

0000-FEEFh

: Regenerative

:
1

0000-FFEFh

: Motor gear ra

1-32767

: Machine gear :
:Feed pitch

1-32767

36.

1-32767

1
I
i

deg!1-32767

: In-position Verify-enoi
: ftuto tuning
: Position lo

&

#007 #008 #01 9 #020 #021 #022

: EMG-decel t

Please turn off the servo ai%

Write <W)

Conpare<C)

Detail Inf . <I)

|All write

ftll read<P)

!C

0000-EFEFh

4-1000

ii

0-20000

0-32767

1 ShQvhidPjffeijyices

0000

: Motor series

*MSR

OK

#001

IndexJPRM

'at

#001 |*MSR
#002 *RTY
#003 *PC1
#004 *PC2
#005 *PIT
#006 INP
#007 ftTTf
#008 PG1
#009
#010 EMG

- lr?( Xj

<K)

I Change list (L) I Initial

is. Repair (ft)

Set(E)

End<H)

235

0 Press Compare
mm

236

Go to SetUp-Axis and change Drive


Select Compare Again

237

[Patamelei fell HM.igixi


|'R]Parameter ;jT)Test-operation:;t;|tJjSetli)pAxis::::''!'(H)Help

1* MR-J2-CT Selup SoHwaie (For M6] -"IMDEX TABLE(Rolary Axis Spec )"
238

it1*

If] File [SjSetup [M )M onitor (A'lAlarm [D]Diaqnosis

,;v :; -:; v;,,,.


Bile name

/V
Parameter table

Mm

Set value nit

Setting range

;w i;

ft!
&

:Motor series

0000

0000-EEEEh

-RTY

degenerative option type

0000

jOOOO-EFEEh

#004
#005
#006
#007
#008
#009
#010

: Motor gear ratio

*PC2

: Machine gear ratio

*PIT

deed pitch

360

Please

sWI

AT

:Auto tuning

PG1

: Position loop gii f 3

EMG

: EMG-decel time

>.

4-

; 1-32767

'w.rwi iv*vw

...

turn off the servo auplif :*

3ud /sec

il

JA

*MSR

'A

v>

Coirpar e

<

All read(P)

I m II
%m

Ml write <K)

hBS Pos . Repair "(B.)

ai

.Vrf.r'* IW' Vt
'

&i i

WM

1 Change list (L ) I Initial

|||

Set<E)

j?

Be tail Inf . (I)

M
i

WMim m
:v.-;s

Write <W)

>

|3 mmi
1 1 "|
~

raft

(&MA

II

0-32767

-WMfssOK

0000

: Motor series

4-1000

JJ4iV

#001

I
I
m

sSSSSe
|
a

0000-EEEEh

sec

'";|

a$

1-32767

0-20000

__
"

m flOOOdeg 1-32767

/erifiJ was completed. t


,
\

1111* if i A::
4

&

*17

SMMMN

mm ;

1-32767

deg

Parameter-maintenance

MM

Wmm,

*MSR

: In-position det<

>

|IS

K'

#001
#002
#003

INP

'

vV;

Numbe Name

*PC1

JffJ

'

Endra)

A-A:
H'

Press ALL Write


A

V-

|||MFN2-CT Setup Software (For MGJ"IHDEX TABLE[Rolary Axis Spec.)*' - [Parameter, list]
k.V EJFile

[S'jSetup [M)Monitor (AjAlarm (D)Diagnosis i'PIParanieter OTTest-operation fiJISetUp-Axis [HlHelp

-Ifll'/

*1

m
Pararneter table

File

narK

$3

A:\iNBEX.PKM

X X

Nunbe

#001 *MSR
#002 *RTY
#003 *PC1
#004 *PC2
#005 *PIT

:Motor series

: Regenerative option type

:
l

: Motor gear ratio


: Feed pit ch.

0000

: In-positio:

#007

ATU

: Auto tunin

#008

PCI

: Posit ion 1

EMC

1 1-32767
1-32767

ideg

1 1-32767

gj

i it
>
!i
Cl

1
i

bi\4:r*'3 tl\t 9 JLV/M

All parameters will be written. I sit OK?

- :v

fflrag

mi k im

;
N;..

it nit*

.AY-

0000-EFEEh

V:

* * }?'/$<

I#
XT;

1
V

iSi
:

1 $$/ii
|
lliiif iim

a*

Write <W)

0000

Motor series

*MSR

Detail Inf. (I)

Compare (C)

0000-FFEFh

MS Pos. Repair

0-20000

'A

mSs />

ini

iSlsll*Wa 'iWBIliM
A

m I

0-32767

iYi

.
Ill
Im
t&

I3
I
t

4-1000

WiiMmiMi
m Wm:& the g||
'Su.

fill read CP, )

XI

wmx

If m
.X-

sign..
i/::

#001

Leg 1-32767

Y t

&

I
mm sc

III

V:

: EMG-decel

Please turn off the servo

JParameter-maintenance

INP

<

I
I
I

360

#006

0000-EEFEh

!l

: Machine gear ratio

0000

Afr;/r'/,A\vVAWVAV\V MVCIM

#009
#010

Set value Unit ,

Najre

Ax,

t,

VIA;

gx

:M it

1*1

$1
&2

mi:

239

iilill*

240

.lelxl
MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6)-~"INDEX TABLE[Rot3i)i Axis Spec ) - (Parametei list!
fFjFile (SISelup- (M )M onitor (A'lAlarm |U)Diaqnosis .fPJF'arameter Test-operation (UlSetUp-Axis [H )H elp
Iffl

;:vParameter table

v ;

: Tile-;\::jiame

u,v.-'

*RTY

:Motor series

t;(.\say*u

TNy e.y

<<c>.*>

*PC2

: Machine gear ratio

1
I

: Auto tuning
: Position loop g

: EMG-decel tine

t*

ii

360
W&.1:*

uc

Detail Inf. (I)

Ml read<P )

I
a il I ?:
i
: ft
I

m
IS
s
1
t8
si

;5

SJ
S!a*IIiifiBi
I

*.V:

il

'it-

v2i\>.'c.i i-i'Jc-C' ',

11''sigh. miisssf

inleter I

HHHM|
_ __
W'l.*V.WOl

Ml wite(R>

1
II
H;

BI i

0-32767

UBS Pos. Repair ( Bl)

PressOK
;';v

!.

4-1000

ill

Goirpare(G)

m11

w-vyy:

0000

i i3i

,: MM
Mm :: fc

:I

/-v-.-r i',:

EH

i 0-2 0 0 0 0

'>,. ('/;.;.\V> JwVO.v/.'r.t

VTrite (W)

0000-EEEEh

rJHWtt9L

Kv

il

r1000deg 1-32767

!vVriting:was-.c.orupleted. id/sec

Motor series

111
ill!n

range

;0\i\

-=-,

1-32767

ideg

Ml

turn off the servo airplit


*MSR

> y/?

11-32767

S.

#001

:d* tl
AiVvf/fcv-.i 'x? 'Jci /; yw vyr.v.;*iV>*vi
*/y;

11-32767

1 .......
Please

-/:CCA

0000-EFEEh

Parameter-maintenance
F

0000-EEEEh

: Motor gear ratio

VZ

v/ :.; &*

v ./.;* )>$

0000
!

:Feed pitch

v/,< i?

I Sett ing

i 0000

: Regenerative option type

: In-position det

:. :

Set value Unit

*PC1

#005 *PIT
#006 INP
#007 MU
#008 PG1
#009
#010 EMG

:.y ;; r.t

Numbe Name

#001
#002
#003
#004

-;

>:
.*

*MSR

n .

..

, _,

Sc
v>;

MR-J2-CT

SETTING ABSOLUTE HOME


241
I

# MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For MGJ"MAGAZINEfRotary AKIS Spec.)"

BBliil

242

'

'

'

IFjFile ISJSetup (M)Monitor. lAWaim (DjDiagriosis (R]Parameter ITJTest-operation (U)SetUp-Axis (HJHelp/


\MAG.AZINEil]
Axis Select(C)
INDEX TABLE(2)
HI- r Spec 13J
,

WSmmEBB
m

M
1

1SI111III

I msP

jRjj

ri;1

mm
m

i|

IIS

mmmi

m
m mm

Ills
ais
i
i:

i40Siam
mm.
:;V.V,

151

ISIS
'

sHSSiJ
mm

SSlisiililS
mm

HIS

I
|pf

1
y

giS

iiM

Sffii

>

ujjeiV.I

mmm
VV::

"

Joiiuow(w) dnjasts) s|!d(dJ


-v'&'r

243

Sii

MSM-

WMi

is
CL

1
Pit

v<;V.

3 X

A;:

S*-

ui

S*w

wAQffi

*:

c
o
**J3.

?-;

Ij

2
JD

*S**

cm JS

5
E?
ro 0>
.o
u.

~n

r\

QC

DL

i&

'*!S /

:s

i;; rmm
,

"

Vfe=

I?

;S

3-,..

IS
$

OJ

Ir?1

***

Ilfto
3E

u. A
<J
:.
vm

:,o; c
O

cm

>

fa

>

cmV

CL

3.

fPS D
CJ CO
-.I :.-

CM

r?
DC

X'

42)
(D

1
it

!i<0*
ISS
la

SI
11

244

iH

-P
i

01
O
MH

ft

O O

ai

-i.
to

OJ

y\

S5

CL CL

Q.

>uli

w
w
o
cu

P.

HI

*4

I*TI

J-l
111

p'

OJ

sz;

;Z3

0.1
4J

H1

01
i i

5> l

as

PH

Tl

01

m
*I

ID
2
o>

tr>

WM

g .O
-._y

CD

'U

m tb.1 Ml
sfc
Lu

LJI

ll

is

ms,

OJ
H

to

if

-p

4*-

Q)

0M

sss

fe

i-

iU

V>-V*.T'0 ,

0
-p

L-l

i i

ft

.!2
o $80

SI i

c
D

CJl

.Kv

siss

&-I

.22
*
Q

Mrsi'

Vpjilj::/-;;

&

ii
BH
w $*m
mm
ifeP
win?*;
HiSi
**
ill piaS

m
wmm Si S gp
mvm.

'

;-:i

a 00t
m
<
m

f I*
I*
H
:P4

;;V-:* Vi

:m
II
IS
;

sisp-

%%

'__v

CD

mm

gill*

p. liSl*Hilfl

'

Jfl 111

...

<
LU

-*

If

p
PStH
tessiS 8
*'

D>
m

wm
tpcjl
-rV-1W*v

i-'io4
to

lilli

Sill*
igjU
;Mv-S

AM.

'

mm

mi
ai
01

*iH

I
0J

P
I

PH

L.

O
P-,

TH
i

iij

4-*

1 I

111

P
H

iSm

fflSjH

msm

Hi
iWiis

:!i!l

Baa

$$MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6)-"INDEX TABLE (Rotary Axis Spec.)" - [Test operation]
[pit;

IMNcriilO;

MIIIBSJ '0

i;

wm

"1
/t

ypsx at, it o.J'J


de-grfes

i.
i: z l : iia*.' i. fi L
::'v

'cunetei:

Jog

group 1 :bc

i V Vf ;

I i'Lbboiuuo

M
__

-1

rit

'

Cii. jlip

JX

......

phsit tori init'iai set tl).


'

St II

Completion

...J

mull!

:
>: :

Isct. lifee
I tie g re &

...

-**S|

*-"'iVf.r.P.

-It

23

to

'

P's s

;; CP

s;

ivV/,

.O

CflPliStf
;

245

iSHST

IIH

MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For M6J"INDEX TABLE (Rotary Axis Spec.)" [Test operation]
246

tV

(F)File (SjSetup. fM)M onifcor [AjlAlarm

Position

359.648

iPjF'arameter

Operation
degree

Step
Ref

Parameter group

return

"

Jog
Step

P a r am e t e r g r o u p

nr i'

Initial set

....

:gmm i

rnmm

Completion

Machine edge
degree

7 j
Rt.(R)J

ij

stOB<0)

MMH
0 . 000

W?

Origin-Set (S )|
.

Zero Point (B)

Reverse

Absolute position ini tit

Origin Set

-:

Hanua

Initial set

auuui

kut/

f~

-J
73|

iPM
Pl
f?

a-

192.744
. . Ufcv.

gsanatiM

The test operation node is selected.

I:::-.;--'.

'

'

mBM

.........
..........

# MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6)"INDEX TABLE (Rotary Axis Spec.)" - [Test operation]
tV (E)File (S (Setup (M (Monitor [A}dlarm (D (Diagnosis fPParameter [THest-operation.; fUlSetUp-Axis

Sl&ill
ng~
i
m

><v

v*v

l*

iiV

P5wi

P.v;<;'

Vt:

;!/V.:'

m
Mm

Step

degree

2<J

.1

Operation

359 . 648

era $

Position

.1*1x1
I'HlHelp -Iff!
..

'

<-

vv- mt

MHi

<0

SC

K-xy

Parameter group

: Step 2Eiocle:l/f ee(a||l(

51i| 1

1 degree

Parameter group

#NfBS|Ri|L

'-- W

r-T-

1/ 1000 degree
Absolute position ini.fc 1/100 degree
1/10 degree

<

0 . 000

degree

edge
Machine
. v.

, d;: :. "V '

'

. ./i-'.--;/.M.'...:i;:v:-/

192 744

rt

: :

'

DS

181111111

Jm
.yv).v,

lliili

v;r

i.

Sill

WMM%
.

;
4 1*

Piet ion

Zero Point (B)

/dif

MlPli
-Set S )

Iiid> al set

Origin Set

.;-

mg

v.-.

1 degree
Initial . set

?Si

x-rivd
it i

Mm 'Mr#
ta

);

_d_mBm

flfE MHnHiR
aMtflwwwM8ir

""
RJgfippi
degree;-, InpL
d

.<.*. iVU'i l.V

failliti

V\

5) v

j-

/'

mip

i
is

*':

P-.

jg

Ad
v.

:v

A0;:- 1

ft

The moving destination station number in automatic operation is selected.


If 0 is set. It is a special instruction as one station rotation.

/;

{$&

?<

yi

*'A

247

", || v

;:mL

mm:

.V

MX

ft

mm
'.V/At/ 1

d:

ii

Wm

&

;-

HR
m

&

\;

vu livUi WSkw HrIffllSwiWM)

$$ MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6]"INDEX TABLE[Rotaiy Axis Spec.)" - [Test operation]
248

( fij
wM p

I'FjFile (S)Setup (M)Monitor (AJAIerm [Diagnosis [Parameter [DTest-operation flJISetUp-Axis iHIHelp

11

3 6 . 648

degree

j::l

?; .

&

Origin-Set <S)

IS'M

Initial set

Initial set

lili!

degree

192 . 744

V;

jsjI

JlfiSSiS

''

|
.

i.

Machine edge

Zero Point (B)

stop<0>

mar

Completion

Origin Set

rm0&
.

IPtFerse Rot . <R> I 2

v-R

V :

1 degree

Absolute position initial set (A)

0 . 000

Rot. (G)

Step inode feed

F1 ar ame t e r gr o up 1

Step

iNormal

Parameter group

;iil

Operation

Posit ion

degree

It is possible to stop xiith the SHIFT key.


:ui>y

/
'

-V;.

pti

-:V

>

: -i ,

lllillilllillll

S'* MR-JZ-CT Setup Software (Foi M6J"INDEX TABLEfRotaiy Axis Spec.]" - [T est opeiation]
kV

fPjP.arameter

(F)File (S]Setup (M)Monitor (AJAIarm (D)Diagnosis

degree :

Parameter group
P ar ame ter g r o up

fU IS etU p-Axis !'H 1H elp

It? I

Step

1zl

,
.l] 1
I|
,
I
8iaagillaai{iiiaaii
rnmmmM

Step

-**-

1 degree

Absolute position initial set (A)

rm Sr t/VtviCtv:Origin-Set <S)

<l

Bev. Eot

::
'

Initial set

Initial set.

lilffpjlMII

-OOP

/top<0,

Completion

Origin Set

_-_

_______
Machine:

Zero Point -(B)


0 . 000

Operation

Position

3 6 . 64ci

fTITest-operatiori

degree

edge

i
ililllllflHMSRRMKM

Tp:;'

192 .744

MMi

.0,V:'

i
OdlPiApP
__A_

;
;
,, <
ffi7 n;
stop
SHUT
to
with
the
possible
key.
is
It
?Jy!

a i.tei tfjSpgi
m
m

Ena(S)

Vi.

|1

tv

i
;

249

....

ftf?MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For M6)"INDEX TABLEjRotagy Axis Spec.)" - [T est operation]
1

250

iFFlis (S)S*4> up ; (MIMqpifcir (AiAlasra Ijipagnodf


;

-.

-...i.. l_i (

'

.J o g

|degree

SWSliiia* illllll

I.

Ref

=.

Up 1C Sr t- l ull

return

PterKS;t;e:feu'gro'up
i

a ;:arr \ e t e r g r o u p 1

SelectJoa
_
A; 4

>4

1113

.......

v a:

Click on Box

dr let r ft
;30

r ,:
&

Comp let: ice

;&g
is to Point

ilsohine

192 744

............
----... "vfKCT!-

.: ,?Sty,
v'e:

Udldd

mmmv tm k<-

.......-

";.

in :;1
v-V..

degree

'*

r t ,
t-'crtc

<$M<W

g.'

!s*ai
IF
mm fil
mggmm
a,

best operation made is selected.

>

..; V. 1
1. V'

""ji

I'l'li.a

Bgia

it

>'?

*
'Cs'J

'

?$MR-J2-CT Setup Software [Foi MG]"INDEX TABLEfRotary Axis Spec.)" - [Test operation]
TS-'iStup.. i3bl]Hprtitor;-;-:(&jisc/v UrJk* iayi, ;o:si* [Pracsige
?.- -.
- \ .v

4 > it '

. '.E-: '*'. .> ..

: .'-* V . *..

'

t1 .

j\

- i

.,*.--,

'

If lift i

i.
;

!'-

r ai:mm t e. r
s-i *iC:

gr o-up.

v./:

.....
:=;

u e r gr o up 1 up

ii

iSSSEtS

X will a1ppear

;...>.,

......
......
.....
..-.N
L

(;

'-

IfeOlmne 'ecig;s

mm?

set

192 744

_ .:

alii
'

'

/*

0- -V::
'

is snanred in Jog or Step mode a.nd match to a sero point of the

[machine .

jSisase push <Origin Sat < S ? >

.....

nMMMpfc

degree '1

I\rSh.e

/'

insi.U-Bm-1
:

-Origin
I,.*

Ur

i-.,,,,,,..

Po:i

.......

_J

i f ! ff
,"i

Fftt?oKl7''pc=iSn

.Zejro

||||||||j ;p|

riapHHi

MHtttai

button,
2a

251

$MR-J2-CT Setup Software (Foi M6)---"INDEX TABLE(Rotaiy AK'IS Spec.)" - [Test operation]
252

l':

Lip-Op iM.jMo.4or

:;,;

'DLino-r-;

i t ion

1?

&

| <v F.b s Q1 u :: e ;pos i *.> *1 n ;.ina

>/

sat,

Origin

Oar.trine edga

-;

<

>.<

> in I

v\m.

itSSlilf $0

The a>d.& is moved in Jog or Step usde and match

Imscft:i :ae ,

...

r~447~i''i L: ii,
'

iniapaSji

to a -zero point of the


..'..

<

JQrigin Set S ) > button.

:' :

c.

-MM&MNi

-2?

mi

please push

mmm

......

V- !

iv:

;.\;Lb

Pi
n
Depress Origin-Set
I

F a c sme t e.v grp


! F ar nme r. e r gr o up 1 : :y.

wr*i5

ru n

}T !l.tni::

sin

ivi

=J.

r
:*!v

1S1SII

Op*

mmmm

MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For MS)"INDEX TABLE[Rotary Axis Spec.)" - [T est operation]
tV iDFile gjSetup [M )M onitor (A'jAiarm
s*
BP~
OMI

330 .051

degree

zJ

Jog

P ar aicie t e r gr o up

IK

!i:/k

>zi

Absolute position initial set (A)

(Si

'

Zero Point. (B)

gVl

.'

>-

End(a)

<

11

Machine edge
<

degree

192.744

degree
>0

; ;.lv-

The axis is moved in Jog or Step mode and match to a zero point of the
machine ,
Please push <0rgn Set<S)> button.

253
i

(G)J

Origin set

Origin Set-

0 000

..

V 1 >

-
- \ygm '
ilf
S)
Origan-Set

Initial sat

Initial set

-..oogpi

I jNownal
y

'm

Parameter -group

-i

*
Ml
mm
Depress Norma! Rot.

;f 1

Operation-

Position

Jfllxl

lpllp

254

Axis will Rotate


Will Stop at Z Phase
new Home
ThisAt is1 not
c r
Cycle Power on Machine
_kse

K ,1

66 '//

/'t

wmMiiiiSi

US

I
{[

ttiist
mmm

miim

fKfflSK

m,

WiUfSMSSiSiit

MillMI
MiMiSMM

iiiiiii

!!

NN"

:<sg?

=li

A
%

%Mi

W&m

tar

sssg
fyA

aV'*' f
;1:

g?

Si
50

Sggg

tMimMM

!l
;

IS8ii

iB Start

IIIIISI

mimmm

2*

iifiiiiii

Bill

% r

.M

mm,

<5

>A

s*

IST/ i='JS%

<3

mmmmm

.. .
.....
A
.

.- .

y.

-." '' /. .

ft

Sa

X--N>

,9

SIBII*
w
is

>Xs\':

&

<3

255

256

w%

':c

4*

Spls

jjj

HH
ri?

HI

I I'J WiriZip
j

lj Programs

.
-

Documents

Ig

0 Help

| IJ Shut Down...

1113

;<

m*

S'

liitili

1|
v'.sYV/-. *%.//iA'A'y

vm.

Main

g MAZATROL FUSION 640


Is MR-J2-CT-M6 Setup S_W

MR-J2-CT-M6 Setup S_W

mmm

g NetOp Remote Control


g Online Services

MMMM

g F'rintkey
g StartUp
g WinZip

Settings

Run...

fg

" g ORiNOCO

| ,:3 Find
*
.

g KEY HISTORY

&

SwT1

g Accessories
g Desktop On-Call for Mazak
g Intel LA,N+Modem PC Card

V -

m.

Internet Explorer

MS-DOS Prompt

C3 Outlook Express
l)

Windows Explorer

<;*

;r

HI

K.
4-.

3je!SP
257

::

.......
..........
.......
......
.....
.....

"*

J b >:t . sjsj

S;j!.' hiV ' b-

Mnfe: ;

S 'SJJ:
I

->n

';

?.

iliildnps Ps

i.

gffttfHHl
v'*,'\

i-

i < i. .'**'' v.

;<-bV-\~bi:r'i:>

"*;i|lil
I

ISM

IF'

M.

:' "

;
V-v

mt

jiii

>M

258

**

MR-J2-CT Setup Software (Foi M6]-,'MAGAZINE(Rotary Axis Spec.)"

I'FjFi'e (S;Setup (M)Monitof

I
I

[
_

(AjA'arm (D)Diagnosis (P)Parameter (IJTest-operation (U)SetUp-Axis iHIHelp,


.

||||M

MAGAZINE II)

JEB3E3BHII

SgfAg'S#
wgggsis

s mm a

mum
;

Axis Select(C)
Axis Spec. (5)

m
m

t.

T;.;a

%
.

'

'

'

. |ag

iwi

j.

1.

&

r,

H
-J

#Sn

.....
......

V!!i

'rS-

; V,

v s'rk* r

j
i" A

Ji-V.* i ',M5

Aa

1FJFile (SJSetup [M]Monitqr I'A.larm

fPJPararoerF.r.QlTsM'PtstipiiAlM-lS'etid'pjKi'C'AFfHOHelp.

;;5?!

259

Si

IgfiSiarc

wW1

><

i.v.v

##<'

ij

'/

PWR!l2r situp Software (FoijM6)iMAGNElBotary Axis Spec r


j CEFile [S)Setup (M)Monitor lAftlarm [D)Diagnosis PjPararneter '., .lljTest-operat

'1
260

::

3*

: :; *;

Position

degree

.i l

Jog

i
"

Par sane ter group 1

P Absolute

> ta-

Initial set

11
% Re1verse

I - 81 :vi |. ;

&

_
r

,11 ft fiw:;:
"

degree

i:

1
b

ft

as

_1 B 1
11Pi!
mmgmmmsmm
smm

:,;.y;:-.

prltAft#
degree ;
j'jt-t

Y-iV*-

Julia

*>

r
P-tv'

':

fcV**

It is possible i to st

PS

..,

Mi

vv. aj

isppfr

V;

s l.gulu*'
i
I
1

',$ Cancel

'

MS

Zero Point (B)

E)

Operation by the external input signal becomes invalid in the,test


operation. Is it UK ?
.
f

OK

I1

I
*8
.pi,,

T est-operation

*p.MUMP
1
i

mw

i
u

'

WY3jn

pi

< 1

Ro t . G )

Normal

>

W> '>

. ..,..

d
P

posi

'

..." /
Vjiv.V :

:v

ftjjv

;Vr

18

.SX*J

sa

Operation

Parameter group

vtf.

.'!;

WW#

r-r

s Tflpa,rph
I'iv
1

X :llv;'Vvv.
- vf!

prrS.iv >>>

f.
J

.:V vV
/

%i

.- ;
.1

Pb,

iai8Ills;i

;<-f

'lllil

iia

$$MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For MB]-MINDEX TABLE(Rotary Axis Spec.)"


File

Test operation

sjp?:

Operation

Position

68 . 689

degree

Ref. return

; n;

f*

{Parameter group

# m'M

dis

position initial set (A)

I18
xil
se JUjt;v<E)$

&
$

<

Wf$M

?>V

Origin-Set S)

**.<>

}!r

J.

Normal

\\

TMial
fiuitornat ic

r~

r Absolute

.. . . .

Para tie ter group 1

mm

EC

Ti

Ref return

A
mm

\|

IJJ jS etU p-Axis lHjHelp


Im x

|S)5etup [MjMoriitor [Alarrn [D'lDiagnosis (P)Parameter iTJTett-operation

81

mm siistsis

lii

jmmmmmmmmmmmMl

",y

o \<

'VVM >

Initial set

Initial set

foXsV

Origin Set

mi'.

;v

iI Zero

Ilaohine edge

Point (B)

0 . 000

..;.; v,V

v Vi,/'

Completion

degree

68 . 950

M
1

W-

V.

degree

y:

Ov

if.

ft

End(]l)

1:

SS
.

I *111

_ __

llwpl

The test operation mode is selected.

261

M
is

ri.;.'......:n;,:,;:;;2: IVAA

voo

m
H

I
1|fl

262

Axis will home to new position

263

264

Servo Drives
MDS DH
Black in color
400 volt
Quick disconnect of motor wiring
Has a replaceable fuse for control line
voltage.
New generation power module
Fiber optic linked.
265

266

___

Comparison DH to CH

r*'

_____

Interface

iWWjjffB#lTi4-iilli. J*mrHmms
FiberOptic
Eectnca
F
|
.
y
I
V.-

Motor temperature

measurement
Spindle Motor
Encoder( PLG )

Thermistor sensor
cv

Analg

Serial Interface
h
;yz-?:

Servo Motor
Encoder pulse/rev

Thermal

HF/HP motor
WM;
(4.000rpm)

mm

swigpl

sl"al

HC motor
(3,QOOrpm)

41

i
sg

asm
SisIHisalii
16 million p/r
yj_

ui

-i

m
ii
m
. ;

Features and Enhancements


mmmm
High

::

iw

"

iTi i feTiS *3|11wii* r


T-V

mML

i iffifftlwl*fiflf *mW&.

w&w.

?vSi

M New CPC CNC unit and 1 6 million pulse encoder ensure high speed,
;

high precision operation in sub- micron control,


B New servo system and 16 million pulse encoder with smooth interpolation'"
improves roundness by 38 %. (VARS,AXfS500.,R25rnm.F1000mrn/mtn)

A':-

:V;

X,

AS,:

H New offset method has been developed to control stick-slip and spikes at quadrant
changes in circular interpolation.
-}f

iw

*li m 2 1 mm

.
sritf

fSW

MISS r arid Ihign Speed

; ;

Current'Control

fi High efficiency spindle motor and 5 times higher frequency current control, amplifier
reduce motor heat generation by 12 % .( high speed , no- load operation)
IS;

267

......

268

Mr-J2sB-CT4
400 volts available
Enhanced and new parameters for better

performance
Auto-Tuning is enhanced.
New alarms, including overheat.
Capabilility to upgrade the software of
drive.
Easy disconnect instead of terminal blocks

MDS-DH

mm

:..r
i

mm

lg
JmLJwSisl MM

11

;
t$&W
V

ill

Jlffl

.1

jl

Ti '

if

r.vy

fill
mm

K*

lil

If
U.

issif

Mil

IIS
iw

<

;i

r!&

I Mp

A
ES

illa
>

J
ill

111

33S
.

iJ?'--

J. :

'

P-;
-''>

tea

111
it
B
15

asm
i

v:f-

:|

gS

-*

Wz/

..'.vfr'fr

fV:'
js

ij

K-VT,:

f;

|fljjf
m

>

.f*

p
f L/U

'f-

Quick

269

Disconnect
Motor
Leads

270

of_Drives_

Top
Fiber optic connection

|gg3g-

IB

mam
.'-rb-*...

4:

IPIifcSSJ:

*1
illil r

liB

l'.

ll!ggg

E5?

mmI

i-as
i;

Sji

JI?

r :

mum

u;

Pgywjwn

Wot

Jpg

ste

.::

%]

UPSi

;J

smSSBi

: !:

i i .'
H; IfffiSS
I ui

****;

I :,;

<

TP

iyg
S'J BoK*M'
ga
m m 'frcf

$ rt

|H; .. ;!|l
p-~i -- ta|

jSsi;

IP'vvM
sllimKKS

I gg m

:-

p,

:;.'l$*.,(Ai.

mem

ft

fy

Mm

X:

I~!T

J-I

fip

j,

;i

v;

:c;

:i|

liiHi

;.V:-.*F

w-"-i

M
ilfazj

#la INIMi
r
v..

- :::; rit

'}
m

,W4

I?

3 l*jilr

$.;4

*i<y--. '>../&.,

LF

1
!

I ir

R| $JL
I JiA

w.;.

Wi

g?

'

>y

It

..-.y'Mv.

.41

I
IB

aaaauSSg

>

"V

!3

|i

*: ;
>i~

'

'

If*

.
-4:

li isc

Srj

m
J

io

i;i,

can be in
Battery for Absolute,

ri

out of drive.

mS-SSS-l
i

"

271

t:

ikb4

TS

*yj(

5-tf

&gf S

Er~

WSBBM

Mm
P*j <&j

-.

ip

w
A

,S

ill
w

on

jjLjW;

f.

&

r.

; guLZE

.__

||fe J

TO

ws**Wss'3c

JilSTjf,
SSMSSMI li

Mi

3h
v-

:i

i
pHawi

9H

sgs

ITH

rSva

sgffli

uoipeuuoo

kfc

ii

322MfflniH?Lt a st

*f|

gflflsl

MU* '-w|
ns

L I

ppppl
KiMaBsra

4
f; j

mm
:m

H*MA

:i

:.

it>
=3?
rrr

m
i
:

PR

*3

I*
illi
i!i

Oil

-.a

-";

1
iiii

AO 0} OAjes

;W~~
IM

WMm
i-U

1111 WBI?V,TH

B
-.

:V

8i

;g2i

a*:Sf.'>'-:.

rr
r i ps
*
iss
su.P
1
fSm
il; $* ||
' ;;

g\ !f
1

o!
'

ptefea.

rj

si

:N'

*33

x:

as

':

MS

OI
O
CM lilSL.
I

w*

'. .

si IS
:v

;X.-<V'

IS

.:;-'VX;Vr

T*'

|- s.j- a
g- il 1

:'i

</;

x
s

(Xy.v>

V;
>.-

>-'

M
Iv

'

a
'.
&.

&>

- ''-i'

'

.-; *V:

**.-, :V.

ft

<.a&

*y.;Vv

//..;.

till

III!
I3:>vv

! pI!l l|i xi11|Iff xf 11!!1

jiXrXM
feiX

-
.

- gr.wrw ...-

:
r.;

.'

g
;

: Iiiiteikifeif
<

v-

'A'*:.'

tX-'X

.....

: :..

Qdii-

M l

{a

rr*U.

1MBHiiiffl

r laga

M Kwm
* SA-yuro y yy:-:y
ai: _-

w&sfesaeD - 1

yyyy-s

j--..

:al

I iniiiiiM

;lj

v
'i '1'

f I#.

'X*STf.

>

Qi'lS?

: JZZ S

v *

"

yv

::S'V

C ii

wm h pi

272

i* r*

Wi

|itx|i;||>|f!|v
III ...|I|

[K

CM pI

IE

31

X*

BB

X:>-

;:

18

.*.

*.

ci.VXS

(/) %

fix'

.-j

fmS\S

gigs

y.

:e-

<?

$l*5

;J<'X

~-

...:'

-*

*!

! vf si?[

cn

::$ v.
w-v*

Bltlgs

.;..8S .;:

&n 1j ! ilp.-f
'Hri -d lifis
J

:1

i
2

>r Xs Vrv

'

,i;

i:,- ,

V ./; \

ft 4|ltli

%Ht

M*K

&

*; ;\'
-H-l-

.v

*;

M .

IC2

Xv-

iii

LJ

*4

X-i

-' :.: ;. 'r.

118111?
**

B?

Q'1

*>'*. >

aaa

BE

'

IS

Mi

:.Yv:'>

H1 11
Si

SUffil!

HR

'

Hit

:4Wli9|

IfeiaiaPa;.

Mi
V,

:-

I
UMIS
;; -pam

-9

'

;|

f:.

f.\

MR-J2S-200CT4

,'v

*SM

-J-Vt:

111

: 1;
i.

'? -i'l. ;;.

Lj;

400 volts
'

31.IIS!i:
i j Si
11

Jfe

:V

wim

;i-

Larger than the equivalent MR-J2


Uses 24 Volt for Control voltage (MCC)
Has Quick Disconnects

!!
X

?:

;
:

&

Disconnects

I!
:

.la

S]

IY

I;
::

I
L

5
<.

i;

-T4-

'1

:-

**_

rf ii.

ih?

:
t:
v.
rfC*

'Kith:
%_ 1'V 0
'

wiS

&
i

1 11

i
Quick

J*I

CV'.-tt

'

ill

-Li

m,

&

Si:"-':

:i
[

if

@1
f

FI

273

sa

y
r

is

:- -

j.

'

libs tiamaflirf 4

iipi

274

Mr-J2S-350-CT4
400 volts
Terminal Strip

fJVinsUBSSHI
*10.aVci<<&::

wBaB

V* ' v v

AA' ''

w%m

M
A

/V''MBiiU|m

IS

Sffisg

SB*

24 volt Control

if

iif?

11 I
n

,,:A-

w.

IE
a

rip HB r>

AA

*
AA
AA-E.

PPL

<l.

5*y

AA

'

'v '

ig

ft

........
...

ftm

l";

5?~S

!(

#A
|
A i

a
if! - i
A,

IE

BPU *
:IilE
I

WV A!

ET

'

.
jfe
'IwKatesgigBga

m'A:

fiK1,-'
:

V-V

ftiiifiiiafc
?,M'r>..mJ

EE

i
A':

WMMM

A
a

u
I. E

liPsT

j:

{;

g3g;en' HMW **
aatag"

; I
IS

rm
HI

A:

if*.

EE tEu

I!

iy

!ii
if A

iih

P I

''-

>vy

>

,-&iu

1111
;;

HJHI

I A / Jill
iS-lS EE..
- -- J mBKSSBSBBm
H
rawiifcM
JsM
-UN

WL

<6

$K<m

BB

A.

9,

4A.;:w 3SStfSf*K

n
3

si

KM!

;*
r-:v

I K,.-'
!'

'I' ?:" ;.
.

' ''

'

V
'

JE

jfV|

Si

-v .
"

K.-;:,v'

p-

jf

'

.v;;::.-g:V:

-1

am

BB

Kill

H-dH

sum

Im

iBiSSis

SiSllilSIgiil

L1

PSi

,..-

,J

./

y-.

..5
mil

;-

j
'*

;*i

KS||5

JP*

IKraggjg*

-*

a
I

275

&

276

Spindle PLG
Spindle Pig TS5690 is a serial type and is used

by Mazak. Every machine but Integrex


Consists of a pig pickup and connects directly to
the spindle amplifier. (No PreAmp).
Waveform adjustment is not needed. Only need
to set the gap distance of .3mm
Cannot view waveform, so Mitsubishi is
preparing a diagnostic function in future to
pig or drive.
determine whicn
Checks position and speed.

Spindle Pig cont.


Used on Igx200 to 400 series ERM289 plus APE391 H

(H/H) Heidenhiem
Reason that we use is that the Heidenhiem can get to
higher resolution than can be obtained from the regular
pig unit.

Phase A waveform rides 2.5v with peak

to peak of 1 .0

volt. Turn dial on pre-amp, one is for volume, other is for

phase-shi.T
Phase B has same adjustment.
Adjust phase Z so that is 60 percent of Phase A.
277

278

Spindle Pig cont.


Spindle Pig TS5691 is also a serial type

and is used by Mazak only on Mpx or Igx


machine for lower milling turret. Gap is
.15mm

MDS-D/DH-SP series
The adjustment manual for the spindle PLG
TS5691 (Spindle serial detector)

Tentative version

* The

adjustment manual contents of the serial detector TS5691 series *

1.Application

2.Type name
3.Serial detector TS5691 composition
4.Adjustment procedure flow

5.Adjustmet method

P2

--

P2

P2

P3

P4-P8

279

1. Application
This book applies the adjustment points of cereal detector TS5691 series (MDS-D/DH exclusive use).

2.Type name
TS5691 series

3. Serial detector TS5691 composition


(1) The serial detector TS5691 is composed of the sensor, the preamp, and the detection gear. The entire composition and the
closeup of PCB are shown in Figure 1, and the function of each volume is shown in Table 1 and the function of each check

pin is shown in Table 2.

M Whole composition chart


Sensor part
PCB ( refer to Figure! )

Closeup
Preamp part

Sensor holder

m9

__

1H3

Preamp connector
(White)

BJ

Check

pin

Sensor connector (white)


Detection gear

Check pin (PO)

|p)inted wiring board closeup iigurq

(PA.PB,PZ.PC)

PA PZ
15 5 r

PO
jTn

o I

PB PC

VR2:
[]

VR4

T
I.

it

ilVRI

VR3

VR5
'////

Figure 1. Closeup of

Table I. Function of volume


Volume
VRl
VR2

VR3
VR4
VR5

Function
A phase ofTset adjustment
A phase gain adjustment
B phase offset adjustment
B phase gain adjustment
(Z phase width adjustment)

-J

PCB and the composition of the entire detector

Fable 2. Function of check pin


l%i name

PA

PZ

Function
A phase signal
Z phase signal

PO
<

Pin name
PB
PC

Function
B phase signal
Middle point Voltage

Ground (0v)

Basically, It is not necessary.

(2) In this detector, A phase, B phase, and Z phase are output from the sensor to the preamp as the analogue signal.
It is output from the preamp to control amplifier (MDS-D/DPFSP) as the serial signal.
(3) Please use the sensor and the preamp by the same serial numbers combination.

(4) Please note handling enough so as not to apply the scar to each part.

280

4.Adjustment procedure flow


The confirmation and the adjustment of the output signal of TS5691 are done according
to the following flow.

Start

V
(Step.1)

Sensor holder installation (Gap adjustment)

Install the sensor holder on the motor.


The gap is 0.1 5mm between the sensor and detect gear.

X
(Step.2)
Preamp PCB Installation

v
(Step.3)
Connection of cables

V
(Step .4)
Adjustment of A/B phase signal

Adjust the output amplitude of each A/B phase signals


by using the volume to 2000mV 10mV.

V
(Step.4)

Check Z phase signal

It is not necessary to adjust it basically only


by a wavy confirmation.

V
END

281

5. Adjustment method
Step 1 Sensor holder installation (Gap adjustment)
M5 screw
Sensor holder

Sensor

Installation surface

Detect gear

Figure 2.

Installation of the sensor holder

c
O

Sensor holder

_ _j
n

Sensor

&
Detect surface

Gap=0.15+0.01 mm

/-\r}
Outer of detect gear
Detect gear

Figure 3. Adjustment of the gap

282

Step 2 Installation of Preamp PCB

Screw

Protection cover

\
Preamp PCB

Dont insert the insulation washer


into these spaces

Stud
Y

Figure 4. Installation of preamp on stud

Step 3 Connection of cables


(1)Connect the sensor cable and Preamp connector
o

[TCD

[]

[]

To the spindle unite

L
I H EK BBS a

T
Preamp connector

ISensor cable connector(White)


To the Sensor
Figure 5.

Connection of Preamp and Sensor connector

283

(2)Connect the preamp cable to PLG F/B cable (CNPE1 ).

Preamp

Connect to CN2A

<

PI

(J)
T

[Preamp connector

I'O)

PLG cable (CNPE1)|

iH

IPnv*H

Figure 6. Connection of

(3) The chart of PLG cable connecting wires

Spindle unit

PLG cable

Amplifier side connector (Japanese Molex Inc.)


54593-1 011(connector housing)
54594-1 015(plug cover A)
54595-1 005(plug cover B)
58935-1 000(shell cover)
58934-1 000(shell body)
58937-0000(cable clamping)

Detector side connector


Pin:
1 70363-4(AMP)
Housing: 172169- 1 (AMP)

PLG cable (CNPE1)

Signal name
0.2mm2

X X
X X

0.2mm2

3
4

2
I

H-H

0.2mm2

>o< +

7
8

SD
SD*

RQ
RQ*

5
6

xzzx

MTl

MT2

0.5mm2

+5.0V

0.2 mm2

0.5mm2

X+

5G

0.2mm2

FG

Figure 7. Chart of PLG cable connecting wires


electric wire:
MadeRecommended
of Bandoudensen BD20288 (The shield cable of compound six pairs specification No. -17145)

284

Step 4 Adjustment of A/B phase signal


(1) Setting of the open loop control
*1) In case of IM motor (SP017=0xxx or 2xxx), Set bit1=1 ofSP018 parameter, then turn off/on the power line once.
*2) In case of IPM motor (SP017=1 xxx or 3xxx), Set bit1=1 of SP018 parameter, and set SP113=10 (speed setting
for open loop control), then turn off/on the power line once.
(2) Turn on the spindle unit and NC, rotate the spindle head to CCW direction by the standard rotation speed.
Parameter SP020

PLG gear type (p/ rev)

Standard rotation speed (r/m in)

8000

512

100

6000

384

140

4000

256

200

2000

128

400

formula for the standard rotation speed.


The standard rotation speed(r/min)=200(r/min)x(256/PLG gear teeth number)
< Example > In case of PLG gear teeth number is 1 28 p/rev,
200x256/128=400r/min.

* The calculation

(3) Adjust A/B phase signals by using the volume to 2000mV10mV.


V(TP 1000mV5mV
B phase signal
A phase signal

Vdc 010mV

VP.p 2000mV10mV

285

Step 5 Check Z phase signal


(1 ) Confirm whether the Z phase width is 60%5 of A phase signal at one cycle.

A phase

Z phase

100%

60 5%

Z phase width becomes about 0.7ms at the standard rotation speed

When the adjustment ends, stop the motor rotation , and press the emergency stop button.
And return 0" to1 of bit 1 of SP018 (SP113 is returned to 0 for IPM). Finally, turn off the power supply
of NC and the spindle unit ,and turn on it .

286

287

rtM
bO

f-T

C\

-JCt

>

*v>

;?P

<c

rf
r

Up

/ V
Jp-

u.'

Y1

.y.--

'

i
S-o
r

IK\\
-3

CO

t,

&

s?

g"

.<&

><

Q.

y L

ss

I
/

n
!I Q

: a>;

i <0*

CJl

i-I <J)

CO

\1

p*

wt

%l
m
,

[
m

* |g

mm
JSHHP,

sJIXI
gw
-' .

ll

I
1

-i.

<

StSPiiil
WffspXSSffS?
m

si*
yyxm

.-

'

'

MB
& SSiiSSSS

I CL

CO
I

mm

sa

|_X
|
If
S

-~m

>

NJ

V.

!g | Zg. -

-Sr

xy ;S'V':|

5
rsias

'

i I,

*r

j. jg

my

If i
MB
I-

**

s| 1 ~
I

-~

8S8i
:/i:

IS 0

!f

1
Si
1

.x.

ii

SCjsi

X vX" *
.Ifc;

288

Spindle Open Loop/Orient


To place spindle in open loop, set SP018 bit 1 to on.
Parameters are different.
This is now a servo type spindle, so parameters are greatly
different.
Switches back and forth from speed command to position
command on CH, however on DH, will be automatic.
Spindle control signal for diagnostic display. See page 525,26,27,28,29.
Spindle Orient Shift is parameter SA96.
If trouble with sync. Tapping, change SP 8, 9, and 1 0.

NoAutoTune

Pos. Gain
Speed Gain

Non-Interpolation.
Spindle modeSpeed & Orient
mode
SP001 (new for
DH)

Interpolation mode. Same as


CH C-axis mode. Contains Caxis and Synchronous Tap.

Synchronization
New for DH

SP002

SP003

SP5.SP6.SP7

SP8.SP9.SP10

SP5.SP6.SP7

mfr

11

IP=
II

4;'
&

fHif
ggglU*

&

i]

1tetcv

lii

JHfLd

*#11

'

&-

Fit

'

i
*1

-ir

X.

HEP*

fi

fWS
li*l
;:

5M

r;:

"'r-i

'-

i3

>iV4:

't

>

srM
i.fM

SS

HHII

tap

Ift -i!

mm :

5S8

m TJm
iffli

'

KA

(if.

..jm

If mlS
fs5V;;m

:':'

-4fl
fi IJ

'.
til

P8HP*

XjH ;/

-JW

-:

t'-

-7:i
'%ViX

V
''Tj

44 *..;-4%%

TZ***

(g)

If

Jns,

%\ l

jr

t
V> >;i I

fi

IT!

f>

Jp

-.-' "* ;/ :.* .

4:;:-

1
Hggi

a KS

.- vn

f; V

8k*

44
<4

t::

->

V,

..

..

s$.

&>*

X'

[/ ;4

>&

vif

\ \
V

mIS:

II

fsw%S

**

It

a*

>'

M'-'4 :|l

tts

lefcsi

[ 3 j|p"
saB

3R- :*

m.

Ssa

ns
jpa%ggg

*wm
. . *r

.f

8HS5B1

&

""

*
',-

ma.r : TL

mm

y"4
i..*>

'

'

IbL

I Ills

Hl

Wmb>J
?pr

I-:

289

i.

a--.

C-lVt;

M
:-

$mm

ainpid
F-

6|d 1-96SS1

290

Technical Notification

25. Sep, 2006


Model

$
H

Unit
7)

Magnetic pole positioning of 1PM spindle motor with MDS-DH spindle drive unit
1. Outline
When the current model, MDS-C1/CH spindle drive unit, is equipped to a machine with an IPM spindle motor, magnetic pole
positioning is necessary during machine's setup* (Automatic phase Z tuning). In the automatic phase Z tuning function, the
tuning result (magnetic pole shift amount) will be written in the spindle drive unit's memory at the completion of tuning, and
thereafter, the result in the memory will be used. Thus, when replacing the spindle drive unit whose automatic tuning is
complete, it is necessary to perform automatic tuning again for the new drive unit in order to write the tuning result in the

mi?

memory.

However, in the case of MDS-DH spindle drive unit, the tuning result mentioned above can be set in a parameter, so it is
unnecessary to perform magnetic pole positioning again at replacing drive units.
In addition, please refer to below for differences between MDS-DH and the current MDS-C1/CH in magnetic pole positioning
due to the change above.
Magnetic pole positioning is to memorize the relative position of the detector's phase Z and motors magnetic pole position. As IPM spindle
motor is permanent magnet motor, it is necessary to constantly grasp the motor's magnetic pole position. Owing to magnetic pole
positioning, it is possible to grasp the accurate magnetic position by referring to the memorized magnetic pole position at delecting the
detector's phase Z.

2 .Difference From Current Model Regarding Magnetic Pole Positioning


The following table compares DH and C1/CH regarding the major items in magnetic pole positioning
Major item
When to

perform the
positioning

1
o
Procedure
and

necessary
time

Current MDS-C1/CH

What is different from the


current model

-Machine setup
-Motor exchange (Including -Machine setup
Not necessary in replacing
-Motor exchange (Including detection
detection gears)
drive units.
gears)
-Drive unit exchange_ _
(1) Set the spindle parameter (1) Let the motor detector's phase Z Even though the procedure
SP205=0->1, and turn the
steps increase, necessary time
pass.
spindle ON.
(2) Set spindle parameter SP225/bit4 will be reduced.
(2) Positioning complete in up
to 1, and turn the spindle ON.
to 90 seconds.
(3) After 10s. write down the value on
(3) Turn the NC ON again.
the spindle monitor screen.
(4) Turn OFF the spindle , and set the

Result of positioning
Others

MDS-DH spindle drive unit

(magnetic pole shift amount)

cannot be checked.

value in (3) in the spindle parameter


SP118
(5) Turn the NC ON again
The magnetic pole shift amount can
be checked on the spindle monitor Magnetic pole position result
screen or by the setting value of the can be checked.
parameter SP118.

3. Details of Magnetic Pole Positioning with MDS-DH Spindle Drive Unit


To this document, procedure of magnetic pole positioning (magnetic pole shift measurement) is attached. When MDS-DH
spindle drive unit is connected to a machine with an IPM spindle motor, please perform magnetic pole positioning following this
procedure.
[Machines to perform the positioning (Mx)l :
QTN250MS (Y) sub spindle

INTE200/300I II

upper milling spindle.

4. When the Change Starts to Apply

MPT/INTE low er

milling spi n d I e,

Magnetic pole positioning (magnetic shift amount measurement) by MDS-DH drive unit is supported from the software version
A4 (high-speed synchronous tapping will be supported from A4E).
As the version A3 and before doesnt suppon magnetic pole positioning, there will be 5 seconds of display time at the initial
start of the spindle every time the power is turned ON. This can be solved by upgrading the software to A4 and after, and
performing magnetic pole positioning.
-Added magnetic pole
Issued by
Authorized by
Sales Dept.
posilioning lo Outline 066-A

1 0, Aug. 2005

0
ft)

-Added models to which the


change applies
-Changed the supported
software version
-Added cautions to procedure
of magnetic pole shift amount
measuring 066-B
31. Oct 2005

Sawaki

Sano

Tsutsui

25.S(*j>.

25 Sep
2006

25.Sep
2006

2006

# BNP-B8959- 240-*(BNP-B8959-066-B)

Drive System Fundamental Development


Sec., Drive System Dept., Nagoya
Works, Mitsubishi Electric Corp.
5-1-14, Yadaminami, Higashi-ku,
Nagoya461-8670 JAPAN
+81 52 712 2298
TEL
+ 81 52 712 3960
FAX

291

[Procedure of magnetic pole shift amount measurement with MDS-DH drive unit]

When SP142=0, set as follows, and turn the NC ON again.


INTE200/300 III upper milling spindle: SP 142=1 333
MPT/INTE lower milling spindle
SP142=U1
QTN250MS (Y) sub spindle
SPI42-1 n
Start

Set all SP125. 126 and 127.


all to 0.

(Note 1)

Normally, set

1. Setup for magnetic

pole shift amount

SP226/bit5=1
(Pulse application magnetic pole estimation valid)

1
Spindle forward rotation
(About S60)

<

CYC CNT" on spindle


monitor is not 0

2. Check if phase Z is
passed

Y
Spindle stop (Servo OFF)

SP225/bit4=1
.(DC excitation mode start)

I
Spindle forward rotation

(Arbitrary S setting)

<

Weak excitation lime passed.


Normally. 10s

3. Measure magnetic

pole shift amount

Write down the value of 'AFLTdB" on


spindle monitor

I
I

Spindle stop (Servo OFF)

Magnetic pole shift amount SP118=Value


that was written down

I
SP225/bit4=0
(DC excitation mode stop)

(Note 2)

4 Set magnetic pole

shift amount
Turn the NC ON again

Finish

[Notes]
1 Perform magnetic pole shift amount measurement without workpieces and tools With workpiece and tool, the measurement
result may be incorrect.
2. When the measurement is complete, make sure to perform DC excitation mode stop (SP225/bit4=0). Otherwise, after turning
the NC ON again, the initial parameter error alarm 37 will occur
3. Magnetic pole shift amount is different depending on each machine. When importing the parameter from another machine
(SRAM data), make sure to change the SP118 value to the one suitable for the machine

292

T'l
)

[Related parameters]
Parameters with an asterisk * in the abbreviation are validated with the NC power turned ON again.

Name
SP118

Abrv,

Description

MSFT

Magnetic
pole shift

amount
SP125

DA1NO

r-5
SP126

DA2NO

SP127

DA1MPY

D/A output
channel 1
data #

D/A output
channel 2
data #
D/A output
channel 1

output scale

SP142

KF6*

Flux control
ratio 6

ii;

Details

re

setting range

(Unit)

Set the magnetic pole shift amount of I PM spindle motor.


When set to "0". shift won't be performed

-18000 to 18000
(Electrical angle

When performing pulse application magnetic pole estimation, setting is necessary.


When in DC excitalion mode
Set the excitation rate in the weak excitation range in the unit of motor short time
ratio %.
When set to 0". it will be 20%.
Normally, set to 0".
W/hen in DC excitation mode
Set the excitation rate in the weak excitation range in the unit of motor short time
ratio %.
When set to 0". it will be 50%.
Normally, set to "P".
When in DC excitation mode
Set the weak excitation time in the ms unit.
When set to 0", it will be 10000ms.
Normally, set to "0"
In the case of IPM spindle motor
Used in initial magnetic pole detection of IPM spindle motor.
Set the time and coil to apply pulse, and estimated magnetic polarity in pulse
application magnetic pole estimation.
As this setting is specific for motor, normally set the value in the spindle parameter
list.

1/100)
-32768 to 32767

1 . Time to apply pulse: Set in the [ps] unit. (0<Application time<350)


2. Coil to apply pulse: W/hen selecting low-speed coil, add 1000 to Ihe application

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

time.
3. Estimated magnetic polarity: W/hen setting the opposite polarity, set negative
sign to the values of 1. and 2.

E g.) Perform 333ps of pulse application magnetic pole estimation with low-speed
coil. Estimated polarity is the opposite polarity.
SP142
-(333+1000) = -1333

bit

When set to 0

Name

When set to 1

0
1

2
3
4

ded

DC excitation mode start

Normal

SP225

SFNC5

6
7
8
9

Spindle

function 5

A
B
C
D
E
F

bit
0

ovsn

Overshoot compensation type 3 Non-sensitive band setting (Unit is 2/1000)

When set to 0

Name

When set to 1

2
3
4

SP226

SFNC6

Spindle
function 6

pon

Normal

IPM spindle pulse application magnetic


pole estimation valid

7
8
9

A
B

C
D
E

293

PROJECT NAME:
PLG Adjustment of Matrix Control

The new PLG TS5690 of Matrix Control does NOT need to do PLG automatic compensation
function(SP245) like current PLG TS5276 in order to adjust A and B-phase sine wave signal
input into spindle drive.
Also there is NOT a PLG PCB, it is NOT necessary to check voltage of each-phase sine
wave signal on synchroscope.

M640
CH-SP

liiSi
Si
m

Bus Line
CN5

jj-

Analog
Pri-Amp

'

PLG I*
(TS5276)

Thermal

Spindle

Power Line

Mx
DH-SP

Optical Cable
CN2t

Serial

Thermistor

New PLG
(TS5690)
Power Line

294

Spindle

r-

Replacement of Unit Fan


When an alarm and/or a warning is displayed about the coolant fan on the NC monitor screen and the LED portion of the
unit, replace the unit fan.

Drive Unit Alarm


No.

Alarm
Fan stop

45
1

Power Supply Alarm


I No. /LED
Alarm
i

72/

Power supply:
Fan stop

Description

A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped, and the loads
on the unit exceeded the specified value.
Description

!A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped, and


overheat occurred in the power module.

[Drive Unit Warning


Alarm

No.

A6

Fan stop warning

Description

A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped.

[Power Supply Warning


No. / LED |

EE/

Alarm

Power supply:
Fan stop warning

Description
[A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped.

295

Replacement parts

Model
13

fl09P0424H3D

pMF-04C24DS-RCA

{MMF-06F24ESRM5

Size

p40mm (for MDS-D-CV)


p40mm (for other than MDS-D-CV)
p60mm

MlvlJ-09D24TS-RR15 p90mm
|MMF-T2D24PSM5 Dl20mm

i
1 1 . Turn off the breaker for the input power and

(remove

the drive unit after the charge lamp on


the power supply unit turns off

j
|

|
|

296

ft

V
2. Unscrew the mounting screws at 4 places to
remove the fan guard on the backside of the
drive unit.

BiiP

tv,*

I
V

jji

\3. Remove the hooks (at 4 places x 2) from the


jfan guard and then remove the fan guard.

SalllS i

ir..> 5

in

pS

297

El
%

Igp
8pgf|l

After removing the fan guard

SO

11

|4. Unscrew 2 screws for mounting the fan.

sBiSlm
2M

!
!

11

I:

!..

298

E :i

Wm Si
i*

5. Remove the rubber bushing for the fan


power line and disconnect the connector.

:m

Remove the connector and replace the fan.

-O

"c

{dire assembly should be performed in the


reverse order of removal.

lit*
fe,

m
/

299

MATRIX Maintenance Modes


Ivlaintenance modes which are added newly on the MATRIX machines are the operation restriction functions with various
interlocks used at the service and the maintenance To perform safe servicing and maintenance operations, the functions including
the feedrate limitations and the axis movement interlocks other than the equipment required the adjustment are operated, and then,
servicing and maintenance can be provided.

1. Selecting a maintenance mode


The following selection conditions must be satisfied:
-The machine is in a stopped status.
-Manual operation mode or MDI mode is valid.
-The setup switch is set to the ON position (1) with the door open.
(1) Press the DIAGNOS menu key in the POSITION screen.
EOS XT 10)1

SET UP

FROCRJIM

INFO.

TOOT.

c-eoiw

PARAM

ormnios

DATA

DAT .A

TOOL

DISPLAY

I/O

LAYOUT

MAP

IN
(2) Press the VERSION menu key.
VERSION

IN

300

ALARH

ALARM

PLC

MAIHYEH

RUNNING

GRAPHIC

DATA

ACCUMlf

HISTORY

SIGNAL

CHECK

CONTROL

MAIWTE-

ERASE

TIME

Menu select key


Menu key

!i
8m

rrrnrgiTOTy

mtt-iHof"
|
JL

ii

lp|liijF0l ri
-

't

kpy

fejai
PS'i

(3) After the DIAGNOS screen is displayed, press the menu select key
press the INPUT key.
(4) Press the machine menu key and then press the screen select key
will be displayed.

K*_ Then
.

enter password "1 131" and

i once. The MAINTE. MENU menu item

(5) Press the MAINTE. MENU menu key.

MA1HTE.
MENU

301

(6) The items provided for maintenance purposes are: MAINTE. MODE ATC, MAINTE. MODE PC, MAOSTIE.
MODE AXIS, MAINTE. MODE SPINDLE, and MAINTE. MODEDBB. Select die appropnate item according
to particular needs. The selected item will have its display highlighted on the screen. Select the menu items as required
one by one.

50%

(~'3D

MAXrtTE .

U&Xin'E.

UODB
MC

MODE

PC

Onlti~u

[VW
tlRIMTE .

MODS
AXIS

MODE
SPJHELB

_L

|WSJ O' j 200u/0/Q? [l3:23;d2

Onon/ula
M3LTWTB .
MODE
DBB

<Display in maintenance mode>


"The "WAAMITNG; MAINTE. MODE AAA" is displayed as an alarm message.
(AAA: Selected maintenance mode). Then the selected maintenance mode will have its display highlighted on the
screen. When the maintenance mode is cancelled, above display will be cancelled.

Cancellation of the selected maintenance mode>


Tie selected maintenance mode will be cancelled:
-When die door is closed
-When the setup switch is turned to the OFF position (O)
-When power is turned off
-When the selected menu key is pressed again (to clear the highlighting of the menu item).

302

2. Operation hi maintenance modes


The door interlock is cancelled under the following functional limitations:
(1) Functional limitations on each maintenance mode

<Maintenance Mode ATC>


-ATC/ magazine-related maintenance menu key operations are possible.
-Only ATC-related M-code operations are possible in MDI mode. (Usable M-c odes: M6, M17, Ml 8,
M19.M149)
[Ml 5, M16: M-code for ATC cover (Option)]

<Maintenance Mode PC>


-Pallet change-related maintenance menu key operations are possible.
-Only pallet change-related M-code operations are possible in MDI mode. (Usable M-codes: M70,
M71.M72)
<Maintenance Mode Axis Move>
-Movement at tlie maximum speed is possible by pressing the axis feed switch and the MF1 and MF2
keys at. the same time. Releasing any keys stops the movement.
-If neither the MF1 nor MF2 key is pressed, the maximum speed will be limited to 2 m/min (if it is
rotation axis, surface speed is limited to 2 m/min)
-The maximum speed operation is also possible for axis movement in MDI mode.

303

<Maintenance Mode Spindle Rotate >


-Operation at the maximum spindle speed is possible by pressing the spindle starting switch and the
MF 1 and MF2 keys at the same time. Releasing any keys stops the rotation.
-If neither the MF1 nor MF2 key is pressed, the maximum speed will be limited lower (The maximum
speed depends on the machine type.).
-The maximum speed is also possible for spindle rotation starting in MDI mode.
(Usable M-codes: M3, M4, M5, M19)
<Maintenance Mode DBB>
-Automatic operation starting is possible.
-Axes movements are permitted (Usable M-codes: MO, Ml, M2, M30, M99)
(2) Hand pulse operation for axis movement is possible, even during maintenance mode.

(3) The chip conveyor/ screw conveyor comes to a complete stop.

304

305

306

Matrix Special Menu


Allows customer to add their own menu
keys to call up special softwares
Example shows setting for printscreen
functions.
Edit
c:\MC_sdg\CustomMenu\CustomMenu.txt

307

308

Matrix Special Menu Explanation


Comment
Only

Menu Shown

u
/Si
XWO
m.-.!
iir

/v-m
fi-ic
|[Henu-1]

..
*

\c\-:

* j Hen uNain e=Pr i nt:

Screenl
-c:\jna1
me\pr1
F11 BP aril
nx: screen -exe

[Menu-?]
Men u Maui e=Pr i nt

Screen!
F11 QParh-c:\jfla1 me\pr1 rat screen 2 exe

1
j [Menu 3]

Actual File path


and Executeable
(.exe) file

/.HUP

|Men uNam e=Pr i nt


ScreenB
F11 epaxhcsVaal mte\pr1 nt screen 3
i

Matrix Special Menu Example

mmmmmmm
File Window Help

Mi;V

Back

Search

Folder;

Actual File i

Favorites

+.: I j My Documents
.7; Q Start Menu

Size
1

Date Modified
8/ J 7/2005 2:39 AM

Type

KB TextOocument

...i

"aaj

j [Menu-1]

screen
MenuName=Pri nt
Pi 1 ePath=c :\ma1 nte\Prin tscreen. exe

Programs

:+

fvlane

HIJBBI BUSH

>: [J Desktop
i

is

;! So
[i] CustomMenu.txt

G Cookies

G All User?

G metpub

[Menu-2]
uName=Print
Menu

Qj m6y_yrnw

Scr een2

File Pat h=C : \mai nt e\P

O ni6yboot

+': L_J mainte


*J

!0I C:\MC_sdg\ CustomMenu

Folders

\i

i AT

AO*jl C:-5

+'.

-veaisna

G MC.Backup

[Menu-3]
Screen3
Fi 1 epat h -c : \mai nte\Pri nt Screen3 exe

HenuName =Print

MC.Direct Mode Programs

ntscreen2 . exe

G MC_Gl Data
:f: G MC_Machine Database
;

;.t-

D MC_Machine Programs

iG

MC_sc'g

G Alarm

G CustomMenu

D cutest

(3)

D cutmorj
D cutres
G dbl
D fug
~

it:

<

I Toollnformation
meloctrl

309

Print

Print
Screen2

|S. SAVE|

Aclive Piinl Screen! & SAVE

>

TUTT2s% Tnr
Screenl

Full Ptint Screen

Print

Scresn3

(2)

I Mil
1/23

14: 49: 26

>
MENU

(1)

310

311

312

Matrix:
Howto select multiple Folders in the Explorer
address

jss C;\
x

=olders
-

Name

Size ; Type

0 0CPCU
1 0 Documents and Settings
I 0 inetpub
'

31 Desktop
J Q My Documents
3 Q My Computer
3A Floppy (A:)
S S3 MAZATROL (C:)
L+!
CPCU

0m6y_ymw
0m6yboot

File Folder

] Administrator
l .~l .iboconsole
l~~l Cookies
0 0 Desktop

0MC_Direct Mode Programs

0 MC_Machine Database

MC_GL Data

I 0MC_Machine Programs

CDI

S
Favorites
Q My Document
Ei

1 0melpctrl

CD Start Menu

Iddies;

File Folder
File Folder
File Folder
File Folder
File Folder

0nm64mdata
>

Ctrl

File Folder

CCncbackup

S3 [0 Programs !
1
l+i 0 All Users
:
j
i+J 0 inetpub
Ij
i+l 0 m6y_ymw

1+

12/1/2005 10:10 AM

Press & Hold Shift + Ctrl to Select


Multiple Folders in Explorer.

I 0||
0
0MC_Bacdup
El 0 Documents and Settii
E

Shift

Date Modified

]pli tool

0 Program Files
0 RUNMNG

IJZoT,

7T9

10/26/2005 6:47 AM
10/26/2005 7:49 AM
9/1/20135 12:00 PM
10/23/2005 6:32 AM
10/25/2005 7:46 AM

C:\
X

:olders
Desktop

+3 Q My Documents
3 Q My Computer
E
3A Floppy (A:)
E 0 MAZATROL (C)
S3 0 CPCU
o 0 Documents and Settir
*3 0 Administrator
1 .iboconsole
r~1 Cookies

0 Desktop
;+!
+:

+
+

Size

Type

Date Modified

File Folder

12/1/2005 10:10 AM

0 Documents and Settings


Cl inetpub

Shift

0 m6y_ymw
I

0m6yboot

Cl mairite

Start

0MCJ3ackup

IK

!ia

rn Ctrl

Postion Cursor to Stating Location.


Press & Hold Shift + Ctrl.
Move Cursor to Ending Location.

:0
,0!

V? Favorites

0 My Document
0 Start Menu
i?

+.

Name

QCPCU

10 Programs

0 All Users

0 inetpub
0 m6y_ymvv
I iribvhrinr

+-

11

n LllI :

0nm64mdata
0 plctool
0 Program Files
0 RUNMNG
0 Voice

End

File Folder
File Folder
File T older
File Folder-

File Folder
ile Folder

10/26/2005 6:47 AM
10/26/2005 7:49 AM
9/1/2005 12:00 PM
10/23/2005 6:32 AM
10/25/2005 7:46 AM
10/26/2005 7:49 AM

313

314

315

316

Remote I/O

__

__
_____

<

-V

>6'SV \si*i .'4V-

X1

i O

;
:

si
HI
:

X2

* Z2

si

/j

y
3--

<%>m.
J

! ,L
.".1#
II*
5.

SSI

wif'sifi

.3

*0
0

r>

a$<r!

2
v2:

M|h

0
:

'

'

i g; o

zM

_REMOTE itO
/

>

'*

,fc*

.- : ym i
C"i : :.:

'

fk
'

):

y* ;

izfe

v? J

0[
o] I
N
T13- 0[12- 0]
PC 47 C 0) .

0.

-* **in

;--g

-65. 3
-0. 023
0.
0.

* Z1

BSP
j*

.-Ti

...

...

y,*

TROUBLESHOOTING
_ v *'.. */ _

---*
X

feir*v

Wi

m
*

fL.
i
mm

<)

H clI V

Ma

RA

1>

j i; gs

'.0'
317

Mg

'

T ,s

&

RMiSiga

?<K?

V& I

fir
*

jmmXtL *'

4n

I >
[in- H

R Ijlr

1
1
111
m

il

r-.

I w

:K

t
I

fulfills)
..

.v':

hi

Oil

JC'

318

rx

raiwi

r\

rr\

r?\

n rx

XRT

v_y LJ\_y

v.

v_y

WAV'1''

ma

Si

?|as

/: ;

iiSilil

POSITION

BUFFER
X
Y

0
0.

-40.

UNex8 ,<i OglUl


T
B

111!
2

ijjj

UNo.

REMAIN
0.
X
Y
0.

MACHINE
o X
0.
o Y
0.
o Z
0.

X-

NEXT COMMAND
G
IT

0.
0.

0(

COUNTER

<H0DAL>
S
0 F
igi U17

UPC
-100.
X
-100
Y
-3U0 a
2

0.

m
G
-GX4f
G40.1 G

80

67

lit

0.
G 91
G 98
G 69

G 23
G 50
G 97

H
G 94
G 54
G 15

1
(CTR-DR

->-> TNo.
)

\y\

SPDL
(i)
FEED

PALLET N
UNIT :
Di(
H#(

T-0FFSET

INDEX

0.
0.

0.

0)
0)

100

11

200

m SI

a
I
a

Y-AX:

0.

HI

i
i
m
>

W|

al

Omm/min
T

G50. 1

If X

(400008000,

G 40
G 64

min"1
H/HIN SPBL;
MM/MIH
M/REV X-AX:

0
0

55 REMOTE 1/0 ERROR

11

V;

NAGA2NPKNO .

0
G 21

li x if mi*fes fei

Hi

TNo.

Sllfe
i''!*

0)

v}V'j

(ill x

M#

File View Setup Window Help


X
Y

ZERO RETURN
...

ir

2-AX:

2001/01/13

TPS 0

:>

110I
w&

10:29

M Y.WV/'V

:/
:

::

fi

lilW ifpi
I

TPS

55 REMOTE I/O ERROR(Mill)


9 REMOTE I/O ERROR (Lathe)

nfhF
-11 11 11 I I 1 1

rn

n
055

npF

H-N

D1024V MALFUNCTION

(Note,

, )

PI

III

#1
it

Cause

ill

ifIII

Please contact your YAMAZAKI MAZAK products service station.

Note: & Q0 C|C

Q1

This is a Hexadecimal #! If other than 00, it has a problem in that system.

No.1 system (XG~)


No, 2 system (X80~)
No, 3 system (X100-)

f
Action

f||
til
pftl

WhatlsaivstanP

mj

No.4 system (X280-)


VVXV,;

Take Hex # and turn into 8 digit Binary!


7

6 5 4 3

2 10

01 0 0 0 0 1

M mi nmm\m m ti lim? Hits 421


m
1
WlatlsastatloiP

Station
Station

Station 8
319

The above example indicates that an communications error has occurred in station 1 of the No. 2 system.
x

\J

320

nru

nfhR

II

009
Cause
Action

\U\U

Hr

REMOTE I/O ERROR

Red

An error occurred in data communication with the remote I/O card.

Please contact your MAZAK service representative.

_j

/To

n
w

dy

inn

uH

'

rm

9 REMOTE I/O ERROR 2(0000,0001)


N
/ \
Problem in system 2

Station 8

Station 5

Problem is with station

r-n rr\

L J

Jlf

cm

K1S

mm

rr\r7\

,-n

mm 7i

VJ3

\1S

uu

r?nrr\
wuup

rv)

;-s'

/Nrr

UjV_yuJ

Kiy

;
-

'

::

'

za

File Window Help

VERSION

DIAGNOSIS HOW IT OR

[CMC]
HR113

OPTION | SERVO

HR122

[BUS]
M -***'

[RIO]
1
1 HRS53
2 HRS 71 ;
3 RX312
4 HR371

HARDWARE MONITOR

SPINDLE MONITOR

[CPU]

MONITOR]

Wd

V.

<u

HRS53
HR371

t|liWlmMMSm

HR371

ppi
:

HRS 71

Vv

55 REMOTE I/O ERROR

|W

50%

321

DIAGNOS

(z$
VERSION

Or pm

U0000G7G0,

TPS 0

2001/01/12

V#. 0 OOin/min

DIAGNOS
MONITOR

OPTION

SERVO
MONITOR

10:05

sss

SPIKDLE
MONITOR

a a:

HARDWARE
MONITOR

LADDER'
MONITOR

322

pr

R1
LMI

D UU
fVF

mn

C\

cv

ERtlTl:
File Window Help
DIAGNOSIS

[CMC]
HR113

-iH

y-

sat

VERSION

MONITOR] OPTION]

13

SERVO

MONITOR]I

x|

SPINDLE MONITOR

HARDWARE MONITOR

_ smritii

[CPU]
HR122

US]

& OD 00

[RIO]
i
1 HR353
2 HRS 71

HRS 5 3
HR371

3 1X312
4 HRS 71

HR371

07 00
T

TTT

'

No.1 system.: (XG~)


No.2 system (X80-)
No, 3 system (X1CO-)
NoA system (X280-)

HR371

vnm

765413210

-;

4 2

Jiinary

L Station.
Station

jraWJ

t 00000700

55 REMOTE I/O ERROR

50%

DIAGNOS

[zjjl
VERSION

0 r pm

Station 8

I V'A'V 0 . 0 0 in

Sliii

<E

HARDWARE
MONITOR

&00000700 - -

aaa

LAC'D ER
MONITOR

/T\

/m

crq

u VJL/

DI&0N03I3

[CMC]

HR113

iu

i.

MONITOR] OPTION]

Qi

JWULJL

mmmmmmmM

>

SERVO

MONITOR]

SPINDLE MONITOR

HARDWARE MONITOR

'BUS]:

5.88

xii1-.

-*

IB
-

Sc 00 00
[RIO]
1
1 HRS 5 3
2 HRS 71
3 5X312
4 HRS 71

&

HRS 53
HR371

It

[CPU]
HR122

O'

File Window Help


VERSION

- mse-a/SK

07 CO

.HR-371

system (XD~jji
No.2 system X.80~)
6

w vr

HR371

7
7B54|32tO
B 4 2 1
Binary
4 2
|

i
i

vM 4

niojJ

f 00000700 .

55 REMOTE I/O ERROR

|w

501

_D

Or pm

323

DIAGN03 VERSION

jV'M

0. 00 in/mJ

i
=2

v,'.

&00000700 *

HARDWARE
MONITOR

LADDER
MONITOR

2
5

324

i rn <ThR

JI _3

ns

r r

n juu

JW

ini

S7\

i joy

ffb,

UUU0ii]liJ
71

7a

(Dr\

V-/

:w:

x\

File Window Help

..jV :

| DIAGNOSIS MONITOR] OPTION]

VERSION

[C1JC]

Hill 3

SERVO MONITOR

SPINDLE MONITOR

HARDWARE MONITOR

STATIONS

[CPU]
HR122

BUS]
m

Liu LG

07

[RIO]

l:"?
1 HR353
2 HRS 71

HRS 5 3
HR371

l-'l-i;-.-

HRS 71

NoJ system (X0-)


Na2 system (X80~)

No*3 system {X1Q0~J


NoJ system (X2S(H

HR371

3 RX312
4 HRS 71

oS

0
7 6 5 4 3
e 4 2 10

fl

Siafion
Si alien
- STtof lohl
*

Mill*
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR

pvv

50*

(3

DIAUNOS VERSION

0 r pm

U0000p700y

|V#i 0.00

in/m

210
4 ! 2 1 | Binary

Stations 8

I4i

&00000700

,E
|R

HARDWARE
MONITOR

LADDER
MONITOR

1
2
3

325

__

win

sm

OS

3$

a
50,
is

C 3
a

-(

15

*
L*l

1 $Y2i I

i i

cr

CD $VM

-i
\1 ,,

<

SV2*-i

3D

Ju

SV3

c-i

5'
OH
*
<y m

- es

>

't*-0
r*o

rirnr
>

>w

CP

IPS


K X

e>
>
CJ

4J

opiC)

v_r*

>
*

CD r
1

rn >

UCiiH

2
o

hj

|C/>

0
f

O;

rLo
> i-o>
UCttH
u am

i
: 9

>

*D

i-->

CO

5 Lj

lieaH

Li

\. ...A

il

g
|M)
I

(0

rz

*c

*v>

t.

1651Pi
t

C3

L:L

ueaw
O

o:

-*i

I
Q

IPD

C3T0 v
oz
r

OH

12

II

*
W

&

o_J

-L

IOO

(=)

m
o

CP)

>

>-

31

Era

C<

*
o o o

*
t O T

03 f"C

0P)

*9

ill
I
I

u>

03 5V2'M
03

*t>

<*230>

N.

EE
PS
c=o

>

io

1 Sv2-J tx23ii

11

FH

326

AP20

@(>

ss

Sr

X4024

(2601 )

X2024
tXT 6 1 )

_T3L
!C

4-0

X
X

tO

.XL, fXL _Q_,


CTj

-}

HHRttiMlN]

Is-

s
.-r, s g

wr>

Uf>

Q2

to

*( i

"
JJ""
rz

to

to

40

CSJ

5
4S
X

*3-

MO

1
lQQ[l;ii i! lilii: i! i!|
i

to

%
ec
i/3

tt

to
to

<

CHS

CHS

pa

Cv
in

>
fr

SK

'-'
4(g'|'
|I

*
JUMPER: 1-2

|)

|J

C1D I-,,,
W

XL, XL
o
so

3MB
aa i

so

to
*

patter?
7

C.

X)

SO

i}@

an ]CHI
r

KHRMISMNI

MAGAZINE

SET:?

t|i 4|T 5i|j

CN7
Ti o

CHS
ii

CHS

4i=y i

CN

IIIIII!

Statin # an Se0B= 76 s 4321


X3024 (XT 3! )

Mazatrol Fusion Remote 10


Communication error count

Spec
Tins function is always activated ( Note In case of lathe parameter 088 bit 0 should be on
This function is that it. can output counter value of communication error corresponding to the R register table below.
Each count value accumulated in R registers can be made cleat' by R51 28 setting
P.5 1 28
bit 0: Clear Max value (make "0" for R5000 -Eh 0631
bit 1 : Clear accumulated value (make "0" for R5064-R51 27)

While
*When this bit is set . start ot clear ,and at same time thus bit will be off automatically
looking at these registers is helpful, it is not. 1 00 % accurate as telling where the problem is. There have been cases
where the P.-register may be higher, but problem was actually on another station where R-register count was lower.

Signal name
Max value
Commnicaiton

VsV.A.'.AW.A.V.AW.A.\W/v

Max value
CRC

Accumutated
Value

Communication
Max value
CRC
327

Counter clear Flag

Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station


3
8
5
1
2
7
6
System
4
1
R5 000 R5001 R5002 R5003 R5004 R5005 R5 006 R5007
R5008 R5 009 R5010 R5011 R5012 R5013 R5014 R5015
2
R5Q18
R5016 R5017
3
R5019 R5020 R5021 R5022 R5023
R5024 R5025 R5026 R5 027 R5028 R5029 R5030 R5031
4
P.5032 R5033 R5034 R5035 R5036 R5037
R5038 R5039
1
R5040 R5041 R5042 R5043 R5044 R5045 R5C46 R5047
R5 048 R5 049 R5050 R5051 R5052 R5053 R5054 R5055
3
4
R5 056 R5057 P.5 058 R5059 R5 060 R5061 R5062 P.5 063
1
P.5 064 P.5 065 R5066 R5067 R5068 R5 069 P.5070 P.5071
2
P.5072 P.5073 P.5074 R5075 R5076 R5077 P.5078 R5079
5
P.5 080 P.5081 R5082 R5083 R5084 R5085 R5086 P.5 087
4
R5088 R5089 R5090 R5091 R5092 R5093 R5094 R5095
1
R5096 P.5 097 R5098 P.5099 P.5100 R5101 R5102 R5103
'V
A
R5104 R5105 P.5 1 06 R5107 R5108 R5109 R5110 R5 111
->
R5112 R5113 P.5114 R5115 P.5116 P.5 1 17 P.5118 R5119
R5120 R5121 R5122 R5123 P.5 1 24 R5125 R5126 P.5127
4
R5128

328

REMOTE D I/O SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION FUSION 640 CONTROLS

Mills
Only!

The relationship of PLC address with remote I/O systems and stations:

Bus

System No.1

OUTPUTS

Station 1

X000-X00F

Y000-Y00F

N/A

Station 2
Station 3

X010-X01F
X020-X02F

Y010-Y01F

N/A

Station 4
Station 5

X030-X03F

Y020-Y02F
Y030-Y03F
Y040-Y04F

N/A / 5
N/A/ 4
3
2
1

Station 7

X040-X04F
X050-X05F
X060-X06F

Station 8

X070-X07F

Station 1
Station 2

X080-X08F
X090-X09F
X0A0-X0AF
X0B0-X0BF
X0C0-X0CF
X0D0-X0DF

Station 6

Bus

Operation

Board

System No. 2

System No.3

System No.4

Star

(HR337

DOES NOT
HAVE.)

ROTARY

INPUTS

Station
Station
Station
Station
Station
Station

3
4
5
6
7
8

XOEQ-XOEF

X0F0-X0FF

Station 1
Station 1
Station 2
Station 2

X100-X10F
X110-X11F
X120-X12F

Station
Station
Station
Station
Station
Station

X280-X28F
X290-X29F

1
2
3
4
5
6
Station 7
Station 8

X130-X13F

X2A0-X2AF

X2B0-X2BF
X2C0-X2CF
X2D0-X2DF

X2E0-X2EF

X2F0-X2FF

Y050-Y05F

Y060-Y06F
Y070-Y07F
Y080-Y08F
Y090-Y09F
Y0A0-Y0AF
Y0B0-Y0BF
Y0C0-Y0CF
Y0D0-Y0DF
Y0E0-Y0EF
Y0F0-Y0FF

SW

USAGE

HR337 / HR353
HR337 / HR353
HR337 / HR371
HR337 / HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371

HR371

HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371

6
5
4
3

2
1
0

HR371

HR371
HR371

Y100-Y10F

HR371

Y110-Y11F
Y120-Y12F
Y130-Y13F

HR371
HR371

Y280-Y28F
Y290-Y29F
Y2A0-Y2AF
Y2B0-Y2BF
Y2C0-Y2CF
Y2D0-Y2DF
Y2E0-Y2EF
Y2F0-Y2FF

HR371
7

6
5

4
3

2
1
0

HR371
HR371
HR371

HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371
HR371

329

330

There is the ELEMENTARY DIAGRAM LIST


on page 2 that serves as the contents in the
ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM. As an
example, look at TOOL EYE (OPTION)
enclosed by a red frame in the table below.
The figures "32000340362" indicates a drawing

number.

EL.5l:HAfft DIAGRAM LIST


SET

2 1W.CHIKE lb.
fcOT
3 CNC 7YPc
i SPIKEUS Ttips;
i_5 MILL $*\m\

LJ

!7 IWK. 1 R>W Nti


j itoc % m Ux\

B 32000340330

Enlargement
*2*0*6 REMOTE 1/0
REMOTE 1/0
*2*5
REMOTE 1/0
*2*5
REMOTE I/O
*2*5
FAN MOTOR

si 32000340340

%'J

32000340351
32000340562
32000340370
3 32000340380
9 32000340391
) 32000340401
1 3200034041 1
7 32000340420
3 1 32000340430
J

*1
*2*/

*5
*1
*2

331

'Mil

COMMON
COMMON
COMMON
COMMON

SLIDEWAY LUBRICAT
HEAD COOLING PUMP
TOOL EYE (OPTION)!
TOOL EYE< OPT I ON)
WORK LIGHT
MAIN SPINDLE CHUC
TAIL SLEEVE/BODY
TURRET SOLENOID/S
PCB PC I NPUT TURRl
C-AXIS SOLENOID

Approved By:

1 S&CtfSKS TVP8 8aT-flW250 m\&

32000340294
32000340303
32000340313,
32000340323

vx,
MM-

ChftcV.od By :

jSreCIRCAUCW

ITS*

__

Draw By

PP32300030 16

ifoyaittrt

43H4
*3<n

YiSgWmiPISl

ai-giooH&ni
iqggMCHOltO

u { asflmfr&a
12 aMWMWffl

- D &U0.a2Mi

&:
Hi
**

ni

H I

M *
t> (I i i
<i>lf *

>*

Oil ll

mU.,i

HU II I k
M|!

11 *

W IP

'* 1 1

4I3UI Ll
in

rcmn *

[Ctot i*ns

wrn t&x imr i jXT

Taut

QXE 1151/0

NCSCC.U$i vrD
H CXC U?l )

a earr

i.i<vr <sr
U OXC LIST ()
H OX LrS-T IT)

JLSaSfiUJSELiJ- _

H cace LIST
M CX LIST Do)

M
IRiQITMf

W* CM
MACH?* Pgam Mj CM
nc rwuETw .mu. (0

ii irf

iu'
p'm

i *I*P
M i
M I

l\1 Ltf

*3
>;

*L'L_

<*

l
il r*
il <

JUJJALA2L

*3
+a

glKSKM&

it

ll

ti

IjESggjig

! *I !
i *< I lT
O

Tir

M4* SUPPLY 10

.53. smoimM

tt*QTE
ii axosaefti
I/O tiHW
cnoTF ia) OIHPQIN
M awtwmt PUS
JUUL &3&.30B&.
M &mtM!KW_

Dl/6'

mam
I ti*m

SiiaL

ihvtttirtHtti

.w.

I)ni

Hft IfcYtt

iW #X<lRtfr6
101

StlDctAY

<?2A5R03i1t!
-,7-vrrMfRRy

no

UJWIWWji

INC W VxTCK
yypf-iPTtEffV

jjMaaM.
1

>5

t-XL kYS<; CPI ICC)


irlfX LUStfT
&RIK SPtWLt SUCK

ir(.)gCG4C401

Hit ajEENC/POW

TiggT s<uirc.ycvs.>R

ill

111 3SCWW-1 1

.....

US 3?ftS03lC45i3

_______
PC 1 hFUT TlHYrT

m 52SSjSa45.

fcasLsgaauL,,

w WWML

ACWtCIRCUII

J.W.

r***-

332

A drawing number is written on the bottomright corner of each drawing, as shown by a


red arrow. Open a page related to the TOOL
EYE.

if

6?

-Hf

* rmarma7 i
gLa-

flJ

IU

n;

U>

iSnsftr

. . . ....... .
I

~C2

}J

:<*&*-

;o

;<.*

ifrr crm*

!3y>

I 891 (II rs <*


i rrc u:if -4ii

m.,

wm

J**-
...,

>>

.nimwa.

iif

&MT'&
LW

ITU,

VI

ii I

.0

WTH-W*'-

J4

.wo

< <'K

*~

ns
ns

......

*I.

LU

ii

rj

*!:
ns j

__

m wi -

Ik* fil 1Wft.6

-igr-

rsx na

icrim

TISSS-

;s
SISC

Enlargement

1TBT

TITLE

20
21

2?

32 CO 03 30362

arid! Fore tan Trade Law


I

LJu-J

---

- B*

}..

r
ua

*ou*

TOOL EYE (OPTION)


D RWH H o

MU

, ri&- -M8

at

i.e

ail CsA <rT t-

CiW4

>

2?
2*
J

iw.w HA +'tn i

CIKHMi

.'U

01

BCPEFGHIJKL

onvpp

JP1

23

P)MH

IC

X303

02

'

&
03

R30

21
n

1500 6<Jtf
'i

TYPE:CB120100

11

12/10 f!f 200WV

04

10

04
MACHINE SIOE

05

*4

MAIN SPINDLE

KM

CONNECTION BOX

KA5

>130*1
;

06

23

030213 0302M
r,M
us

07

0362 1 4

anoint

TYPE E221 1-444


U. P. G. ORIENTAL
(OW/O. 9A/50H2
12W0. &5A/G0HZ

mo

AHI

A,

5"''4T7

TOOL EYE MOTOR

K401

to

PLACE

030213

24

08
09

3/\

PUJC

i<

XjlOl

ft.

c<d

YELLOtf/GRECK

10
MB

NC TERM I >LAL
BOARD A3

11 [
~

12

13

XCF33
1 78

TOT. M

701

Y4
TOR. K

r1 OB

704

109

Y5

I SB

ins

1GB

IN

KA3

X2

fs

TOU.M

14

tQ1

niQ

TOOL EYE ARN HIGH


3 1 0)6101

TOOL EYE FORWARD


QlOIBICt

bl 0)630)

iflf

TOOL EYE REVERSE


010)610)

b ;I 036301

15
16

HACK! HE SIDE
POE

MAIN SPINDLE

17

18
19

NC TERMINAL
BOARD A3

1O0L EYE
SENSOR

Sff

2LX 1 54

XII

R3

On

:<2-

1092 2

>

NOT USE

22

54Q8W.

3CSKIP

1N

5,0X18

SKIP (TOOL EYE 1)

1
/ XI 3
:

21

I.OKO 1/4W
XI 2

IN

20

2L*

SKIP CANNON

R4

-O

'

23

24

333

1
ADD,

API

CONNECTION BOX

?. 36

APR' D BY CHK' D BY

KA5.KA4

'

99-3/10

II. H

\MMsk~7
liVKVKI VAZM

(Dr.Ml A) IV

URTIN 0Y

TITLE
TOOLEYE (OPTION)

DRWN No
32CD0340302
ALT PIN No. 3 2 06-6/10 H.H
This product is subject to all the applicable Japanese Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law
*rPc I

334

1)

KA3, KA4 and KA5 are relay contactors

KM

and numeric characters "5 and 8M and 9


and 12 under the contactors indicate a

relay terminal number connected to a


relay.

036212

036213
KA5
036214

"036212", "036213" and "036214" show

9"-YT2
036214

KA4

036213

the area related to a function of these


relay contactors.

2)

To see "036212" of KA3, for example, the


last four digits (0362) of the drawing
number enclosed by a red frame shows
the page number that covers KA3 in its
12th line.

SOT

TITLE
TOOL EYE (OPTION)

D RWN II o

32000340362

md Fore ii gin Trade Law


M-3 sfr 5T% ag k L 5ft -t

<

- -cv
A

iV

if

S>

iv
U*

a*
W

[{I

0?

LU

U>

M-

liSrar

ils

J5

AL.

iHE2~
r~

*-

PML

'{M&rl

& 'to UUL/

:<>*

3)

The area enclosed by a blue frame that is


in the 12th line on page 0362 is the
portion related to KA3.

tf

iyVK-p

iiL

Af

;<llr:

--itI-

-*

y*

**
u

$.Las-Jg -+-~al

3W La

fts
*

n>

O-

*
iJ

TM;'f ;ry T >i


> l-t|2L;ii it 1

i.i

-MR

jnjl

XX liT BCillCX

-MI8B-

tae- 1
Stfcf t!l Sri t-

I
Silfc loiMr

&

iimn/

VHH

/?/v

e>

8fa

&

W> j-LS.yU

IH*. Jill

tf

PI
-tf-i*

>

tf

>H

-%S

t>

4|<L - i y~*i
2;

IR* in

iwrsf

j;

tf

lJ;

ftgl

iuw: live

.15

ilt

JMflL...

fjH

it

JS

J*

I SR. Sll B3C4


IKFt U2IT-MII

A))..

*->

y.

Hj

tftQjii

.1/

IT S5

'Ib-tifrr~4Pm*
i raw

KI3W*

-r~iZri$(r~HSs

C/

&

LU

Jif*

CP
-Ml

*L_

cc1,

MU

*iu

'>

_ _- .c

J*

:1

i.h

TTF
an tit >cp< OH |

pf>r H *

x1

c -m 3i

335

336

MACHi ME SIDE

4)

MAIM SPINDLE

This section shows a motor circuit of the


tool eye. MIO is a motor and BROWN,

CONNECT! OH BOX
X40 1
1

BLACK, BLUE and YELLOW/GREEN

show each color of motor wires.


4J

"X401" is a number of the connector, and


the numeric characters 1 to 4 are pin
numbers of the connector.

li

AX401
2

A3
X40I

BROWN

MIO
BLACK

BLUE

YELLOVf/GREEN

NC TERMINAL

5)

This section indicates a signal output and


Y3, Y4 and Y5 transfer confirmation
signals to the NC board.
TOF.M, TOR.M and TOU.M are names
used in the ladder.

XCF33 is a name of a connector and 17B,


16B and 15B indicate a wiring place of the
connector.

BOARD

A3

XCF33
17B

Y3
TOF. Id
Y4
TOR. M

Y5
TOU. M

16B

15B

6)

KA3, KA4 and KA5 are relay coils and

1M

m to
1

numeric characters "1 and 16" indicate a

relay terminal number connected to a

TOOL EYE ARM HIGH

a I 036206

relay.
i

is

TOOL EYE FORWARD

"a/036206", "b/036206" and "a/036207"

written under the names indicate the


areas related to a function of these relays.
"a" indicates the place of "contact a" and
"b" indicates "contact b" respectively.

7)

alMS206
&IOW2Q7

16

TOOL EYE REVERSE


a\mm

o mm

TITLE

To see "a/036206" of KA3, for example,


the last four digits (0362) of the drawing
number enclosed by a red frame shows
the page number that covers KA3 in its
06th line.

TOOL EYE (OPTION)

D RWN N c
,

32000340362

arid! Faineipt Tr8ds_Law


T? "C fife W fe tfe 51? tfa L HZ. j"

r>

337

338
ti

IA

pJ

S>

J*

II

w~

Of

T-f

Ut

uv

R &W.

'iSTBW

&
i>;

The area enclosed by a blue frame that is


in the 06th line on page 0362 is the
portion related to KA3.

UT.

**

scXb ri..

! ifrfi-W*
iA-e- **-

.....
JM..

..

&

.** n

-SM

3t>:

I.Ufr l.rt

*H

>

1C
i

k>i>

T/- VH

VJ

-A'lU, j.{

14s-

W7

i,1J -x1!*

!nr

UXM

r/r r v

>*

mt

u* ('tL
i*

r16!
.

.V

hi,

il2SS

gjry

:s

in cnim

*-

U\ l

OK. tv rcurvKi

rxx

-a-

p- - -iLZ

r h\:-

.Mi
U

rnn m
$

yj

-H*

Btm
SM"

%
r

rt

lEl.

;s

;;

I IK CJill <11

wm

.laiVPin.

if

;s

1SX Ill K7VN

IBM!

i<i

a
&

Ifctijl KiM*

lijC

ZAP'S

J;

8)

i;

->v~

rw

Iffc ai'JIK-

..

4M-T*

Cii

---

J
w* n*

C{'

:<l

Ill

~n.

VLJH.

sOJ

v*r-

TTV

aa

j *
'
ci* EBH |
pp*r>

,"-r r .

y*

NC TERMINAL
BOARD A3

9)

This section indicates a signal input and


X198 transfers a confirmation signal to
the NC board.

I . OK Q 1/4W
rv,

X198

SKIP (TOOL EYE 1)

1M
SKIP COMMON

339

340

m XL

Electrical Circuit Diagrams

P-

]
li

i
tv-

*
i i
Ft

ip

.m..

r
i

SJJ

"3"'

_
1

mrT
Yv

JjP*'


'Xf-

CTW *.VJSUP.',*

, 1 1.

! V V6*vV ail
fcT*

Mil

icrr

I ST

W1 >U*llltt-S
nm*

wnx>

tv-awa

?*-*M1**tl*
4. 'St
*>*1*#i

, Sr, to* *o
1

l is*

-A

IBI-SHS* rew'SPi 33H

**

&

'-

r--4

..r

*.-f-

WHO

Abbreviation Comparison List


lip." tir.i

fej

it*

ife.I- Kass.

Hil

V-'S

SITS'*

....

e*

ti*

liawrffA'iC-

Lfcu.

LJffiL..
V",

Yv
\ \w i
Y

ZL

4B*Jim us

International Electrical Codes

YYY

&<>
CT!Hrn MlfCX

<#11

<*til

ili

GTi<

C8

Cl

ex - I I

Di J

4<

*511

ks*u

Jtl

Ins-'ia

ir,ftr

tMT*x

u*.>

tit
Ct-#-

tu
14##

fi-

it!!

is uh :nki

] f*l*> f

j a**. j st-ki|

o-n-.'J *i

Lit* ilitt*

fI**

Uil

lilllJU

ai-u

Via

R.n

HI

V-*

A list of the I.E.C. and


abbreviations used to
write this manual can
be located in the front
section of the Electrical
Circuit Diagrams.

:;:.V

Electrical Circuit Diagrams


pi

te

f:-.

_
-t=j
i

<by;|'-.;;. :

TTOfirj

f.s

IJ !

Breaker Abbreviation

.
.
.
.....

*&mV VrtM*

;i
it

'.t ;

&$v

i ,)
1 !

IT

Is
j

l1
SI

ic

L-_j-

is optional

'i>t

JTI

, V

Mi

.,i*Jaoaant;
!

i;*j

!n

It|

1*

TV

J
u ;t

; j jrm

R:
L...~

&
T*

fc

t"
j V

HI

tf.

--

JS.-v

4-11 <t)W

* n

**>*'*',

mm <

-JSA,

Ti*|.

ssw.

KUtft

11

y;

31

< 'Jrl-r

war
Yamazaki Mazak Europe
will not apply to U.S.

w:

i*i Metric "Wire Size& Color

T3ff ITflM

'

JS. Vr* im. j


,

+TU. 1*1 ft

'

wi

r.\
r1

i.xfcrwt'.

- 1pJW*c

-JWSH ji

S'

w*\

lk.
v 1>~*mu
HiiJjSuwat

Vt

1
j JT3BS-+I
uacSi
i

ftt f

a ww

- - ----. . .
-L_

wi

>.'

; Irfni

11* BL
*

-i

v-<

!?<*

y,..4....Q,

>-

I /mv*f -au.
:-p ,:T>4 - -4j--

_iUKu_-i.t-.i.I

ill-;

<"'

i r.Entire area dotted


M|

--.-v--

1* i

itis
**tcr> i

rm-M,

m-c

341

342

IS 7
-Iv

m
I

ute,

Electrical Circuit Diagrams

i &*.

fe

53*23*

Sfe

fe-.<

V,

fel;
V

Ui **

The 253VAC upper limit is to be considered an important


factor and every effort to avoid exceeding this limit should
be made. The best continuos voltage range for machine
operation is 208~230VAC.

'

m
mi
l

The 60 Hz machines manufactured in the U.S. are


designed for 230V + 10% (thus a I'ange of 207~253VAC).

Ifcs
pr

m,

Normal acceleration & deceleration of spindles generate


3.5% ~ 7.0% regenerative line voltage.

w*

it
:i

t; J |
1
m

When using a transformer, the 210VAC secondary is the


appropriate target for machine operation, selecting a supply
voltage on the low range allows for positive variances without
adversely affecting the machine.

Electrical Circuit Diagrams

&#

When a problem develops on a machine, more than


likely the problem will be on the hardwired side,
Before assuming that the problem is definitely on the
machine side, trace the problem back to the PLC input

He

or output.

ll

A"

p*-

After identifying PLC address, view the state of the


address on the Diagnosis Monitor Screen.

343

344

Electrical Circuit Diagrams

tfe

How to locate the PLC address.

'Tii

Jr-

t m

Example: The coolant pump motor is not turning on*

Step 1* With the Elementary Diagram List search for the


drawing numbers with the (4 series) included. Once
the 4 series is located, read through the title column
for a related item and then view the drawing.
Examples:

|146|35400840220,0|AUX. MOTORS ~

|35400840550,0|POWER PANEL CONTACTORS


|222|35400841140,0|AC-PCBPC OUTPUT RELAY
167

| Electrical Circuit Diagrams


-*

W SJ~

-r

*m<w* *am

s*

4 Series, Page 22, Additional Page

,H

seen
y-

Xvjm,

A:

]* I

...

tff

mm !

ST

i'yH

..
"j

L,<

j**

=-

ssraw

i
i

ij

n-

c
p
y

*h

......
.....
r

!:*''*fc;S:.:E532lB3iiii5S5B?a3

- %

- -.-

This drawing
has the coolant

pumps 3 phase
motor.

l
if

!v:

'

,.

s.**

w "
'jmgml j-

Now for step 2


locate the coil
that will engage
the contactor.

345

346
1

M&'m
8

*'

IS

Electrical Circuit Diagrams

fife: |

H 5.%-.

mm#!*.

V;
t.

Thermal Relay

1-

USS*

# *

",j - w&m

i:

PM#

f1

l*U|
\~T
.....
.....

V1.W~-

I It

P 2*

!**

FU

i>*

Contactor Pin #

i.

&
i*k

[:r:::aTtA

4-

IS+m

*15

--V-

,c

15

3-

cosLmt PUMP Hero?

5hvf

R* ! 2 3
f

s;

MIS

?**

711 ivFTTT

VgLLCW:/tiHfEM

l\

!/; ;
La-

rt!*PMH

iQDl
SSO

<4.tL..
,

ijE!l

Wire#

gtisg

sura

OBUi

Tutu

**

UIS

MmaiwasBit

26

I'I

/r

?**

rn ..

221

i ,W,|A!

jrtj

2$

4 Series, Page 22, Additional Page

-au.

ii
ESH333jB

ft

mrnm *m i* 3.9ms1

ki

Itazasd

&2&JLLJJ

13ISSE ISSEsri.

SM;

T7v

B
y

| Electrical Circuit Diagrams


*

'.'

<

p
ftfti I I

** nt

aft8

iiftil

F11

AJBUWI

wct

Fit

rtlJ

lit

-.

.<l!L

12

0b,

511

S-1

MI

mi !

Me
U

214

-ft

IS

IS

1
l

ft-

>

'1

211
t*lj

Li

'

l?
it

i*

r.marm

'drt)\ntri~

2si

'

-.

v-

-~-'v

This drawing
has the coolant
MYIJRRJ.IC
| pumps motor
m m**" starter coil.

....
ry*e

>4

'

wjrw

_
I

M -II W
4

COCLANT P'X K)TC

-S

for step 3
locate the relay
l M coil that will
hftM
engage the relay
Hi
contact.
m\\

I Series, Page 55, Additional Page 0

347

348
r""""

Ip
i

Electrical Circuit Diagrams


&

,Imm

Wil

Tn7v

TJTIFT# i

!i

11

rt

TTTTK

FI

>*

10

mi

tt m

(CIM/Ml

IS

_
K

Wii e#
j H

IT W HDTOR

ri - *
IA I--* t
%

*:

Cross Reference
To Coil Location

'OR

wrtjRxa.li

11

FI 3

X5J1

.
*46

WCH

ll

AJMBWT*!

Pin#
feV;

iTn 1

J
I

CHIP CCW
H

Connector#
jTTT

ft

17
H

]*

f;|
.

*1

n*

TOW

ITEISIffla?

Cross Reference To
Normally Closed Contacts
i

tor"

lb:i

TM

Series, Page 55, Additional Page 0

Electrical Circuit Diagrams

SVi

SB
K'.

j' lyv*'

m
i

m:

it

?0

ftP

aum, ""w
hr@ Cf-

31
22

2!

2*

25
26

27

'a
n

dOJSu

sHILH

C3U J 1 1

734

a-

-
-*

m
1

1V

--

H<5

MW>

Vifcn
H<5-

K.SKJ

5!

YCfe
L

:WAI

)V.

S?

rx*o?

vtfe
H4

<f

-4

i/lPD*

KQJJW

2V-@
35

.;

734

moi

W57

?o

NexM

50**1

"'*

cw

Jl

Shown S :

TJ:

Jfc-0 -L2
<fii

cojj-.i

tt*ui

umx%

V*E*

*|'

M-a

This drawing
has the coolant
pumps PLC
output address.

CHXX CPEH

}W
CHUCX ac*
1I*XI

fi

fSKM"!9%*)
&JMr

Now for step 4

tan SLHre

locate the PLC


tail SLCEvt ftvt*S

C COLON T
tacu/ii

'

w':

' '

'*.'

address on the
Diagnosis Monitor
Screen.
'.vi i'.S,**iv

Senes, Page 114, Additional Page 0

349

350

IP

Electrical Circuit Diagrams

<6?

---v-

......
-v

MB

l*

/M.

2D

51

gTlniix-

DUO. (Pf*

rr

LLJ ye

CMJCK aosf

>i*

2T

Y?T
CH-K

35

Cross Reference To

FTW.I

*w
CCU $1 I

741

c-

L 3U*lt W-WO

fvMl i.JTTBTS

XCH44 L

7*i

Normally Open Contacts H


*XW

*i

pm

COOLANT

YOi

rawsi i

FuT

HB Wire #
/

|L *

4} i DU

25

|l|

*mxx

ITTSril

55

Ml

PPCN

CIMMUI

*%

jcj

$1Vi mull

rJ

mrsi

a!

|%

Ml

rnmmmm

mmmmimmwm

EmTTmi

>-A ;

'$ V v
<

. > , i#

Li

HIM

ft

Mg
4.l:Ai Vi. L

[y

sJlllMMK

Strips, Page 114, Additional Page 0

351

352

This is a newer example of the Electric Circuit Diagrams


I

h.

LIfC

(40040/23)

6 Li SL2 6L3

A
KMLG

FRIO

L1

3
4

6.0A

Vli

61.3

Vli

7/'

<40300/12)

\
PC

V3V

HYDRAULIC RUHR
MOTOR 2.2KV

200V 50Hz 7.6A

60Hz 6.8A

Z10

HZ5

XT2

35
+

zL

C DOLING FAN

ft PI

100 V 60Hz 0,15 A

c
4PC T JJ

c/0 UNTT

POWER PANEL

1M 15

li

Hrn.H

MOTOR

YQ1

oc

i
/

12

>110

LLLL

Q?

10

B19y
2300 7 A

VEl

300

X1030

S42
\ \

FRiO

KM10

M3

<403CG/12>

13

AinA2

fee

HYDRAULIC PUMP
MOTOR STARTER
40300/03
4-0 300/12

I!

16

14

X1030

15

S \

16
E

16

17
19

2L+

REF

* (4D330/11)
FRIO

19

20

98

JH.

1349

9?

REF
* (40370/05)

21

NACHM

mz
ppi

cc

BASE I/O LIMIT

TJJ

SPI

23
*

1500

;<526

x'98

//A 9

\\

I26

25

X55

A19y.:
?/

2L+

HYDRAULIC PRESSURE

XII

HYDPS

DOWN

2b

27

8
9
30
31

32

33

TITLE should say


Hydraulic System

34

35
A
A
A

A
&

CHK-'L BY

V
CfWilD OVERLOAD HEATER SCTTCHG FHCM 9*70 60A 2/32/99 J &
CHAM5ED rm KCTCP FROM 2SOVAC TU JQOVftC 1/23/99 JS

YNV&m MAZAK

/7

10' 27-98

CORPQPfflOH

M.HDTTA

DRWN BY

TITLE
10-27' 9B HEAD LUBE PUMP
MET DR

J, BRYANT

DRVH

M3 557K01403002

353

This product is subject to all applicable export control laws and regulations by Japanese Governnent

354

355

356

Its important to understand the


difference between how Electrical
Ladder and PLC Ladder function.
Electrical Ladder it based on
physical closing and opening of
contacts. PLC Ladder is based on
logical status of contacts. Instead of
close or open, PLC contacts are 1
or 0.
357

358

To better understand PLC Ladder


we need to review a few basic
electronic logic circuits.

Digital

signals have only two values,


Ml" and 0",
High" and Low", or
On" and Off", or
True" and False".

On

359

Off

High

Low

360

Logic:

SI
The

Switches in Series (AND)

S2

SI

S2

Lit

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

0
0
0
1

bulb will light only under certain conditions: what?

bulb will turn on only when switches SI AND S2


are closed, for all other combinations the bulb is off.

The

Logic:

/
SI

Switches in Parallel (OR)

SI

S2

Lit

0
0
1
1

1
0
1

1
1

/
S2
The

bulb will light under certain conditions: what?

bulb will turn on when switches SI OR S2 are


closed, for all other combinations the bulb is off.

The
361

362

Logic: Opposites! (NOT)

The

Lit

0
1

1
0

bulb will light under certain conditions: what?

bulb will turn on when switch S is OFF, and turn


off when switch S is ON.

The

This circuit is for illustration only!


If this was a real circuit, what would happen to the battery
when switch 5 was dosed?

Logic Gates}

AND
mm

mm
n>;

s;'

bacasmi

mm

:r
'

y-'

i
:

Am&rte

'

m 'msemSBm

Two-IiFrmn+

'

Aii
11

wmmmm

Q
B |
I

m
m immm

o
m NtaS
Pill

fa si

s:-<:
;r

IIRHS&I

mm|i

The output of an AND gate is 1 only when all inputs are 1.


Only

when Input A /\N0 Input B are 1. the output is 1.

363

364

Logic
W'l

......

[I

Two -Input OR Sate

Sates: OR
OR
Truth Table
A

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

0
1
1
1

The output of an OR gate is 1 when any input is 1.

When Input

A
OR Input
B is 1, the output is 1.

Logic
fm

Gates: NOT

NOT
Truth Table
r

NOT Sate

Note that NOTgates have only one input.

The output of a NOT gate is the opposite of the input.

365

When Input is 0, Athe output is 1.


When Input A is 1, the output is 0

366

Summary of

Logic

Logic gates may

AND Gate

Sates and Truth Tables


have one or more

OR Gate

inputs.

NOT Gate

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

0
0
0
1

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

0
1

1
0

1 isi

m88H

1
1

C
Basic PL Contacts
In PLC Ladder the
NO contact is
representing the
value of 1 .

In PLC Ladder the


NC contact is
representing the
value of 0.
367

368

C
Basic PL Contacts
If this NO contact
which represents a
logic 1 is not
highlighted then its not
true and must be a 0.

If this NO contact
which represents a
logic 1 is highlighted
then its true and must
be a 1 .

C
Basic PL Contacts
If this NC contact

which represents a
logic 0 is not
highlighted then its not
true and must be a 1 .

IV

mm

If this NC contact
which represents a
logic 0 is highlighted
then its true and must
be a 0.

369

370

Electrical Ladder vs PL Lodder

51

XI

(AND)

S2

II(
X2

)
yi

Lets compare a electrical circuit to an PLC circuit.

Electrical Ladder vs PL Ladder

/
SI

Jli

S2

MNC))

ii(

371

yi
XI
X2
S1 physically closes and X1 highlights to show you
that the logic 1 is True. PLC contacts wont change
from NO to NC on the PLC monitor because they
are logical not physical.

372

Electrical Ladder vs PL Ladder MND)

SI

II
II
XI

S2

X2

yi

Now S1 and S2 are physically closed and X1 and


X2 are both highlighted to show you that the logic 1
is True for both. Both outputs will now be 1 .

List of Commonly Used Abbreviations for Mazatrol PLC Devices


PRS

= Proximity Switch *(xxx) = *denotes active low


SS = Select Switch
RS = Reed Switch
SW

= Switch

373

PB = Push Button
.M = Machine Side
PS = Pressure Switch
LS = Limit Switch
CD = Command
INT = Interlock
.B = Button (typically on operation panel)
.N = Signal to or from the NC
,L = Lamp (indicator lamps on operation panel)
.P = Parameter related
CL = Clamped or Closed
UCL = Unclamped
OP = Open
EXT = Extend
RET = Retract S = Solenoid
ST - Start T = Timer
FIN = Finish R = Relay

374

Assume that Alarm 250: SPINDLE START MISOPERATION has occurred. The following explains a

procedure to investigate a cause of the alarm using the ladder circuit.


(The INTEGREX series is used here as an example and the trace procedure for other models is basically the
same.)
P250 Ml 209

HI

{TOR

R7000 H2000

R700o}

Ml 209

{WAND R7000

6
P251

HDFFF

R7000}

{iNC

R2130}

M200

11
F252

M200

M200

15

4
M200

Hf

{PLS

Ml 2 28}

{SET

M5003}

{RST

M5003}

Ml 2 28 XI11

HMf

21

XI11
M200

{WOR

28

M200
33

R7000= 641

XI 56

375

READ

10775 /

{MOV

HFFFF

K4
Y310 }

R2130= -14887
JW<

jHeiaory (

R7000}

R7000 HI

3Z718 Step) Mode

III

JMONITOR
II

HI >00 L

RUN/

STOP

..

END

When the MONIT OR menu key above is pressed, the following screen will be displayed

Next , Press the -< >- Menu Key


376

P 2 50

Ml 209
0

HI

[TOR

R7000 H2000

R7000}

Ml 209

{WAM) R7000

P251

R7000}

[INC

R2130}

M200

11

P 2 52

HDFFF

M200

M200

15

i
M200

[PLS

Hf

Ml 2 28}

Ml 2 28 XI11

21

[SET M5003}

HI-iHf
XI11

[RST

M5003}

M200

[TOR

28

M200
33

R7000= 641
Memory

<

1077S /

R7000 HI

XI 56

[MOV

HFFFF

R7000}
K4
Y310 }

R2130= 23891

32718 St-ep)

HI- HP HH

Mode
'

jyy

Ti

H >- >[ Y- TRIGGER RE0IST.

HEX

Enter F50 using the numeric keypad, so the F50 ladder circuit will be displayed on the screen.

T4S

M3433 M3110

F50

1ST92

F50 is ON. F50 was turned


On by:
1.
2.
3.

4
113430 M3454

-1 \

T45
M3430
M3417

M3417 F9S

-1 \

F97

IH

There is no reason to look for the (3)


three signals. Instead , you should
focus on why M3433 is a 0 it
should be a 1. Reset will get rid
of the alarm but, it will reappear as
soon as you try to start the spindle
again. M3433 must be brought to
a 1 before you can run the spindle.

Ml 50 3 M2Q2

HI-

377

--

II

__

M3433 (ENBST) Spindle Start Enable

MIS

|j

T45

Ml?

F50

Vt HH

M3 1 10 (S-MODE) Spindle Mode

HI-

I \

32718 Step )

KEY SIGNALS

Ml 9

1077 S /

Ml 50 4

Ml 6

Jriemory (

M3111

Mode

4F j

(SJOG.T) Spindle Jog Timer

M3430 (SPST) Spindle Start


RESET PB
Nl/
X140

M3417 (SPRNM) Spindle Run Memory

M3454 (ENBRUN) Spindle Run Enable

jttOHITOR |

F50

II

-[ ]- TRIGGER REGIST.
|

HEX

Enter M3433 using the numeric keypad, so the M3433 ladder circuit will be displayed on the screen.
378

M3501 M4053 Y4E0


16768

M5135 M5133 M3432 M3705

lil III

Hlil
M5128 M2601

M3433

<

>

M5326

Hf-Hl
M6948

HI

(Memory <

j|

I MISS
10 7 7 S /

If

__

I IS

32718 Step )

11

Mode
i

...

(HOKITGI*.

>-

M3433
HL
:

Enter M3501 using the numeric keypad, so the M3501 ladder circuit will be displayed on the screen.
X444

X445

M3501

5725

M5375 M3498 M3498

-<

>

<

>

T80

X444 is "PC input signal from

D40

TOOL EYE forward end


confirmation sensor" and X445 is
"PC input signal from TOOL EYE
reverse end confirmation sensor".
M3501 has a "function to rotate the
spindle" that is enabled only when
the X445 is on. The alarm occurred
because X445 was not on.
If the TOOL EYE is retracted, the
TOOL EYE reverse confirmation
sensor must be malfunctioning.

ISO

20

[Memory!
379

1077S /

jfl.

32718 Step;

20

D40

rso = o

j|

i,

Mode

j-f

{ttOHITOR EC

I JSSE5

M3501

TRIGGER REGIST.

mmm
HEX

380

DIAGNOSIS (MAKER) - LADDER MONITOR Display

2. Display data description

No.
1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

item
Exit
Previous
StepNo.

Dev. No.
-I !/
-< >-

- -

A t

11

Dec
Hex
Trigger

12

Regist.

13
14
15
16
17
18

Run/Stop

NC<-IC
NC->IC
NC<-HD
NO>HD

ROMCOPY

Unit

Data description
This key is used to exit the ladder display,
Th is key is used to return to the previous menu on the display,
This key is used to search by Iad5erstep numbers?"
This key is used to search nocvrestricted by device number.
This key is used to search normally' open contacts,
This key is used to search normally closed contacts.
This key is used to search for coils,
This key is used to search for instructions.
This key is used to change the displayed data to decirraL
This key is used to change the displayed data to hexadecimal
This key is used to freeze the screen when a monitored device
changes state.
This key is used to display a device status of either ON or OFF at
the bottom of the screen.
This key is used to RUN or STOP the PLC.
This key is used to transfer date from IC-Card to NC.
This key is used to transfer data from NC to IC-Card.
This key Is used to transfer data from Hard Drive to NC,
This key is used to transfer data from NC to Hard Drive
This key is used to transfer dab between FLASH ROW and

__ ___ __
_

RAM.
19

PLCLANG

_____
__
____

This key is used to transfer data between FLASH ROW and

LANGUAGE FILE

Instruction
WAND

DAND
WOR
DOR
MOV
DMOV

FMOV
BMOV

SET
RST
>,<
D>,CK
a
]

Function
AND Instruction (16 Bits)
AND* Instruction (32 Bits)
OR Instruction (16 Bits)
DOR* instruction (32 Bits)
MOVE* instruction (16 Bits)
"MOVE* Instruction (32 Bits)

FORCE MOVE1 Instruction


BIT MOVE" Instruction
"ADDRESS SET Instruction
"ADDRESS RESET Instruction
(Resets a noted address that has been set)
"COMPARE" Instruction (168Ey
"COMPARE" instruction (32 Bits)
"EQUAL TO" Instruction (16 Bits)

D=
BCD

"EQUAL TO" instruction (32 Bits)

BIN

BCD TO BINARY* Conversion


"BINARY ADDITION* Instruction
BINARY SUBTRACTION" Instruction
DIVISION instruction
"BINARY MULTIPLICATION Instruction

t
'#

"BINARY TO BCD" Conversion

PLS

PULSE ON" Instruction (Each Scan)

PLF

"PULSE OPPHnstrudion (Each Scan)


"SUB-PROGRAM CALL Instruction
"CONDITIONAL JUMP" Instruction
RETURN* To Main Sequence Proyam
"INCREMENT ADD 1 instruction
"DECREMENT Subtract 1 instruction
EXCHANGE Data Instrudion
"BIT ON* Instruction
"BIT OFF Instruction
"OR* Exclusive Instruction (16 Bis)
"SHIFT LEFT By Binary of "K" value
"SHIFT RIGHT By Binary of "K" value
"HEX" Value
"CONSTANT

CALL
CJ
RET

INC
DEC

XCH
BIT

Bll
WXOR

SFL
SFR

HK

381

382

P250

G;

H1209

TiaOR

CB

M1209

PZ51

PZS2
IS

R7000 H2000

[MAUD R7000

R700ol

HDFFF

R700o}

{iNC

R2130}

H200

t
H200

H200

M2 00

[f'LS

E;[SET

H1228 Xlll

21Hhr4f

H122GJH500-

Xlll

RST

HS003J

H200

f
H200

[MOR

WOR

WAND

3
4

SET
RST
HEX VALUE

5
6

CONSTANT

X156

R7000= 641

R7000 HI

R2 130= 22639

-[HOV

HFypy

R7000}
K4
Y3io

R7000 = DECIMAL 641,HEX 0281 or BINARY 0000 0010 1000 0001


When WOR with HEX 2000
BINARY 0010 0000 0000 0000
The result will be HEX 2281
BINARY 0010 0010 1000 0001
The result of the WOR INSTRUCTION is now stored in R7000.
R7000 = DECIMAL 641, HEX 0281 or BINARY 0000 0010 1000 0001
When WAND with HEX DFFF
BINARY 1101 1111 1111 1111
The result will be HEX 0281
BINARY 0000 0010 1000 0001
The result of the WAND INSTRUCTION is now stored in R7000.
The contacts of M5003 will now be true.
The contacts of M50O3 will now be false.
The HEX VALUE to be used in the instruction.
If the K is to the outside of the instruction, it states a limited amount of
BITs to use.
If the K is to the inside of the instruction, it states a decimal value to use.
Constant BIT values
K3 = 12 BITS K4 = 16 BITS
K1 =4 BITS
K2 = 8 BITS
K5 = 20 BITS
K7 = 28 BITS
K6 = 24 BITS
= 32 BITS

K\

383

M200

S498
P28

K2

D24

D23

D25

D25

D29

P89

6579

D170

R2170 K10

M454

D23

3
H470

{=

KO

D29

{>

H5

D89

6621

6869

}IF
HO

3
4

>

<

-[CALL

R2170 = 2000

D89

D170

20000

D23

22

D24

D2S

BINARY MULTIPLICATION
R2170 = DECIMAL (2000) MULTIPLICED by CONSTANT 10
The result will be (20000) and stored in D 1 70.
BINARY DIVISION
D23 = DECIMAL (22) DIVIDED by CONSTANT (2)
The result will be (if) and stored in D24.
~~
EQUAL TO
If D29 EQUALS CONSTANT 0, then instruction is true.
GREATER THAN
If HEX 5 is GREATER THAN the data in D89, then the instruction is
true.

384

LESS THAN
If HEX 0 is LESS THAN the data in D89, then the instruction is true.

X230

1734

Ih

H23S

dk{HOV

H230

D617

Pll

P16

D618

[CALL

P12

[CALL

P19

D7S

R20

[CALL

2
H230

K900

R20

H200
5040

= o

MOV

+
!

>617

D618

D23

>23

K1

22

D7S

23

MOVE
Move the data from R20 to D617.
BINARY SUBTRACTION
Subtract the CONSTANT (900) from the data in R20 (0).
The result will be (0) and stored in D618.

-MNARYkDDlTlON
ADD the CONSTANT (1) to the data in D23 (22).
The result will be (23) and stored in D75.

385

H12Z8 Xlll

\hr~M-

{sBT

HEOO-

{RST

MS003}

R1937

D80

SFR

D80

K8

XCH

R1999

R1994]-

HI

D89

Xlll

t
MZOO

262

{HOV
1

H491

6853

H512

{ 1-[{BIT

R2109

K6

H480

HH

RZ109

K6

{HOV

R1937= O

SFR

D80

RZ109= 0

R1999= 3

R1994= 0

SHIFT RIGHT
The 16 BIT BINARY value in D80 will shift 8 places to the right, filling
the vacant places with 0s.
Example: If D80 = 24755 or Binary 0110 0000 1011 0011
0000 0000 0110 0000 1011
BIT INVERSE (OFF)
The instruction is true when R2109 BIT 6 is 0.
Will be
BIT ON
Deleted
The instruction is true when R2109 BIT 6 is 1.

BII

BIT

XCH

EXCHANGE
The value in R1999 (3) and R1994 (0) will exchange.
The result being R1999 (0) and R1994 (3).

386

H203

Clk[DHC

MZ7S

1513

M2014 M540

\br*r

3769

D4

R199?}

H201S

I H
3774

{=

K13

XI 50
8404

R1997J

{HOV

X109

KO

R1997J-

Ih-H

PLF

M744

[PLS

H378

M5003 nsoo3

J-HH
8424

D4

DEC
INC

PLF

PLS

{BIT

=3

R7005

K6

R1997= 1

R7 0 0 5 = 640

DECREMENT (SUBTRACT 1)
Subtract (1) from the data in D4 (3).
The result will be D4 = (2).
INCREMENT (ADD 1)
Add (1) to the data in R1997 (1).
The result will be R 1997 = (2).
PULSE OFF
Address M744 will be OFF for one scan of the PLC.
PULSE ON
Address M378 will be ON for one scan of the PLC

387

MZOO

XI 56

K4

JHOV

33

G\[BCD

X23C

II

3433

{/

R44

HFFFF

Y310

R44

D93

K5

D94

H594

KO

D95

<

}
2

H1199
4887

>

-[FMOV KO

R1S8

K4

[FHOV KO

DS4

K20

[BHOU R2782

D1006

K14

H229

if
H378

8481

R44

BCD

FMOV

BMOV

388

D93

D94

D9S

R1S8

BINARY TO BCD
The BINARY DATA in R44 will be changed to BINARY CODED
DECIMAL and moved to D93.
Example: If R44 = 1 3 5 or BINARY 0000 0000 1000 0111
The BCD stored in D93 would = 0000 0001 0011 0101
FORCED MOVE
BATCH TRANSFER OF MULTIPLE 16 BIT DATA BLOCKS.
A (0) will be moved into R158 ~ R161.
BIT MOVE
16 BIT DATA BLOCK TRANSFER
The first 14 BITS beginning with BIT 0 from R2782 will be moved to
D1006.

220{BIT

R414

K1S

J|

[CALL

PI

iPLS

M852

RET

P10

D100

H200

PI

XI 5B

4939

-\\

2
4957

H200

5340
PXO

t
H200

5523

{DHOV HI

5653

R414

CALL

RET

22672

D100

SUB -PROGRAM CALL,


Call SUB-PROGRAM PI
REtURU TO MAIO-PROGRTM
RETURN back to the LdcRr sequence where sub-program was called

389

390

Matrix Ladder Troubleshooting


Introduction

Troubleshooting with the Matrix Ladder software takes a bit more effort
than using the previous controls ladder tools. However the advantage of
having comments displayed while viewing ladder symbols will make up for
the added keystrokes.
First, you must load the ladder into the on-board area. Follow the
instructions, Matrix Ladder Monitor - Appendix A
Simple troubleshooting.

Once the ladder monitor is displayed along with comments, the next step
is to do a search for the contact or coil that is causing the problem. In most
cases it is to search for the alarm generated on the screen. See the ladders
element or comment list for the most complete listing of alarms.
An example is alarm 217.
Alarms 200 to 399 which are generated by the machine itself, simply
subtract 200 and do a search. In this example, this would be FI 7.
Now, the Matrix deviates from the M640/Mpro.
Alarms 1200 to 1399 are searched by subtracting 1000.
Example:Alarm 1208 is searched by F208.
Alarms 200 to 399 on Head 2 of a multiplex will add 200.
Example: Alarm 250 on Head 2 will be searched by F450.
Alarms 1200 to 1399 on Head 2 of a multiplex will
Su 6 7 ftcT
Example: Alarm/301 will be alann searched by F701 .
Alarms 200 to 399 on Robot of multiplex will need addffifrfl. LJO0
Example: Alarm 202 on the GL will be searched by F602.
Assuming that you now have the ladder displayed with comments, press
the left menu key till you see the menu key Monitor

Pressing Monitor, you will see contacts highlighted in blue when on.
If there isnt anything highlighted, ensure that the top display doesnt say
monitor stop. If it does, select the Start/Stop to toggle it on.
Monitor

Another display at the top to pay attention to is the ladder file that it being
viewed. When searching for a contact or coil, the current ladder will be
searched. At the end of the ladder, it will state:

391

PLC Onboard
The find target could

not be: found. Find another

program.

NO

Enter yes, and will to another ladder file within the M01 area. Remember
there are multiple ladder files.
Pic Run
Or Stopped

Which Ladder file


Being viewed

Til

X
**

?1*

XMC

l*t

Monitor Mode
Or
Monitor Stop

-a***?*

1385

??*;

*1/08

mt S3

urn

mi

if!

LnJ

r
:E I s

II?

CI-iSCE

MDNlTm

iDto:

Searching for a contact or coil.


1 ) If yourf screen looks similar to the one above, press the left menu key
FIND
till you see
REPLACE

2) After selecting this menu key will allow you to select


FIND
CONTACT
OR COIL

392

IF!

3) Enter in FI 7 for alarm 217. and it will stop at the first contact or coil
of FI 7 it finds.
4) Pressing the TARGET menu key will toggle between contact and coil.

H3h-

-Th

28775

k F17

-tf-

OM.T

irf
X7

N971B

M9720

-1 hINTE

F17

H8010

ih:;M

RE

RIP

HV

28787

Itl

TARGET PROGRAM

N6011
M

s'

TARGET

|CONTACT

FIND

J<9718

JT432

)MAIN374

W.

F18

D
| M01

$10

TARGET

DEVICE

FIND

TARGET

PROGRAM

PROGRAM
CHANGE

Example above shows the search for F17 and the target selected for coil.
When you are finished searching, then keep pressing the left menu key until
display shows the copyright screen. Select END and will exit.
You will probably see the following menu display. Ignore its warning and
say YES to exit.

__

EH

Aili

'

.,

Mi V'

COPYRIGHT 2004

There is date not preserved efter it edits


d in the onboard edit area. The content o
the edit is lost when ending as it Is.

NO

I L RIGHTS RESERVED
1

YES

| MO!

NO

393

Appendix-A Matrix Ladder Monitor


1) Press DIAGNOS.
2) Press VERSION.
3) Press LADDER
MONITOR

4 ) Select

NC
FILE

5) Press OPEN.
6) Select OPEN again.
A) Display will say "Reading from Pic"
B) Display will say "Pic Onboard Complete"
7) Press OK.
8) Press <LEFT MENU< key twice to see LADDER in black now.
9) Select MONITOR and display will actual values.
10) If still not showing status, select START/
STOP
MONITOR
11) If No comments then may be that the comments aren't

selected to be shown.

A) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see the VIEW, select it.
TOOLS
B) Select COMMENT
DISPLAY
C)Make
sure there is checkmark beside | | COMMENT .
D) Press SET when finished.
Still No comment?
This is probably because the comment file (*. wed) wasn't

Loaded in with ladder in steps 5 and 6.


A) Keep pressing CLEFT MENUC key till you see the
main Mitsubishi Pic Programming Tools Copyright

screen .
B) Select ENVIRON .

SETTING
C) Select NC FILE
D)
SETTING

Click on the STORAGE PATH Box so it is highlighted


or just press arrow down key to highlight it.
F) The pathway should be C: \m6y_ymw\MPLC
G) Press SETTING menu key.
H) Press the Left menu key an select
NC
E)

FILE
I)

Repeat steps 5 through 11 to see the ladder with

comments .

394

Matrix Ladder Save Procedure.


Ensure both ladder and comments are saved.
1) Press DIAGNOS.
2) Press VERSION. Select >RIGHT MENU> key and enter 1131 and

press Input.
3) Press LADDER
MONITOR

4 ) Select

NC

FILE

5 ) Press OPEN .
6) Select OPEN again.

A)Display will say Reading from Pic


B) Display will say "Pic Onboard Complete"
7 ) Press OK.
8) Press CLEFT MENUC key twice to see LADDER in black now.
9) Select MONITOR and display will actual values .
10) If still not showing status, select START/
STOP
MONITOR
11) If No comments then may be that the comments aren't

selected to be shown.

A) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see the VIEW, select it.
_

TOOLS

B) Select COMMENT

DISPLAY
C)Make
sure there is checkmark beside | | COMMENT .
D) Press SET when finished.
Still No comment?
This is probably because the comment file (*. wed) wasn't
Loaded in with ladder in steps 5 and 6.
A) Keep pressing CLEFT MENUC key till you see the
main Mitsubishi Pic Programming Tools Copyright

screen .
B)

Select ENVIRON .
SETTING

C)
D)

Select NC FILE
SETTING

Click on the STORAGE PATH Box so it is highlighted


or just press arrow down key to highlight it.
F) The pathway should be C: \m6y_ymw\MPLC
G) Press SETTING menu key.
H) Press the Left menu key an select
NC
E)

FILE
Repeat steps 5 through 10 to see the ladder with comments.

395

ladder and comments are shown, go to next step to


save ladder and comment file.

12) If

13) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see the Copyright screen, the

LADDER must be shown as solid black.


14)

Press

15)
16)
17)
18)
19)

Press OPEN
Press OPEN again.
Select OK.
Press CLEFT MENUC key till see Copyright screen again.
Select I EXTERNAL
FILE

20)

Press

21)

Press EXTERNAL

NC
FILE

SAVE
PROJECT

SAVE
22)

If a USB jumpdrive is inserted, then make sure that


the Drive/Path is set correctly to the drive.

23)

Select PROJECT
NAME

24)

Enter in an appropriate filename, normally ladder


version .

25)

Press SAVE.

26)

Select OK.
The ladder is now saved to the USB Jumpdrive.

Note: The LPC file is not saved with the ladder. It must be
copied from the c:\m6y ymw\mplc or tplc folder.

Save the * . lpc and *.alm and *.bmp files from the
c:\m6y_ymw\mplc or tplc folders using Windows Explorer.

27)

Note: Note: When the project ladder is saved , it will be a


folder that includes sub-folders containing the ladder and
comments . The lathe, e-machine, and mill's file structure
are different.

Following example shows for Integrex Mark IV.

396

S~3 373MX11B
j

HM

B-Q Resource
! l__J
!

&>*!

LJ

SV'fe

Others

373MX11B

JC*U~

B-y Pou
l_J Body

Select an item to view its description.

Name >
U Resource

__
I

File Folder

&)Gppw.gpj

_!

Size | Type

1 KB
3 KB
1 KB
78 KB

Project.inf
ProjectDB.mdb

GX Developer Project
GX Developer Project
Setup Information

Microsoft Access Da. .

The Gppw . * , Pro ject . inf , and ProjectDB.mdb are structure


files for pic. Do not change/remove any of these from the
project's ladder filename.

Under Resource folder is additional folders, Others, Pou,


and the file param.wpa. Do not change/al ter/remove any.

I JOII1C

[_] Others
,*7.7*

L-JPOU

11 param.wpa

Resource

Size j Type

Name

LT:N--- j

wwanwifllt

if] 373MX1 lB.wcd

317 KB

WCD File

fe-

Others
The Others folder contains the comments for the ladder
which is used for ladder display.

Under the Pou folder is a folder called Body which contains


the actual ladder file .

Li

LIWIWIJ

Name

!*] 373MX1A8. wpg

bize

207 KB

Type

WPG File

Body

As stated earlier, E-machine and Mills file/folder


structure may be different for the pic ladder.

397

398

Matrix Pic Ladder Update Procedure R4 .


Added saving of ladder to hard drive c:\ladder(step 1 and 13 revised(R4))
1)

Backup the existing ladder if not done already and copy


in the new ladder from portable device, probably USB
drive to C : \Ladder (R4 ) . This ensures that the ladder
will be backed up properly in future using the backup
softwares .

Note: Power off and on between backup of ladder so that


the Ladder Onboard Sram doesn't have existing ladder in
it .

First part will be to load into the Ladder-F (M01 area) ,


part is to load into Ladder-B (M02 area) . The M01 area
controls actual machine and M02 controls simulation. These
ladders are identical so only need backup M01 area.

2nd

2) Press DIAGNOS.
3) Press VERSION. Select >RIGHT MENU> key and
and press Input.

4 ) Press

enter 1131

LADDER
MONITOR

5)

Select

6)

Select

7)

Select YES to stop the pic. Status before yes is RUN.


Question box will disappear. Note that doesn't say
PLC STOP like M640.

8)

Press DELETE .

9)

Press SEL. ALL

NC
FILE

PLC
Run/ Stop

Then DELETE

again and select

YES

/CANCEL
10)

Press OK. In red, you'll see WRITE LADDER TO ROM.

11)

Press left menu key twice Select EXTERNAL


FILE

399

12) Select

OPEN
PROJECT

Highlight the file folder containing new pic. This


should be directed to new file that was copied to c:\ladder
folder is step 1. (R4)
13)

14)

Press the SELECT button.

15) Select OPEN


16)

Press OK.

17)

Press CLEFT MENUC till see copyright screen.

18 ) Select

NC
FILE

19) Press SAVE.


20) Press SAVE

again(2nd

If it asks if

time).

you wish to overwrite, say ALL YES.

21)

Press OK.

22)

Press CLEFT MENUC key.

23)

Press

ROM
WRITE

This will clear out the ladder from SRAM area.


24)

Select YES.

25)

Select YES again (2nd time) when it asks you if you


really want to execute.

If the pic is somehow running, the following will be


as ked .
A) Select YES again (3rd time) It will ask you again, PLC is
in Run state, Is a ROM write performed, after stop PLC?

400

Translation: Pic is now running, the pic will


automatically stop and do a ROM write. Is this okay?

(4th

B) Select YES

STOP STATE.
26)

Press OK.

27)

Select

time) when message will say PLC is in a


Is PLC changed into a RUN state?

PLC

Run/ Stop
Select YES if the status window says: STATUS: STOP.
If says STATUS: Start, then proceed to step 29 to update
the second ladder Ladder-B (M02)

28)

29)

Press CLEFT MENUC key till see menu

30)

Select CONNECT

ENVIRON
SETTING

NC
SETTING
31) Press the Down Arrow key or click on drop down menu so
that is displays M02 in box.
32)

Press

SET

and M02 will be displayed in Orange M02

color at the lower right hand side of display.


At this point repeat steps 5 through 28 to load in the
pic to the Ladder-B side (M02)
33)

34) Before exiting go back to ENVIRON. SETTING, CONNECT NC


SETTING, and press Down Arrow key to reselect M01 .
35) If the lpc file is to be updated, delete or rename the
current lpc file in the c:\M6y_ymw\M_plc or T_plc folder.
The copy the new file into that directory.

Power off and on and update is complete. Verify by


looking at the version screen.

36)

401

402

1 Outline
This document describes the maintenance of the thermal displacement compensation software
(MazakTdc).
The traditional thermal displacement compensation function has performed the compensation
considering that the thermal deformation of the machine was proportional to the temperature. Using
this method, the thermal displacement could be compensated with high accuracy in the steady state.
However, just after the spindle speed was changed, it could not be compensated properly because
the time constants for the temperature change are significantly different between the thermal
displacement and the measured temperature.
The thermal displacement compensation software (MazakTdc) estimates and compensates the
thermal deformation of the machine based on the spindle speed and the temperature. It monitors the
spindle speed and compensates the thermal displacement according to the speed. Therefore, it can
compensate it properly even in the transient state.

2 Installation of the MazakTdc software


2.1

Function setting on Matrix

The software has been pre-installed in the hardware on Matrix.


To validate the software function, set the parameter as follows:

Step 1 Set the parameter 042 bit4 to 1. That will allow MazakTdc.exe to be started when the
power is turned on.

2.2 Individual installation


The following describes the procedure for the individual installation of the "MazakTdc software.

Step 1 Create a new folder named "C:Mazaktdc.


Step 2 Copy the MazakTdc.exe" file from a media such as a USB memory or a floppy disk to the
created folder C:Mazaktdc."
If you already have a parameters file, copy it to the same folder as the EXE file.
f-lnlxl

flWESiTB ' Mazaktdc


?yJWQ Sim

- M 7-f X/tV9i

3 3.5 CA FD
<C )
8

At :

/;!;
(A.)

77Tiioiir
MazakTdc.exe

fij] Parameler.txt

60KB
4KB 747#

_) Act obat Reader


_J Cpcu
J Custom Display

JSctbus
J Ladder
Ladder3

L_J Ladder 4
:_J LADDERWTNB
I m6y_vmvv
It Cj mtyboot

;+ i

1 Mainte

JIDSB

_J MC.Backup
_J MC'.Dir.ct

iL

_J

MC. Machine

P'2j
(ZSmim

ZJ
:;a=i

403

3 Version upgrade of the MazakTdc software


3.1 Version upgrade on MATRIX
The version upgrade of MazakTdc.exe will be automatically performed when upgrading the version

of the NC software.
The operations described in 3.2 Full version upgrade of the MazakTdc software might be
required due to a modification to MazakTdc.exe. In that case, that will be informed in the NC
software release notice.

3.2 Full version upgrade of the MazakTdc software


When upgrading the version of the MazakTdc software after its data structure is changed, the
parameters used in the previous version might possibly be applied after the version upgrade is
completed, resulting in a malfunction. Therefore, perform the following procedure to prevent the
previous parameters from being applied after the version upgrade:
Step 1 Before starting the NC version upgrade, open the MazakTdc window and save the
current parameters in the folder C:Mazaktdc.
As for how to open the MazakTdc window, refer to 5 Opening the window.
As for how to save a parameters file, refer to 8 Controlling the parameters.
If no change was made to the parameters on a customers machine, it is not needed to
save the parameters because the file of the default parameters at delivery already
exists in the folder C:Mazaktdc.

Step 2 Clicking on the Sr button will open the |Coefficient2 Setting.


X
dialog of ''Coefficient2 Setting..," shown on
Cl | o'oOOOOE+00
the right.

0.000Q0E+Q0

| . nnr-nn
c2 | 0.00000E+00

cii; j

o.oooooE+00

92

There are 12 parameters to be set, e1 to e4,


for X, Y and Z in the lower part of the dialog

Set all the values of these parameters to


0.

d2

j 0 OOOOOE+OO
0.00

Then, click the OK button after changing


the parameters to close the dialog.

......

*J
Z

c2

j 9.88000E-01
| 790oioOE-03

d1 | 8.823S3E-01

d1

j O.OOOOOE+00

d2

3.2941 0E-02

c)2

ei

0.00

el

J 0.00

e2

0.00

e4

0.00

e2

0.00

e2

0.00

e3

0.00

e3

0.00

e4

0.00

e4

0.00

cl

O.OOOOOE+OO

CANCEL

Step 3 Exit the running MazakTdc software.


Refer to 4.2 Exiting the software.
Step 4 Perform the NC version upgrade

Step 5 Restart the NC unit.


Confirm that the MazakTdc software was started. The icon will appear in the task tray.
Step 6 Stop the thermal displacement compensation.
Click the
button to stop the compensation.

404

Step 7 Import the parameters file.


Open the window, referring to 5 Opening the window.
Import the new parameters file, referring 8 Controlling the parameters.
Step 8 Check the parameters.
Confirm that the parameters set to 0 in Step 2 returned to 1.

Step 9 Restart
Exit the MazakTdc software and restart the NC unit.

3.3 Individual version upgrade of the MazakTdc software


The following describes the procedure for the individual version upgrade of the MazakTdc" software,
which is not involved in the version upgrade of the NC software.
Step 1 Open the "MazakTdc window and save the current parameters as a file in the folder
C:Mazaktdc.
As for how to open the MazakTdc window, refer to 5 Opening the window.
As for how to save the parameters file, refer to 8 Controlling Parameter.
If no change was made to the parameters for a customers machine, it is not needed to
save a parameters file because the file of the default parameters at delivery already
exists in the folder C:Mazaktdc.

Step 2 Clicking on the & button will open the


dialog of Coefficient2 Setting.., shown on
the right.

There are 12 parameters to be set, e1 to


e4, for X, Y and Z in the lower part of the
dialog

Coefficient Setting;.
X

j OOOOOOE+OO
e2 j 0.00000E+00
C1

d1

02

Set all the values of these parameters to


0.

j O.OOOOOE+OO
j O.OOOOOE+OO
0.00

|O.OOOOOE+OO
c2| O.OirULE-IO
C1

dl

02

81

mz

i::
v

j 8.82353E 01
| 3 2941 OE-02
0.00

'] 9.88000E 01
c2 j 7.90CObTT
C1

d1

j 0.00000E+00

d2

|O.OOOOOE+OO

ei

o.oo

e2

0 00

e4

0.00

e3 j 0.00
64

Then, click the OK button after changing


the parameters to close the dialog.

0.00

64

0.00

lr~:g<

CANCEL

Step 3 Exit the running "MazakTdc software


Refer to 4.2 Exiting the software.
Step 4 Open the folder C:Mazaktdc through the Explorer and change the name of the
MazakTdc.exe" file by adding the version number that is currently installed in order to
prevent the file from being overwritten. (For example, the name of the old version file was
changed to MazakTdc62.exe in the figure on the next page.)

405

Step 5 Copy the MazakTdc.exe |lj Itl-7


file from a media such as
a USB memory or a floppy 03 MazakTdc
disk to the folder.
i

d)

HSBj

CMazakTdo

U7XfcP

5 El ritd jtMg
Ml 1X03*1*8

Hsf

XK MazakTdc.exe

53' 0D lan_card_driver_pcislot_c||i
3 d) m6y_ymw
m6yboot

E3 Lfl

mainte

\B

*>| y|g| ,|
"]

]- 10] J2ctbus
i Q Kev
0-0] Ladder

lil-dl

. ..
-----------,...._

MazakTdc62.exe
Parameter txt |
Para meter05051 7# 1 .txt

360KB 7V.
360KB 77*!
3KB 74;
3KB 74;:

03 MazakTdc

03 MC_Backup

) i.,1 MC_Direct Mode

Prograr||l

i "d) MC_Machine Programs |||


h d) MC_Machine Programs! '0

SI

\i mcofiVift

il
s'1- /t

[725KB

!.3tGB)

Step 6 Double click on MazakTdc.exe.


Confirm that the MazakTdc software was started. The icon will appear in the task tray.

Step 7 Check the version of the MazakTdc software.


As for the check procedure, refer to 4 Basic function operations.
Step 8 Import a parameters file.
Open the window, referring to 4 Basic function operations.
Read a new parameters file in, referring to 8 Controlling the parameters.
Step 9 Check the parameters.
Check that the parameter value changed to 0 in Step 2 returned to 1 .
Check the value of each parameter, referring to 7 Functions in the window.
Step 10 Restart
Exit the MazakTdc software and restart the NC unit.

406

4 Basic function operations


4.1

Manual start of the software

Step 1 To manually start the software, double click on MazakTdc.exe.


The icon will appear in the task tray.

:1 ?

The thermal displacement compensation will begin just after the software is started.

4.2 Exiting the software


Step 1 Move the mouse pointer over the icon in the task tray.

jMazakTdc|

,a49

Step 2 Right click on the icon.


The Exit menu will appear.
-*

About MasakTcb...
Exit

j ?;58

Step 3 Left click on the Exit menu.


- The software will be exited.
When the software is exited, the thermal displacement compensation will stop.

4.3 How to check the software version


Step 1 Move the mouse pointer over the icon in the task tray.

[l 19:49
Step 2 Right click on the icon.
> The About MazakTdc... menu will appear.

About MazakTdc...
Exit

|P'~! II
S 20:00

Step 3 Left click on the About MazakTdc... menu.


The dialog with the version information will appear.

About Ma2akTDC
MazakTdc Version Beta 6.6

OK

Copyright (C) 2005 Yamazaki Mazak Corp.

407

5 Opening the window


Opening the window will allow you to set, change, save and import the parameters.
To open the window, it is required to enter the password.

5.1

Entering the password

Step 1 Move the mouse pointer over the icon in the task tray.

fMazakTdcl
19:49

Step 2 Double click on the icon.


-* The Password dialog will appear.
Password

rr~i

CANCEL

Step 3 Enter the password 1131 and then press the OK button

[3

Password

II

r
Oh

CANCEL

The Mazak Thermal Displacement Compensation window will appear.


-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformation Compensation
File Edit Compensation: Setting.. View Help

jjH : JJfe m ffi foj

Ready

408

ab Cd

; f j

HE

issiti

I!

r;

[HUM j

6 Contents shown in the window


The window provides the software processing information, the measured temperatures, the spindle
speed, the spindle load and the offset amounts.
The following shows the state of the window just after the compensation begins.

File

Edit

ab

ced # fj

;Loading DataCom OK.


.NCTable is attached correctly!
;Data Initialize OK.
;Fin>t Temperature : 20.80
;Start thermal deformation compensation !
;ye a r/d ate/time
T1
T3
T2
20.75
05/06/27 19:46:09; 20.85
21.98

Iv

V
...4.

-in|xi

Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformation Compensation


Setting. View Help

Compensation

Compensation time

Year/Month/Day
Hours:Minutes:Seconds

Processing information
T4
20.52

T5
0.00

mSp
0

mLd
4

cmp.X
6.000

cmp.Z
16.000

V.

V.

"V"
Measured
temperature
ch1, 2, 3, 4 & 5

cmp.Y
-6.000

Spindle Info.
Speed & load |

r-r

Offset amount
X, Y & Z

J
NUM

-- 1

jf||

After the compensation begins, only the compensation information is displayed in the windows as the
time passes.
The measured temperatures will be shown in the order of ch1, ch2, ch3, ch4 and ch5 immediately
after the time column.

- ~|xj

-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformation Compensation


File Edit Compensation Setting.. View Help

iH|

&

m[mm

05/06/27 19:48:03:
05/06/27 19:43:13;
05/06/27 19:48:23 ;
05/06/27 19:43:33;
05/06/27 19:43:43;
05/06/27 19:43:53;
05/06/27 19:4903;

20.95
20.95
20.95
20.95
20.98
20.95
20 95

20.75]
20.70
20.75

20.75
20.75
20.75
| 20.75 |

ab

TToil '20.47 Food


22.07 | j 20 52 1 I 0.00

20.47 | I 0.00
20.47 | | 0.00

22.03
22.12
22.03

22.03
21.98

20.47

20.47

20.47

I I

0.00

| 0.00

I I

0.00

7'

3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000

4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500

-6.500
-6.500
-6.500
-6.500
-6.500

....

-6.500
-6.500

Ready

ch1

ch2

ch3

ch4

ch5

12.500
12.500
12.500
12.500
12.500
12.500
12.500

JNUM

t.

409

7 Functions in the window


7.1

Functions

File

Menu Bar Title


Save

Icon

The description of the function


Overwrite save the text in the window to the specified file in
the Text format.
Save the text in the window as a new file in the Text format.
Import the parameters file (extension: *.txt). However, it
cannot be imported while performing the thermal
displacement compensation. If you try to import the file
during the compensation, the alarm Please Stop
Compensating!" will appear.
Export and save the parameters to a file (extension: *.txt)
Exit the software.
Undo the previous editing operation.
Cut the selected text in the window.

Save As..
Import Parameter

Edit

Export Parameter
Exit
Undo
Cut
Copy

Compensation

Setting..

Copy the selected text in the window.

fli

Paste

Paste the copied or cut text to the window.

Select All
Start

Select all the texts in the window.


Start the thermal displacement compensation.

ffi

Stop

Stop the thermal displacement compensation.

Inter Face

Open the Inter Face parameters setting dialog.

Coefficient!
View

&

Open the Coefficient! parameters setting dialog.

ab

Coefficient2

Open the Coefficient2 parameters setting dialog.

Toolbar

Show or hide the tool bar.


Show or hide the status bar.
Hide the Mazak Thermal Displacement Compensation
window. (To show the window again, double click the icon in
the task tray.) _
Show the version dialog.

Status Bar
Hide Window
Help

About Mazak Tdc..

7.2 Setting the interface parameters.


Clicking the
button on the tool bar will open the Inter Face Setting dialog. The following table
provides the description of each parameter.

|Inter Face Setting..


j NC Type

| C M640T,MT,TE,MT-5X,T Nexus
; C M64DM, M-5X, M Nexus

C M640M Pro

r M640MT Pro

f? MATRIX

Temp filter

Load filter

Compensation

Temperature

(2500

|2234
RT2|2230

RZ 2226

RT3 ] 2232

RY

Rsts j 0

410

Round Unit

10
20
)001 mm

RT1

RT4

fo
[

RT5 0
Unit

Follow up (hour)

Time Constant

Rregister IJF

RX 2501

Interval (sec)

jo.uOOQI mm |

r Restore Log File


iLlgilJl

CANCEL

Parameter
NO Type

Default
Select
N/A

Set Range

I/O Object*

Description

Select the type of the NC unit for the machine.


If no NC type is selected (which is the default
state), the compensation will not begin._
Interval (sec)
0 to 3599
10
The interval that the thermal displacement
O
compensation is performed. If the set value is
0, the compensation will be automatically
performed at the interval of 10 seconds, which
is default.
Follow up (hour)
3
Oto 24
Follow-up time. If the set value is 0, the
O
follow-up will not be performed._
Time Constant
Oto 30
0
Width of the dead zone
O
Temp filter
0
Oto 30
Number of the moving average filters to be
O
input for the temperature data
Load filter
0
0 to 30
Number of the moving average filters to be
O
input for the load data
Round Unit
0.0005mm
Rounding unit. Basically apply the same unit as
O
that of the NC interpolation. _
RX
0 to 20000
0
R Register No. which the X-axis thermal
O
displacement offset amount is written to. If the
set value is 0, the offset amount will not be
written.
RY
0
0 to 20000
R Register No. which the Y-axis thermal
O
displacement offset amount is written to. If the
set value is 0, the offset amount will not be
written.
RZ
0 to 20000
0
R Register No. which the Z-axis thermal
O
displacement offset amount is written to. If the
set value is 0, the offset amount will not be
written.
Rsts
Read the state of the machine in.
RT1
0
0 to 20000
R Register No. from which the NC value of the
O
temperature sensor 1 is read in. If the set value
is 0, the NC value of the temperature sensor
will not be read in. (The value will be 0.)_
RT2
0
0 to 20000
R Register No. from which the NC value of the
O
temperature sensor 2 is read in If the set value
is 0, the NC value of the temperature sensor
will not be read in. (The value will be 0.)_
RT3
0 to 20000
0
R Register No. from which the NC value of the
O
temperature sensor 3 is read in. If the set value
is 0, the NC value of the temperature sensor
will not be read in. (The value will be 0.)_
RT4
0 to 20000
0
R Register No. from which the NC value of the
O
temperature sensor 4 is read in. If the set value
is 0, the NC value of the temperature sensor
will not be read in. (The value will be 0.)_
RT5
0
0 to 20000
Number of R register from which the NC value
O
of the temperature sensor 5 is read in. If the
set value is 0, the NC value of the temperature
sensor will not be read in. (The value will be 0.)
Unit
0.0001 mm
Unit of offset amount
O
Check
Restore Log File
X
Checking this check box will automatically save
N/A
the thermal displacement compensation history
to the C:MazakTdcLog.txt file. This function
is valid at debugging. However, if debugging
with this parameter checked, the file size will
gradually increase, running out free space on
the hard drive. Therefore, this parameter is not
checked every time when starting the software
as default.
NOTE: The mark O indicates a parameter that is subject to and the mark x" indicates a parameter that is
not subject to the Import Parameter or the Export Parameter function.

_
_

411

7.3 Setting the parameters (coefficients a & b).


Clicking the
button on the tool bar will open the following Coefficientl setting.. dialog. The
description of each parameter is provided in the table below.

ill

Coefficientl Sett ing..


b

a1 -1 .23

a1 -5 98

a2 j 2 24

o2 179

a2

a3[~278

a5| 0 00
a6|-291

a6 -23 .16

04 3.05

'

a4

as j

1.73

0.00

a6 -27.70

b6 -7 79079E-04

b7 -2 58678E-04

j bsl

Wm

BBSs
Parameter Default

0 OODOOE+OO

b9 0.000C0E+00

V I b10 j -2 S000UE+01
ay

Set Range

I/O
Object*

-3.0e38 to +3.0e38

j O.OOOOOE+OO
b2| UOOOOOE+OO
b2| -1 09026E-05
b3 mSSFEg'"' b3| 0 OOOOOE+00
i t*r 9 2UnB(ir-14 b4| 0 ODOOOE+OO
j b5 }* 1 12160E 07
b5 I 0 00000E+00

9 76

: M(19.9S552E-01

a1 -7.33

a3| 6 91
o4|-1 .56
as j o no

a3 -3.92

b1

b1

j 9 96222E 01

b2 -8.54373E-06
b3

jTo6663E-10

b4 j -4 07307E-1 3

b5 -1 68425E-06

| 0 OODOOE+OO

b6 j -1 892S2E-03

|
| O.OOOOoifoO
b9 j O.OOOOOE+OO
b10j 0.00000E+00

b7 j 5.91 733E-03

b6

b7 0 00C0CIE+00
b8

j 0 OOCOOE+OO
b9 j 0 00C00E+G0
b10 j -5.00000E+01
b8

IkS3

CANCEL

Description

Coefficient of the temperature term for the structure


thermal displacement compensation
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
0
a2
Coefficient of the temperature term for the structure
O
thermal displacement compensation
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
a3
0
Coefficient of the temperature term for the structure
O
thermal displacement compensation
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
0
a4
Coefficient of the temperature term for the structure
O
thermal displacement compensation
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
0
a5
Coefficient of the temperature term for the structure
O
thermal displacement compensation
a6
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
Constant of the structure thermal displacement
O
compensation
b1
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
Coefficient of the displacement term for the spindle
O
response surface
b2
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
Coefficient of the speed term for the spindle response
O
surface
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
b3
0
Coefficient of the speed squared term for the spindle
O
response surface _
b4
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e3r
Coefficient
of the speed cubic term for the spindle
O
response surface
b5
0
-3.0e38 to +3.06
Coefficient of the (speed x displacement) term for the
O
spindle response surface
b6
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
0
Speed ON/OFF for the spindle response surface
O
b7
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
Speed UP/DOWN for the spindle response surface
O
b8
-3.0e38 to +3.0e35'
0
Squared nominal load coefficient for the spindle
O
response surface
b9
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
Not used
O
0
-3.0e38 to +3.0e38
b10
Determine the limit (the range of the offset
O
displacement). The offset amount by the spindle
response surface is limited to the range of b10 to 0 if
b10 < 0; and 0 to b10 if b10 > 0. (If b10 = 0, no limit.)
NOTE: The mark O indicates a parameter that is subject to and the mark x indicates a parameter that is
not subject to the Import Parameter or the Export Parameter function.
a1

412

7.4 Setting the parameters (coefficients c, d & e).


button on the tool bar will open the following Coefficientl setting.. dialog. The
Clicking the
description of each parameter is provided in the table below.

*J

11
X
c1 | 0.00000E+00
C2

f n OOOOOE+OO

d1

| 0.00000E+00

d2

faoooooF+00

df 0 00000E+00

c2

c2

] 852353F-01
d2[ 3.2941 0E-02

e1

1.00

e1

1 00

82

e3

e3
0 oc

eft

e2

e4

j O.OOOOOE+00

1 1.00
1 0.00

2
9 88000E-01
7.90000E-03

O.OOOOOE+OO

di
d2

e2

0 OOOOOE+OO

1 00

( 0 00

e3

100

e4

0 00

e4T

1 00

iniMzm
Parameter Default
c1
0

Set Range

I/O Object*

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

c2

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

d1

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

d2

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

e1

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

e2

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

e3

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

e4

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

1 00

CANCEL

Description
Displacement compensation coefficient 1 in
natural cooling at the spindle stop._
Displacement compensation coefficient 2 in
natural cooling at the spindle stop.
Distortion compensation coefficient 1 in natural
cooling at the spindle stop.
Distortion compensation coefficient 2 in natural
cooling at the spindle stop. _
Structure thermal displacement compensation is
valid
Spindle thermal displacement compensation with
the spindle response surface is valid _
Displacement compensation in natural cooling at

_
_

_
_

the spindle stop is valid


Distortion compensation in natural cooling at the
spindle stop is valid

413

8 Controlling the parameters


8.1 Saving the parameters to a file
Save the current setting to a parameters file (*.txt).
Step 1 Click File and then Export Parameter.
The following dialog will appear.

Coirc-n. jturv

Save

Save
Import Parameter

Export Parameter

&it

Step 2 Set the file name and click the Save button.
Save In: |.jj t,ta.wio
Parartveter.txt

8.2

Filename:

IBBHH-

Save astute

fiTI FilesOMxO
1

Save

Cancel

Importing the parameters from the file

Import the parameters file (*.txt). It is required to save the parameters file in the Mazaktdc folder.
(However, the parameters cannot be imported during the thermal displacement compensation.)
Step 1 Click File and then Import Parameter.
The following dialog will appear.

Edit .Compensation

. CtrKS

Save
Save As.
:

Export Parameter
Exit;

Step 2 Select the parameters file to be used from the Mazaktdc folder and then click the Open
button.
Save;|n:

Mazaktdc

H aJdjl=Tj

ll) Farameter.txt

Filename:

..

Save as type:

414

Save

jT*:< t

Files ( txO

Cancel

Step 3 Exit the Mazaktdc software once and restart it.


(As for how to exit or start the software, refer to 3 Basic function operations.)
By performing the above steps, the parameter will be saved in the registry.

8.3 Name of the parameters file


Define and identify the name of the parameters file as follows:
Machine standard parameter

tdcOOOAAAAA.txt
Identifies that it is the thermal displacement parameters file.
Machine code
A A A A A : Identifies the added number, the machine specification or the parameter version.
Determine the string and the digit number for every machine

tdc

OOO

EX) tdc 372A0000.txt (in case of INT100)


tdc OOODHBAA.txt
Machine code
O:
Version identification
Special-ordered
A:
A:
Revision to the special-ordered one

9 Work involved in the hard-disk replacement


When replacing the hard disk, perform the following procedure to the "MazakTdc software.
Item necessary to be prepared:
Media such as a USB memory

Step 1 Save (export) the parameters.


Save the parameters in the "Mazaktdc folder, referring to 8. Controlling the parameters."
Note: If no change was made to the parameters on a customers machine, it is not needed
to save the parameters because the file of the default parameters at delivery already
exists in the folder "C:Mazaktdc.
Step 2 Save the *.txt" files under the C:Mazaktdc folder to the media.
Step 3 Replace the hard disk.

Step 4 Turn on the power and copy the "*.txt file in the media to the C:Mazaktdc folder.
Step 5 Import the parameters, referring to 4 Basic function operations, 5 Opening the window"
and 8 Controlling the parameters.

Step 6 Turn off and then turn on the power to check that the "MazakTdc software is started up.

415

10 Recovering the wire breaking on a thermistor


The alarm THERMAL DISPLACEMENT OFFSET ERROR will arise when the wire breaking occurs
on a thermistor.
The CH temperature value will change for a thermistor with the wire breaking and the offset amount
will considerably change in the Mazaktdc window, as shown in the figure below.

- a)x|

-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformation Compensation


File Edit Compensation Setting.. View Help

H v 3V

ffi

05/06/27 19:48:03;
05/06/27 19:48:13;
05/06/27 19:48:23;
05/06/27 19:48:33;
05/06/27 19:43:43;
05/08/27 19:43:53;
05/06/27 19.49:03;

ab

20.95

20.75

20.95
20.95
20.95
20.98
20.95

20.70
20.75
20.75

20 95

%<l : c!

21.98
22.07
22.03
22.12
22.03
22.03
21.93

20.75

20.75
20 75

X
3000
3000

0.00

20.521
20.47

20.47
20.47

20.47

0.4/

0.00
0.00

3000

0.00

3000

0.00

3000

0.00

3000

0.00

3000

7
7
7
7
7
7

goo

6.500
6.500
6.500

4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500

6.500
6.500

4.500

6.500
6.500

joo

File

Edit

H ' *> BV

ffi

tefr

05/08/27 19:58:03; 20.95


05/06/27 19:53:13; 20.95
05/08/27 19:58:23; 20.95
05/06/27 19:58:33; 20.95
05/06/27 19:58:43; 20.98
05/06/27 19:58:53; 20.95
05/06/27 19:59:03; 20.95

20.75
20.70

Ready

View

ab Cfl
21.98
22.07

20.75
20.75

22.03

20.75

22.03

20.75

22.03

20.75

21.98

22.12

12.500
12.500
12.500

Considerably
change

in|x|

) ffjfe
44.1a

-44.16\

0.00
0.00

3000
3000

-44.16 1 0.00
-44.16 j 0.00

3000

I
1

0.00
0.00

-44.16
-44.16

\-44.1i

0.00

3000
3000

3000
3000

7
7
7
7

7
7
7

#7?) .500
76.500
82.500
88.500
98.500
100.000
'WO .000

il

-49.500
-53.500

-36.500*
-41.000

-57.500

-45.500

-61.500
-65.500
-69.500
-73.500

-50.000

ui ffi

05/06/27 20:03:03; 20.95


05/06/27 20:03:13; 20 .95
05/O6/27 20:03:23; 20.95
05/06/27 20:03:33; 20.95
05/06/27 20:03:43; 20.98
05/06/27 20:03:53; 20 95
05/06/27 20:03:03; 20.95

.3

-54.500

20.75
20.70
20.75

21.98
22.07
22.03

20.75

22.12

20.75
20.75

22.03

20.75

21.98

22.03

@ ?

-44 16
-44 16

0.00

,IOjxj

Recovered

V
i

~j Will not recover "Il


soon after action

a 8#0

-80.500
85 000
89.500

0.00
0.00

3000

3000
3000

'SfoO.OOO

20.47 ! 0.00

-100.000 -77 500

-85.000

20.47/ 0.00

3000

-100.000 -73.500

-S0[5G0

0.00

[RUM f

0.00

20.47\

State at the
wire breaking

-J

-59.000

.b

-63.500

12.500,

Help

-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformatioij Compent


File Edit Compensate Setting.. View

Normal state

Jll:

Deformatio|i Cotwarn

Setting.

Compensation

ill

12.500

rm r 4

Ready

-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal

12.50l>
12.500

Ready

-1Q|

.500

-81.500

yv000

State that the


wire breaking
was recovered

-89.5(315%

;NUM

d
A

After finding the wire breaking on a thermistor, recover it according to the procedure below.

Step 1 Open the "MazakTdc window and check the temperature values and the offset amounts
of the thermistor channels (CH 1 to 5) for wire breaking.
Step 2 Press the Emergency button on the machine.
Step 3 Recover the wire breaking of a thermistor.
Step 4 Confirm that the temperature value of a channel with the wire breaking was recovered on
the MazakTdc window.
(It will take a longer time for the offset amount to return to the normal state due to the
filders.)
Step 5 Restart the MazakTdc software. (As for how to exit and start the MazakTdc software
refer to 4 Basic function operations.

Step 6 Confirm that the temperature value and the offset amount were recovered.

416

11 Handling procedure after turning the production machine ON


It is required to import the parameters after turning the production machine ON. The following
provides the procedure.
Step 1 Copy the specified parameters file *.txt to the C:Mazaktdc folder.
[ W.tj'grl Mazaktdc

-!n|x|

:. SrSW :

PS.-OTP
S rx)frr
71 3>t>S
M S)

MW*

X*!j| I iNi MasakTde.exe

35<>f FD (A;)

! jgj Parameter trt

B- <Ci

d AcrobatReader
Cl C">~

60KB TfWWj
4KB 747K#

(_J Custom Display


J2ctbus

O Ladder

gj Ladders

Cj Ladder4
j LADDERWTNB

DmSv.ymw
m6yboot
SI

g) Mamte
dEHHSS

& d MC.Backee

Cj MC.Direct Mode

1 MC_Machme

10*?%'*.:

P n[

Pfogrl JLL

di

Step 2 Start MazakTdc.exe manually. Refer to 4 Basic function operations.


Step 3 Open the window. Refer to 5 Opening the window.
Step 4 Import the parameters. Refer to 8 Controlling the parameters.

Step 5 Click the

button to close the window.

Step 6 Exit MazakTdc.exe. Refer to 4.2 Exiting the software.


Step 7 Set the parameter for the software functions on Matrix so that the MazakTdc software
can be started from Matrix. Refer to 2.1 Function setting on Matrix.

417

418